Yamaha PF1000 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: PF1000

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

PF-1000

DIC 338

Yamaha Web Site (English only)

www.yamahasynth.com

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

2002 Yamaha Corporation

V939640 205APAP1.3-01A0 Printed in Japan

This document is printed on recycled chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate

on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of

the main keyboard unit. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The

voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a

"minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the

pointer on the panel.

Before using the PF-1000, be sure to read “Precautions„ on pages 3-4.

Owner's Manual

PF-1000

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IIMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic prod-

ucts are tested and approved by an independent safety

testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when

it is properly installed and used in its normal and custom-

ary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated.

DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

PF-1000

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

Introduction

92-469

PF-1000

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even

death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

•

Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

•

Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

•

Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

•

Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters

or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage

the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where

anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

•

Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter-

nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no

user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

•

Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in

damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liq-

uids which might spill into any openings.

•

Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

•

Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

•

If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there

is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any

unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,

immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric

plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by quali-

ﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or

others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

•

When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord

can damage it.

•

Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is

not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical

storms.

•

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a mul-

tiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

•

Read carefully this manual or the attached documentation

explaining the assembly process.

Failure to assemble the stand in the proper sequence might

result in damage to the instrument or even injury.

•

Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or

extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or

in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁgu-

ration or damage to the internal components.

•

Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo

equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,

the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

•

Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it

might accidentally fall over.

•

Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

•

Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since

this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal compo-

nents, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembling the keyboard stand

Location

(1)B-7

1/2

PF-1000

•

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo-

nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the

power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to mini-

mum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

•

When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp

cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or

chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

•

Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the

gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC out-

let. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha ser-

vice personnel.

•

Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,

since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

•

Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instru-

ment, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or

connectors.

•

Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high

or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent

hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the

ears, consult a physician.

•

Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

•

Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a

tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in acci-

dent or injury.

•

Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to

prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

•

If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term

use, tighten them periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

•

Current memory data (see page 39) is lost when you turn off the

power to the instrument. Save the data to a ﬂoppy disk/the User

Drive (see page 39).

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect opera-

tion. Save important data to a ﬂoppy disk.

Backing up the ﬂoppy disk

•

To protect against data loss through media damage, we recom-

mend that you save your important data onto two ﬂoppy disks.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

When you change settings in a display page and then exit

from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter

Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically

stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the

power without properly exiting from the relevant display.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

(1)B-7

2/2

PF-1000

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PF-1000 electronic piano! We

recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take

advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the PF-1000. We also

recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future

reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference.

Also, a separate Data List is provided.

Introduction (page 2):

Please read this section ﬁrst.

Quick Guide (page 20):

This section explains how to use the basic functions.

Basic Operation (page 38):

This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls.

Reference (page 52):

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PF-1000’s various functions.

Data List :

Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

* The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

* The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English.

* The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh co., Ltd.

* Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

Trademarks:

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has

license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE

data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant

laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

PF-1000

Accessories

■

“50 greats for the Piano” Disk (and Music Book)

■

Recording disk

■

Owner’s Manual

■

Data List

■

Pedal Unit

■

Bench (included or optional depending on locale)

■

Dust Cover

■

Music Rest

■

Keyboard Stand

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disk

Precautions

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.

• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

To insert a ﬂoppy disk into the disk drive:

• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward,

towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the

slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into

place and the eject button pops out.

To eject a ﬂoppy disk:

Before ejecting the disk, be sure to conﬁrm that data

is not being written to the ﬂoppy disk.

If data is currently being written to the ﬂoppy disk in

the following operations, the messages “Now

executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting”

appears in the display.

• Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data

(page 42 - 44).

• Naming ﬁles and folders (page 41); creating a new

folder (page 44).

• Copying a disk to an another disk (page 139);

formatting the disk (page 139).

Compatible Disk Type

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks

Drive lamp

When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at the bottom

left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used.

Eject button

PF-1000

• Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

when the data is being written to the ﬂoppy disk.

Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk

drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;

the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is

fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.

• If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not

pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject

properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-

pressed position with the disk extending from the

drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do

not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since

using force in this situation can damage the disk drive

mechanism or the ﬂoppy disk. To remove a partially

ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again,

or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the

eject procedure.

• Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data read and write errors.

• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will

eventually cause read and write errors.

• To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-

available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the

head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer

about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.

• Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk

drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk

drive or ﬂoppy disks.

To handle ﬂoppy disks with care:

• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy

disks in their protective cases when they are not in

use.

• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely

high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust

or liquids.

• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

• Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as

those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,

since magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase

data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

• Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or

housing.

• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels

to a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are

attached in the proper location.

To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):

• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide

the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position

(tab open).

Data backup

• For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that

you keep two copies of important data on separate

ﬂoppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost

or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to

Disk function on page 139.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

About the Floppy Disks

write-protect tab open

(protect position)

PF-1000

About the Display Messages

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to

facilitate operation.

When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the

corresponding button.

You can select the desired

language from the Help dis-

play (page 49).

For this example, press the

[G] (YES) button to

execute formatting.

PF-1000

Table of Contents

Introduction

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION ................................... 2

PRECAUTIONS.......................................................... 3

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 5

Accessories ............................................................... 6

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)

and Floppy Disk..................................................... 6

About the Display Messages.................................... 8

Application Index................................................... 12

What can you do with the PF-1000?...................... 14

Setting Up the PF-1000.......................................... 16

About the pedal unit............................................................... 16

About the music rest............................................................... 16

Turning the Power On and Off................................................ 16

Using headphones .................................................................. 17

Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18

Quick Guide

Playing the Demos ................................................. 20

Song Playback ........................................................ 21

Playback of Songs ....................................................21

Playing Voices ........................................................ 25

Playing a Voice ........................................................25

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26

Playing Different Voices with the Left

and Right Hands...................................................27

Playing Styles ......................................................... 28

Playing a style..........................................................28

Style Sections...........................................................30

One Touch Setting...................................................32

Music Finder........................................................... 33

Using the Music Finder ............................................33

Searching the Music Finder Records.........................34

Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data...................35

Playing and Practicing with the Songs.................. 36

Playing Along with the PF-1000 ...............................36

Recording ................................................................37

Basic Operations

— Organizing Your Data ....... 38

Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 40

File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 41

Naming Files/Folders ...............................................41

Moving Files/Folders ................................................42

Copying Files/Folders...............................................43

Deleting Files/Folders...............................................43

Saving Files ..............................................................44

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............44

Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................44

Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................44

Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 46

Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 47

Help Messages........................................................ 49

Using the Metronome............................................ 50

Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 50

Tap Tempo ............................................................. 51

Reference

Playing the Demos.................52

Voices.....................................54

Selecting a Voice .................................................... 54

One-touch Piano Play.............................................. 55

Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds

Simultaneously .................................................... 56

Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 56

Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left

and Right Sections of the Keyboard ..................... 57

Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 57

Using the Pedals..................................................... 58

Styles......................................59

Playing a style ........................................................ 59

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 61

Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 61

Chord Fingerings.................................................... 62

Arranging the Style Pattern

(SECTIONS:

MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) ...................64

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys

(SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 65

Selecting Intro and Ending Types

(INTRO/ENDING) ................................................ 66

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing

accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 66

Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected

Style

(ONE TOUCH SETTING)......................................67

Automatically Changing One Touch Settings

with the Sections — OTS Link .............................. 68

Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch

Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING)........................... 68

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music

— Music Finder.................................................... 69

Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search

.... 70

Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit ........... 71

PF-1000

Song Playback ....................... 73

Compatible Song Types......................................... 73

Song Playback ........................................................ 74

Playing the Internal Songs........................................74

Playing Back Songs on Disk......................................76

Other Playback-related Operations...........................76

Muting Specific Parts

— Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks............................ 77

Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 77

Displaying Music Notation — Score ...................... 78

Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 81

Saving and Recalling Custom

Panel Setups

— Registration Memory ....... 82

Registering Panel Setups

— Registration Memory...................................... 82

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.................83

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 84

Editing Voices

— Sound Creator ................... 85

Operation ............................................................... 85

SOUND CREATOR Parameters ............................... 86

Recording Your Performances

and Creating Songs

— Song Creator ..................... 90

About Song Recording........................................... 90

Quick Recording..................................................... 91

Multi Recording ..................................................... 92

Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 94

Operation ................................................................94

Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ..............96

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompani-

ment — Step Record (Chord) ...............................97

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,

Punching In/Out — Rec Mode............................ 99

Editing a Recorded Song ..................................... 100

Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel.....100

Editing Note Events — 1 - 16.................................103

Editing Chord Events — CHD.................................104

Editing System Events

— SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) .............................104

Inputting and Editing Lyrics ...................................105

Customizing the Event List — Filter........................105

Creating Accompaniment

Styles — Style Creator .........106

About Creating Accompaniment Styles............... 106

Style File Format................................................... 107

Operation ............................................................. 107

Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 108

Step Recording..................................................... 109

Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly

.. 110

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 111

Change the Rhythmic Feel

— Groove and Dynamics ................................... 111

Editing the Channel Data...................................... 113

Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter ..... 114

Adjust the Volume Balance

and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console ................116

Operation ............................................................. 116

Setting the Level Balance and Voice

— Volume/Voice ............................................... 117

Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 118

Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 118

Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 119

Effect Structure ..................................................... 121

Making Global and Other

Important Settings

— Function...........................122

Operation ............................................................. 122

Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale

— Master Tune/Scale Tune............................... 124

Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 124

Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune ............................. 124

Setting Song-related Parameters

— Song Settings................................................ 126

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related

Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point,

and Chord Fingering......................................... 127

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters

— Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 127

Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering

... 128

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard

— Controller...................................................... 128

Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 128

Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose

— Keyboard/Panel............................................. 130

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,

and Voice Set..................................................... 131

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration

Memory Presets — Registration Sequence.......... 131

Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .................... 131

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice

Settings — Voice Set.......................................... 132

PF-1000

Introduction

Quick Guide

Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data

Playing the Demos

Voices

Styles

Song Playback

Saving and Recalling Custom

Panel Setups - Registration Memory

Editing Voices - Sound Creator

Recording Your Performances

and Creating Songs - Song Creator

Creating Accompaniment Styles

- Style Creator

Adjust the Volume Balance

and Changing Voices - Mixing Console

Making Global and Other Important

Settings - Function

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

Appendix

Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 132

Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV

— Video Out...................................................... 133

Setting the MIDI Parameters............................... 134

Making Overall System Settings

(Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System.................134

Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................135

Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................136

Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................136

Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............136

Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 137

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,

Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............137

Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System,

and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2........138

Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk...................139

Entering Your Name and Language Preference

— Owner............................................................140

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

of the PF-1000 — System Reset ..........................140

Using Your PF-1000 with Other

Devices................................. 141

Using the Headphones (PHONES jacks)..................141

Connecting the Microphone or Guitar

(MIC/LINE IN jack)..............................................141

Connecting Audio & Video Devices .......................142

Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller

(AUX PEDAL jack) ...............................................143

Connecting external MIDI devices

(MIDI terminals) .................................................143

Connecting to a Computer

(MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................143

What’s MIDI?.........................................................145

What You Can Do With MIDI.................................147

Data Compatibility............................................... 148

Disk format ............................................................148

Sequence Format...................................................148

Voice Allocation Format .........................................149

Assembling the Keyboard

Stand ................................... 150

Troubleshooting.................. 152

Specifications ...................... 154

Index ................................... 156

PF-1000

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your particular

application and situation.

Listening

Listening to the internal songs................................................................................................................ page 74

Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 76

Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 52

Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 54

Listening to songs with the special voices of the PF-1000..................................................................... page 117

Playing

Calling up the piano setting ................................................................................................................... page 55

Using the three performance control pedals........................................................................................... page 58

Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 130

Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 56

Playing separate voices with the right and left hands

...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 57

Changing the sound

Enhancing the sound with reverb and other effects .....................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 57

.................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 119

Adjusting the Level Balance................................................................................................................. page 117

Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 56

Playing separate voices with the right and left hands

...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 57

Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 85

Playing the auto accompaniment

Playing the accompaniment automatically............................................................................................. page 59

Calling up ideal panel settings for your music........................................................................................ page 69

Practicing

Muting the right- or left-hand part...................“Muting Speciﬁc Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks” on page 77

Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 50

Recording

Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 91, 92

Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 94

Creating your original settings

Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 85

Creating accompaniment styles............................................................................................................ page 106

PF-1000

Using a microphone

Connecting the microphone............... ”Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC/LINE IN jack)” on page 141

Settings

Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 82

Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 124

Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 122

Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 127

Making settings for the pedals...........“Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller” on page 128

Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 130

Showing the display on a TV .......................“Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV — Video Out” on page 133

Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 134

Connecting the PF-1000 to other devices

Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 145

Recording your performance...................”Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external audio system,

and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks)” on page 142

Raising the volume .................................”Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external audio system,

and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks)” on page 142

Outputting another instrument’s sound from the PF-1000 .............. ”Outputting the sound of an external device

through the built in speakers of the PF-1000 (AUX IN jacks)” on page 142

Connecting a computer........... .”Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals)” on page 143

Assembling the keyboard stand

Using the stand.......................................................................... “Assembling the Keyboard Stand” on page 150

Quick solution

Basic functions of the PF-1000 and how you can best use it ...........................................................pages 12, 14

Resetting the PF-1000 to the default setting

............................ “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PF-1000 — System Reset” on page 140

Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 152

PF-1000

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5

What can you do with the PF-1000?

SONG

Playback previously recorded

songs (page 21, 36, 73)

Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs

as well as songs on commercially

available disks.

DEMO

Explore the Demos

(page 20, 52)

These not only showcase the

stunning voices and styles of

the instrument, they

introduce you to the various

functions and features — and

give you hands-on

experience using the PF-

1000!

STYLE

Back up your performance with Auto

Accompaniment (page 28, 59)

Playing a chord with your left hand automatically

plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an

accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin,

etc. — and let the PF-1000 be your backing band!

DIGITAL RECORDING

Record your performances

(page 90, 106)

With the powerful and easy-to-use song

recording features, you can record your

own keyboard performances, and create

your own complete, fully orchestrated

compositions — which you can then save to

the USER drive or a ﬂoppy disk for future

recall.

PF-1000

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

6 7 8

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

LCD

The large LCD (together

with the various panel

buttons) provides

comprehensive and easy-

to-understand control of

the PF-1000’s operations.

MUSIC FINDER

Call up the perfect accompaniment

style (page 33, 69)

If you know what song you want to play,

but you don’t know which style or voice

would be right for it, let the Music Finder

help you. Just select the song title, and

the PF-1000 automatically calls up the

most appropriate style and voice.

TO HOST terminal

Make music with a computer — quickly and easily (page 143)

Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music

software. Connections and setup are exceptionally easy, and you can

play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument

sounds — all from a single PF-1000!

PIANO

Set up the piano —

instantly (page 55)

You can call up all the

optimum piano settings for

the PF-1000 with just a single

button press — then play the

extraordinarily realistic grand

piano voice.

VOICE

Enjoy a huge variety of

realistic voices (page 25, 54)

The PF-1000 features a wealth of

exceptionally authentic and

dynamic voices (more than 800)

— including piano, strings,

woodwinds, and more!

PEDAL AUX PEDALAC INLET

VIDEO OUT AUX IN

MIDI TO HOSTHOST SELECT

L/L+R

RL R

L/L+R

THRU

ON OFF

MIDI PC-2 MacPC-1

OUT

AUX OUT PHONES POWER

LEVEL FIXED

MIN MAX

INPUT

VOLUME MIC

LINE IN MIC LINE

PF-1000

Setting Up the PF-1000

You do not need to install the stand to play the PF-1000. However, if you wish to assemble the stand, refer to page 150.

Insert the plug of the pedal unit, with the arrow in the

plug facing upward.

The PF-1000 is supplied with a music rest that can be

attached to the instrument by inserting it into the holes at

the rear of the control panel.

Connect the power cable.

First insert the plug of the power cable into the [AC

INLET] on the left side panel, then plug the other end

of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.

(The shape of plug differs depending on locale.)

WARNING

Make sure your PF-1000 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the

area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name

plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be

provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit. Make sure

that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area.

Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious

damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the PF-1000. If the

supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact

your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can

pose a ﬁre and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord provided with the PF-1000 may be

different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some

areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration

of the AC wall outlets in your area.) DO NOT modify the plug provided

with the PF-1000. If the plug will not ﬁt the outlet, have a proper outlet

installed by a qualiﬁed electrician.

About the pedal unit

About the music rest

Turning the Power On

and Off

240V

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

PF-1000

Press the [POWER] switch located on the left side

panel to turn on the power.

→ The main display appears in the LCD display.

When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the

[POWER] switch again.

→ The display will turn off.

Adjusting the display contrast

If the LCD is difﬁcult to read, adjust the contrast with the

[LCD CONTRAST] knob at the left of the LCD.

Setting the volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to

an appropriate level.

CAUTION

Do not use the PF-1000 at a high volume level for a long period of

time, or your hearing may be damaged.

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES]

jacks on the left side panel.

Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.

Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged

in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you

can plug them into either of these jacks.)

CAUTION

Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of

time. Doing so may cause hearing loss.

ON OFF

POWER

LCD

CONTRAST

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

Using headphones

PHONES

PF-1000

Panel Controls and Terminals

MASTER VOLUME

[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................P. 17

[FADE IN / OUT] button ..................................................P. 65

METRONOME

[START / STOP] button (METRONOME)........................P. 50

STYLE

STYLE buttons ...............................................................P. 59

STYLE CONTROL

[ACMP] button ................................................................P. 60

[AUTO FILLIN] button .....................................................P. 66

[OTS LINK] button ..........................................................P. 68

[BREAK] button ..............................................................P. 64

[INTRO] button .........................................................P. 31, 66

MAIN [A] – [D] buttons....................................................P. 64

[ENDING / rit.] button................................................P. 31, 66

[SYNC.STOP] button ......................................................P. 65

[SYNC.START] button ....................................................P. 60

[START / STOP] button (STYLE CONTROL) .................P. 60

SONG

[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ................................P. 77

[TRACK 2 (L)] button ......................................................P. 77

[TRACK 1 (R)] button .....................................................P. 77

[REC] button...................................................................P. 90

[TOP] button ...................................................................P. 76

[START / STOP] button (SONG).....................................P. 74

[REW] button ..................................................................P. 76

[FF] button ......................................................................P. 76

[REPEAT] button.............................................................P. 77

TEMPO

[–] [+] buttons (TEMPO) .................................................P. 50

[TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................P. 51

TRANSPOSE

[–] [+] buttons (TRANSPOSE) ......................................P. 130

[DEMO] button................................................................P. 52

[HELP] button .................................................................P. 49

[FUNCTION] button......................................................P. 122

DIGITAL STUDIO

[SOUND CREATOR] button............................................P. 85

[DIGITAL RECORDING] button ..............................P. 90, 106

[MIXING CONSOLE] button .........................................P. 116

DISPLAY CONTROL

[LCD CONTRAST] knob.................................................P. 17

[A] - [J] buttons ...............................................................P. 40

[DIRECT ACCESS] button .............................................P. 47

[BALANCE] button..........................................................P. 61

[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button...................................P. 61, 76

▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ............................................P. 38 - 45

[BACK] button...........................................................P. 40, 46

[NEXT] button...........................................................P. 40, 46

[ENTER] button ..............................................................P. 46

[DATA ENTRY] dial .........................................................P. 46

[EXIT] button...................................................................P. 40

VOICE PART ON/OFF

[LAYER] button ...............................................................P. 56

[LEFT] button..................................................................P. 56

MUSIC FINDER

[MUSIC FINDER] button.................................................P. 69

Floppy disk drive (3.5”) .....................................................P. 6

VOICE EFFECT

[REVERB] button............................................................P. 57

[DSP] button ...................................................................P. 57

[VARIATION] button........................................................P. 57

[HARMONY / ECHO] button...........................................P. 58

[MONO] button ...............................................................P. 58

[LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................P. 58

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 54

PEDAL AUX PEDALAC INLET

VIDEO OUT AUX IN

MIDI TO HOSTHOST SELECT

L/L+R

RL R

L/L+R

THRU

ON OFF

MIDI PC-2 MacPC-1

OUT

AUX OUT PHONES POWER

LEVEL FIXED

MIN MAX

INPUT

VOLUME MIC

LINE IN MIC LINE

5 76

8 9

13 14

15 17

18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26

7372

62 63

67 69 70

646160

PF-1000

VOICE

VOICE buttons................................................................P. 54

ONE TOUCH SETTING

[1] - [4] buttons (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ......................P. 67

PIANO Setting

[PIANO] button ...............................................................P. 55

REGISTRATION MEMORY

[FREEZE] button ............................................................P. 84

[1] – [8] buttons (REGISTRATION MEMORY)................P. 82

[MEMORY] button...........................................................P. 82

Connectors

[VIDEO OUT] jack ........................................................P. 142

AUX IN [L / L+R] [R] jacks ............................................P. 142

AUX OUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ........................................P. 142

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks........................P. 142

[PHONES] jacks ...........................................................P. 141

[AC INLET] .....................................................................P. 16

[PEDAL] jack...................................................................P. 16

[AUX PEDAL] jack ........................................................P. 143

MIDI [THRU] [OUT] [IN] terminals ................................P. 143

[HOST SELECT] switch................................................P. 143

[TO HOST] terminal......................................................P. 144

POWER

[ON / OFF] button (POWER) ..........................................P. 17

Microphone Connectors

[INPUT VOLUME] knob ................................................P. 141

[MIC / LINE IN] jack......................................................P. 141

[MIC LINE] switch.........................................................P. 141

Pedals

Left pedal........................................................................P. 58

Sostenuto pedal..............................................................P. 58

Damper pedal.................................................................P. 58

The Panel Logos

The logos printed on the PF-1000 panel indicate standards/

formats it supports and special features it includes.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which

guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play

accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer

from any manufacturer.

XG Format

XG is a new Yamaha MIDI speciﬁcation which signiﬁcantly

expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with

greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect

capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the

PF-1000’s XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible song

ﬁles.

XF Format

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)

standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability

for the future. The PF-1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an

XF ﬁle containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common

format used for MIDI sequence ﬁles. The PF-1000 is compatible

with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF

Format 0.)

Disk Orchestra Collection

The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback

compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI

devices.

Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format,

which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality

automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

The PF-1000 uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks,

and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator feature.

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

5 6 7 8

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

57 58 59

49 50 52 53

Quick Guide

Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Playing the Demos

The PF-1000 features an extensive variety of Demo songs,

that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its dynamic

rhythms and styles.

What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo

functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of

all the important features and functions of the instrument

— letting you see ﬁrsthand how to effectively use the PF-

1000 in your own music.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve ﬁnished playing the

demo songs.

When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PF-1000 even better with these functions:

• Preset Song (Song Book) playback (page 21)

• Disk Song Playback (page 21)

• Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26).

Reference

on page 52

Demo button

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

2 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo

categories.

BACK NEXT

Voice Demos showcase the

voices of the PF-1000. Style

Demos introduce you to the

rhythms and accompaniment

styles of the PF-1000

(page 52).

For this example, FUNCTION

is selected. Function Demos

demonstrate many of the

different functions on the PF-

1000.

1 Pressing the [DEMO] button

automatically plays back the

Demo songs at random.

Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs.

For this example, press the [8▼] (AUTO) button.

All of the function demos are played back in sequence.

2 31 5 6 7 84

For details about the Demos,

refer to page 52.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

Song Playback

Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of

the PF-1000 come together — in songs!

As you heard in the Demos, the PF-1000 contains many built-in recordings. But there’s more. Check out the included

disk or call up the Song Open (PRESET) display. And there’s an even greater wealth of song material you can enjoy with

your PF-1000 — in commercially available software.

The following songs are compatible for playback on the PF-1000. Refer to pages 73, 148 for more details on the logos.

Playback of Songs

1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive.

Reference

on page 73

Song related buttons

Floppy disk drive

BALANCE and CHANNEL buttons

Make sure that the Lan-

guage setting for the instru-

ment (page 140) is the same

as that of the ﬁle name of the

song that you are playing

back.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices deﬁned in the GM standard.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM

standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices deﬁned in Yamaha’s DOC format.

Songs containing a large

amount of data may not be

able to be read properly by

the instrument, and as such

you may not be able to

select them. The maximum

capacity is about 200–

300KB, however this may

differ depending on the data

contents of each song.

• Make sure to read the

section “Using the Floppy

Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks” on page 6.

CAUTION

Song Playback

Quick Guide

2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

3 PRESET only

Press the [A] button to select the preset songs (Song Book) folder.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.

PRESET FLOPPY DISK

From the MAIN display (the

display shown when the

power is turned on), you can

select songs, voices, accom-

paniment styles, etc.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

4 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select a song ﬁle.

5 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

6 While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on —

letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the ﬂy!

1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button.

2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off.

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

• To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button.

• With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyr-

ics on the display during playback. You can also view the score. See pages 78 and 81 for

details.

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PA RT

2 31 5 6 7 842 31 5 6 7 84

If the STYLE tab is

selected, press this button

again.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels

of the individual parts — the song, the style, your singing, and your playing.

1) Press the [BALANCE] button.

2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

BALANCE

2 31 5 6 7 84

You can call up a full set of

mixing controls by pressing

the [MIXING CONSOLE]

button (page 116).

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

• The [FADE IN/OUT] but-

ton (page 65) can be used

to produce smooth fade-

ins and fade-outs when

starting and stopping the

song, as well as the

accompaniment.

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

Playing Voices

The PF-1000 features a stunning variety of over 800 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try playing

some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how to

select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands.

Playing a Voice

1 Press the [F] button to call up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

2 Select a voice group.

Reference

on page 54

Voice related buttons

ON/OFF

LAYER

LEFT

VOICE

PART

The voice you’re selecting

here belongs to the MAIN

part, and is called the MAIN

voice. (See page 56 for more

information.)

Yo u ’ll want to hear the MAIN

voice all by itself — so make sure

that the LAYER and LEFT parts

are turned off.

USERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

PIANO & ORGAN &

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

VOICE

For this example, STRINGS

is selected.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]

button to select the memory

location of the voice. For this

example, PRESET is

selected.

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

3 Select a voice.

4 Play the voices.

Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also

have the PF-1000 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲] button

from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn the LAYER part on.

2 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part.

3 Select a voice group.

Here, we’ll select a lush pad to ﬁll out the sound. Call up the “CHOIR & PAD” group.

4 Select a voice.

For example, select “Hah Choir.”

5 Play the voices.

Now, you can play two different voices together in a

rich sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in

the previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve

selected here.

And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features:

• Instant setup of the PF-1000 for piano play — with the press of a single button (page 55).

• Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 85).

• Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need

them (page 82).

For this example,

”Orchestra” is

selected.

Press the corresponding buttons to select the

other pages — and discover even more voices.

Press the [8▲] button to start the

Demo for the selected voice. To stop

the Demo, press this button again.

There’s more to the Demo features

than just voices, though–for more

information, see page 52.

You can instantly jump back

to the Main display by “dou-

ble-clicking” on one of the [A]

- [J] buttons.

ON/OFF

LAYER

LEFT

VOICE

PART

USERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

PIANO & ORGAN &

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

VOICE

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the

LEFT part on.

2 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part.

3 Select a voice group.

Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play rich, orchestral chords with your left hand.

4 Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

For example, select “Symphon. Str.”

5 Press the [I] button to call up the SPLIT POINT display. From here, you can set the particular key on the

keyboard that separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F]

or [G] button and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 127.)

6 Play the voices.

The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you play with your right sound a

different voice (or voices).

MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left

hand.

7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

ON/OFF

LAYER

LEFT

VOICE

PART

USERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

PIANO & ORGAN &

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

VOICE

Split Point

LEFT

MAIN/LAYER

EXIT

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

The PF-1000 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your own

performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion

accompaniment to a full band or orchestra.

Playing a style

1 Select a style group and a style.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

2 Turn ACMP on.

The speciﬁed left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords

played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with

the selected style.

3 Turn SYNC.START on.

Reference

on page 59

Style related buttons

POP & ROCK

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN

STYLE

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to

select the memory location of the

style. For this example, PRESET is

selected.

For this example,

EuroTrance is selected.

For this example, DANCE is

selected.

Auto Accompaniment

section

Split Point

ACMP

• The point on the key-

board that separates the

auto accompaniment sec-

tion and the right-hand

section of the keyboard is

called the “split point.”

Refer to page 127 for

instructions on setting the

split point.

SYNC.START

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

5 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[–] [+] buttons if necessary.

Simultaneously press the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons to return the tempo to its

original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display.

6 Try playing other chords with your left hand.

For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 62.

7 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the style.

And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features:

• Easily create your own original styles (page 106).

• Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need

them (page 82).

Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects

This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your

right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too.

1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on.

2 Turn ACMP on (page 28).

3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the

keyboard.

The PF-1000 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 132).

The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice.

• Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of

the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 57).

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

The Tempo can also be

adjusted by using the [TAP

TEMPO] button (page 51).

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB DSP VARIATION

VOICE EFFECT

For details about Harmony/

Echo types, refer to the sep-

arate Data List.

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

Style Sections

Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic

style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings,

Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professional-

sounding arrangements.

1 - 4 Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29.

5 Press the [INTRO] button.

6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

When the playback of the intro is ﬁnished, it automatically leads into main section.

7 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK]

button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure

on the next page.)

8 Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a ﬁll-in, if

necessary.

Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in

the Main sections.

9 Press the [ENDING] button.

This switches to the ending section. When the ending

is ﬁnished, the style automatically stops.

INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the

main section.

MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures,

and repeats indeﬁnitely until another section’s button is pressed.

BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your

performance sound even more professional.

ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops

automatically.

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

MAIN

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK

ENDING/rit.

MAIN

AUTO FILL IN

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

MAIN

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

■ Accompaniment Structure

Other Controls

FADE IN/OUT The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 65)when starting and stopping

the style.

TAP TEMPO The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details,

see page 51.

SYNC.STOP When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in

the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your

performance. For details, see page 65.

INTRO (page xx)

MAIN VARIATION

Press the [ENDING] button.

INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C

ENDING (page xx)

ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C

INTRO D

ENDING D

You can have the

ending gradually slow

down (ritardando) by

pressing the [ENDING]

button again while the

ending is playing back.

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

via BREAK

(max. four patterns)

INTRO (page 66)

ENDING (page 66)

• An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by

simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point.

• Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the ﬁnal eighth

note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in.

• Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want.

• If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing.

• If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section.

FADE IN/OUT

TAP TEMPO

SYNC.STOP

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

One Touch Setting

One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings

(voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button. This is a wonderful way to

instantly reconﬁgure all the settings on the PF-1000 to match the style you want to play.

1 Select a style (page 28).

2 Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons.

Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (voices, effects, etc.) that match the current style (see

page 67) — it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC. START, so that you can immediately start playing

the style.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts.

4 Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords with your left hand.

5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups.

You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups.

For details, refer to page 68.

• Here’s another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance: Use the convenient OTS

(One Touch Setting) Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main

section (page 68).

ONE TOUCH SETTING

buttons

4321

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

4321

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Music Finder

Quick Guide

Music Finder

If you want to play in a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the

convenient Music Finder can help you out. Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the PF-1000

automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!

Using the Music Finder

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.

2 Select a record.

For this example, press the [1 - 3

▲▼] button to select a record by song title.

3 Play along with the style playback.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Reference

on page 69

MUSIC FINDER button

MUSIC

FINDER

2 31 5 6 7 84

Select the desired

record.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]

button to select the desired

page of records. For this

example, ALL is selected.

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

You can also have the voice

and other important settings

change automatically with

the style changes. To do this,

turn on OTS LINK (page 68)

and set the OTS LINK TIM-

ING (page 127) to “REAL

TIME.”

Music Finder

Quick Guide

Searching the Music Finder Records

The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and

instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria.

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.

2 Press the [I] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display.

MUSIC

FINDER

The results of Search 1 and

2 appear in the correspond-

ingly numbered SEARCH 1/

2 displays.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Press the [8▲] (START SEARCH)

button.

The search function calls up all

records that contain the entered

word or words.

Press the [F], [G]

and [H] to clear

the previous

conditions, if

necessary.

For this example,

press the [A]

button to call up

the display for

inputting the song

title.

Refer to page 45 for instruc-

tions on entering characters.

Enter the song title,

then press the [8▲]

(OK) button.

For this example,

ANY is selected.

For this example,

ALL is selected.

Music Finder

Quick Guide

7 Select a record (see step #2 on page 33) and play along with the style playback.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to ﬂoppy disk (pages 38 and 44).

Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data

To save your Music Finder data, call up the MUSIC FINDER Open/Save window from the SYSTEM RESET page

(page 140) of the UTILITY display, and follow the same procedure as that in the Open/Save window for Voice (page 38,

44). To recall the saved data, execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDER’s Open/Save window. Records

can be replaced or added (page 71).

In the instructions above, all Music Finder data is handled together. Besides this, when you save or load style ﬁles, the

Music Finder data that uses the relevant style ﬁle(s) is stored or added automatically. When you copy or move a style ﬁle

on a ﬂoppy disk to the USER drive (page 42, 43), the record which was recorded when storing the relevant style is

automatically added to the PF-1000.

• In the example above, you speciﬁed a song title, but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music

genre — for example, Latin, 8-beat, etc. (page 70).

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

Playing and Practicing with the Songs

Quick Guide

Playing and Practicing with the Songs

Playing Along with the PF-1000

In this section, try using the PF-1000’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you play

the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform.

1 - 4 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23.

5 Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part.

6 If you want to have the notation displayed as you play, press the [C] button. If you want to see the lyrics,

press the [B] button.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

Reference

on page 73

Song related buttons

TRACK1

To cancel the left hand part,

press the [TRACK 2] button

If the selected song does not

contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed.

• If you want to start the song right

away without an intro, use the Sync

Start function. To set Sync Start to

standby, simultaneously hold down

the [TOP] button and press the

SONG [START/STOP] button. Song

playback starts automatically the

moment you start playing the mel-

ody.

• If you can hear the PF-1000 playing

the melody part as well, check the

channel setting for the melody part in

the song data, and change the chan-

nel assigned to Track 1 (page 126).

You can also change the song chan-

nel itself permanently (page 101).

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

Playing and Practicing with the Songs

Quick Guide

Recording

The PF-1000 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your

keyboard performance.

1 - 3 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26.

4 Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song“ for recording.

5 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button.

6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard.

7 When you’ve ﬁnished recording, press the [REC] button.

8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by

using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

9 Save the recorded data as required (pages 38, 44).

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

REC

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

REC

The recorded data will be

lost if you turn off the power.

To keep your important

recordings, you’ll need to

save them to the User drive

or ﬂoppy disk.

CAUTION

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

PF-1000

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

The PF-1000 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs and registration memory

settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PF-1000; you can also create and edit your own

data with some of the functions on the instrument.

All this data is stored in separate ﬁles — just as is done on a computer.

Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the

PF-1000 in ﬁles and folders.

Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these

displays according to their respective ﬁle types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data

efﬁciently by putting various ﬁles of the same type into a single folder.

The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN display (the

display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button.

The following Open/Save display types

are also available; however, these are

selected from displays other than the

MAIN display (page 140

• SYSTEM SETUP

• MIDI SETUP

• USER EFFECT

• MUSIC FINDER

Open/Save display for Song (page 74)

handles the Song ﬁles.

Open/Save display for Voice (page 54)

handles the Voice ﬁles.

Open/Save display for Style (page 59)

handles the Style ﬁles.

Open/Save display for Registration Bank (page 83)

handles the Registration Bank ﬁles.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed,

press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button

followed by the [EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Example — Open/Save display for Voice

Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages.

BACK NEXT

PRESET drive

The ﬁles that are pre-

programmed and installed

internally to the PF-1000 are

kept here. Preset ﬁles can be

loaded but cannot be re-written.

However, you can use a preset

ﬁle as a basis for creating your

own original ﬁle (which can be

saved in the USER or FLOPPY

DISK drive).

USER drive

Files kept here are those

containing your own original

data, created or edited using the

various functions of the PF-1000.

They are stored internally to the

PF-1000.

FLOPPY DISK drive

You can also store your original

data to ﬂoppy disk.

Commercially available disk

software can also be called up

here. Naturally, these ﬁles are

available only when the

appropriate disk is inserted in

the ﬂoppy disk drive.

File

All data, both pre-

programmed and your own

original, are stored as “ﬁles.”

Current Memory

“Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when

you select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice

using the SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should

then be saved as a ﬁle in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive.

Recording songs (page 90) and creating accompaniment styles

(page 106) are done within the current memory. Please make

sure to properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as

a ﬁle or ﬁles. The data will be lost if you turn off the power

without saving.

Calls up the upper

level directory page.

In this example, the

voice folder selection

page can be called

up.

Changes drives among

PRESET, USER and

FLOPPY DISK.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Select a ﬁle shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice ﬁle.

First, press the VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI] button to call up the display containing the ﬁles.

This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store ﬁles (voice ﬁles).

The PF-1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices created

with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section.

Selecting Files and Folders

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

BACK NEXT

2 31 5 6 7 84

END

Select “PRESET,” “USER,” or

“FLOPPY DISK” by using the

[BACK][NEXT] button.

Use the [1▲] ~ [7▲] buttons to

turn the pages.

When the amount of pages exceeds six, the

bottom of the display changes as shown

below.

Press Next

Press Prev.(previous)

Select the ﬁle/folder.

There are two ways to select the ﬁle/folder:

• Press the [A] - [J] button.

Press the letter button corresponding to the

ﬁle/folder you wish to call up. (In the

example display shown above, the voice

ﬁles are shown.)

• Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the

[ENTER] button.

When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the

highlight moves among the available ﬁles/

folders. Highlight the desired ﬁle or folder

(voice ﬁles are shown in the example

above) and press the [ENTER] button to

call up the selected item.

Double-clicking the

appropriate [A] -[J] button

calls up the corresponding

ﬁle and returns to the MAIN

display.

Highlighting the desired ﬁle

and double-clicking the

[ENTER] button calls up the

corresponding ﬁle and

returns to the MAIN display.

Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the MAIN display.

You can go back to the previous display by pressing the [EXIT] button.

When “JAPANESE” is

selected for the Language

parameter (pages 49, 140),

and you change this to one of

the western languages, the

kanji and kana characters of

the ﬁle name stored in the disk

drive are changed to western

characters. In the opposite

case, special Latin characters

and marks are changed into

normal characters. Also, in the

case of ﬂoppy disk data, text

in the ﬁles are changed to

characters that cannot be

read by the instrument.

Keep in mind that similar prob-

lems may occur when trying to

access ﬁles originating or

edited by a computer having a

different language operating

system. In general, be careful

when switching languages —

you risk not being able to

access the data properly.

Exiting from small pop-up windows

You can also exit from small pop-up

windows (such as in the illustration

below) by pressing the [EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Naming Files/Folders

You can assign names to ﬁles and folders. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or

renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset ﬁles/folders you wish to

rename, copy them beforehand (page 43) and use them as User ﬁles/folders.

File/Folder-related Operations

END

2 31 5 6 7 84

Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 38).

The NAME display appears.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select another ﬁle/folder, press one of the

[A] - [J] buttons.

A ﬁle/folder name can con-

tain up to 50 half size letters

(or 25 Hiragana and kanji let-

ters), including the Icon ID

(see the note below) and the

extension.

The ﬁle name will appear on

your computer as follows. If

you change the Icon ID or

the extension, the icon may

change or the ﬁle may not be

properly recognized.

ABCDE.S002.MID

File ID Icon ID

Extension

Input the new name (page 45).

Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel,

press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Moving Files/Folders

You can move ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below.

END

Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 38).

The CUT display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder for moving.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] -

[J] buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel

the selection, press the button of the selected ﬁle/folder again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the ﬁles/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY

DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to

release or cancel the selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

This operation cannot be

used to directly move a ﬁle/

folder from one ﬂoppy disk to

another. If you want to do

this, cut and paste the ﬁle or

folder from the ﬁrst ﬂoppy

disk to the USER page, then

change disks and paste it to

the FLOPPY DISK page.

All ﬁles/folders in a ﬂoppy

disk can be copied to

another disk in one batch

(page 139).

Call up the destination display.

Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.

Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button.

The ﬁle/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination.

After being pasted, the ﬁles

are automatically re-ordered

in alphabetical order and

displayed.

About ﬁles/folders in a

ﬂoppy disk

In the FLOPPY DISK page

of the Open/Save display,

only the ﬁles which can be

handled in that Open/Save

display will appear — even

though a folder in a ﬂoppy

disk can contain different

kinds of ﬁles.

In the case of a folder cut-

and-paste operation (for

ﬂoppy disk), an entire folder

can be cut; however, only the

speciﬁc ﬁles which can be

handled in the current Open/

Save display will be pasted.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Copying Files/Folders

You can also copy ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the PRESET, USER and

FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below.

Deleting Files/Folders

You can also delete ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections can be deleted, using the operation described below.

END

Press the [3▼] (COPY) button

(page 38).

The COPY display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder

and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is

highlighted. To select another ﬁle/

folder, press one of the [A] - [J]

buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected

together, even those from other

pages. To release or cancel the

selection, press the button of the

selected ﬁle/folder again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to

select all the ﬁles/folders in the

displayed page (PRESET/USER/

FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼]

(ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼]

button changes to “ALL OFF,”

letting you release or cancel the

selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

To stop the operation, press the [8▼]

(CANCEL) button.

This operation cannot be

used to directly copy a ﬁle/

folder from one ﬂoppy disk to

another. If you want to do

this, copy and paste the ﬁle

or folder from the ﬁrst ﬂoppy

disk to the User page, then

change disks and paste it to

the Floppy Disk page.

Call up the destination display.

Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can

be selected as the destination.

Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button.

The ﬁle/folder you copied is now pasted at the destination.

Please note that the copy

functions are intended for

your personal use only.

END

Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 38).

The DELETE display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK)

button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select

another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected together, even

those from other pages. To release or cancel the

selection, press the button of the selected ﬁle/folder

again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the ﬁles/folders

in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the

[6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] button changes

to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL)

button.

The message “Are you sure you want to delete the

“******” ﬁle (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears.

YES ..........Deletes the highlighted item.

NO............Exits from the prompt without deleting.

When several ﬁles have been selected, the message

“Are you sure you want to delete the “******” ﬁle (or

data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears.

YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or

skips the highlighted item without deleting

(NO).

YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once.

CANCEL .... Exits from the prompt without deleting.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Saving Files

This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current

memory (page 39) to ﬁles. The ﬁles can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK

drives.

If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, ﬁrst return to

the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective

Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 38, 39).

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder

This operation lets you easily organize your various ﬁles into categories by creating a new

folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections.

Displaying Upper Level pages

Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from

the ﬁle level pages.

Entering Characters and Changing Icons

The internal memory capac-

ity of the PF-1000 is about

580KB. Memory capacity for

2DD and 2HD ﬂoppy disks is

about 720KB and 1.44MB,

respectively. When you store

data to these locations, all

ﬁle types of the PF-1000

(Voice, Style, Song, Regis-

tration, etc.) are stored

together.

The ﬁles of commercially

available DOC software and

Yamaha Disklavier software,

and their edited ﬁles on the

PF-1000, can be stored in

the USER page, but cannot

be copied to another ﬂoppy

disk.

Folder directories can con-

tain up to four levels.

The maximum total number

of ﬁles and folders which can

be stored is 800, but this

may differ depending on the

length of the ﬁle names.

The maximum number of

ﬁles which can be stored in a

folder will be 250.

Enter a name for the new ﬁle (page 45).

Press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Press the [6▼]

(SAVE) button.

Enter the name of the new folder (page 45).

Press the [8▲](OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Call up the page to

which you wish to

create a new folder

and press the [7▼]

(NEW) button

(page 38).

If you select Japanese as the Language in the

FUNCTION display (page 140), the following

different types of characters and sizes can be

entered:

(kana-kan)

Hiragana and kanji, marks (full size)

(kana)

Katakana (normal size), marks (full size)

(kana)

Katakana (half size), marks (half size)

A B C — Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size)

ABC — Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

If you’ve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display (page 140), the

following types of characters are available:

CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button.

Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing

the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon

at the left of the ﬁle name.

Press the [1▼]

(NAME), [6▼]

(SAVE), or [7▼]

(NEW) button

(page 38).

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Entering Characters

The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your ﬁles and folders. The method is much the

same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone.

Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter.

Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button.

To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button.

If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the

[7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the

[7▼] (DELETE) button for a while, or press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. When the cursor appears in reverse display

(highlight), only the reversed area is deleted.

To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

■ Converting into Kanji (Japanese language)

This applies only if you are using the “ (kana-kan)” button (in Japanese). When

the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the

[ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate

kanji. The reversed area can be changed by the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The converted

area can be changed back to “hiragana” by the [7▼] (DELETE) button. The reversed

area can be cleared at once by the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. To actually enter the

change, press the [8▲] (OK) button or enter the next character. To enter the

“hiragana” itself (without converting it), press the [8▲] (OK) button.

■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”)

Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button

(before actual entry of the character.)

■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)

You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a

character by moving the cursor.

Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the

▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button.

■ Entering numbers

First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” “CASE” (half-size

capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold

down the appropriate button, [2

▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it

repeatedly until the desired number is selected.

The following half-size

marks cannot be used in

naming ﬁles and folders:

¥ \ / : * ? “ < > |

In the case of characters

which are not accompanied

by special character marks

(with the exception of kana-

kan and half-size katakana),

you can call up the mark list

by pressing the [6▼] button

after selecting a character

(before actual entry of a

character).

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Changing the Icon

You can also change the icon that

appears at the left of the ﬁle name.

Call up the ICON SELECT display by

pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from

the character input display (page 45).

Select the desired icon by using the

[A] - [J] buttons, or by using the

[3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter

the selected icon by pressing the [8▲]

(OK) button.

This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual

function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display.

■ Adjusting values

You can change parameter values by

rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the

example [BALANCE] display, turning

the dial adjusts the volume of the part

in reverse display (highlight). To adjust

the volume of another part, ﬁrst select

the part by pressing the [

▲▼] button

corresponding to the part, then rotate

the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

■ Selecting items

You can select the desired item or

function in the display by rotating the

[DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item

can then be called up or executed by

using the [ENTER] button.

In the example VOICE display, you

can select the desired voice ﬁle with

the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up

the selected item by pressing the

[ENTER] button on the panel.

BACK NEXT

2 31 5 6 7 84

Cancels the icon selection operation.

Turns pages for

icon selection.

Enters the selected icon.

Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional

button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the

appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that

display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 128).

Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 48) for a list of the displays that can be called up

with the Direct Access function.

Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUC H SETTING

DIRECT

ACCESS

DIRECT

ACCESS

ACMP

Here’s a convenient way to

return to the MAIN display

from any other display:

Simply press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button, then the

[EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Direct Access Chart

Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below Corresponding LCD display and function

See pages

STYLE [POP & ROCK]

FUNCTION

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT

POINT

SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 127

[POP BALLADS]

[DANCE]

[SWING & JAZZ]

[R & B]

[COUNTRY]

[LATIN]

[MARCH & WORLD]

[WALTZ]

[BALLROOM]

[PIANIST]

[USER]

STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] FUNCTION CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection 128

[BREAK]

MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE

PAR T)

VOLUME/VOICE

VOICE settings

117[INTRO] PANPOT settings

MAIN [A] VOLUME settings

MAIN [B]

FILTER

HARMONIC CONTENT settings

118

MAIN [C] BRIGHTNESS settings

MAIN [D]

EFFECT

REVERB settings

119[ENDING] CHORUS settings

[AUTO FILL IN] DSP settings

[OTS LINK]

FUNCTION

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT

POINT

127

[SYNC. STOP] SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting

[SYNC. START] —

[START/STOP] —

SONG [TRACK1]

FUNCTION SONG SETTING

TRACK1 CHANNEL selection

126

[TRACK2] TRACK2 CHANNEL selection

[EXTRA TRACKS]

[REPEAT]

[REC] —

[TOP] —

[START/STOP] —

[REW] —

[FF] —

METRONOME [START/STOP]

FUNCTION

UTILITY

METRONOME settings

137[FADE IN/OUT] FADE IN/OUT settings

TEMPO [TAP TEMPO] TAP settings

[–]

MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 135

[+]

TRANSPOSE [–] CONTROLLER

TRANSPOSE settings

130

[+] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE 118

MENU [DEMO]

FUNCTION

UTILITY

LANGUAGE selection 140

[HELP] LCD BRIGHTNESS settings 138

[FUNCTION] MIDI MIDI settings 134

DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR]

MASTER TUNE/SCALE

TUNE

MASTER TUNING setting

124

[DIGITAL RECORDING] SCALE TUNING setting

[MIXING CONSOLE] —

[BALANCE]

MIXING CONSOLE (SONG

PAR T)

VOLUME/VOICE

VOLUME settings

117

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] VOICE settings

[DIRECT ACCESS] Exit from the Direct Access mode

[NEXT] —

[BACK] —

[ENTER] —

[MUSIC FINDER] MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 (Searching the records) 70

[EXIT] Return to the MAIN display

VOICE PART [LAYER]

MIXING CONSOLE

TUNE OCTAVE settings 118

[LEFT]

VOICE EFFECT [REVERB]

EFFECT

REVERB settings

119[DSP] DSP settings

[VARIATION] EFFECT TYPE selection

[HARMONY/ECHO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO 132

[MONO] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME settings 118

[LEFT HOLD]

FUNCTION

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT

SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting 127

VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI]

VOICE SET 132

[E.PIANO]

[ORGAN & ACCORDION]

[PERCUSSION]

[GUITAR]

[BASS]

[BRASS]

[WOODWIND]

[STRINGS]

[CHOIR & PAD]

[SYNTH.]

[XG]

[USER]

ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] —

[PIANO]

FUNCTION

CONTROLLER

KEYBOARD TOUCH selection

130

REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] FREEZE 131

[1]–[8] REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the REGISTRATION) 83

[MEMORY]

FUNCTION

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) 131

PEDAL RIGHT

CONTROLLER

RIGHT PEDAL function assignment

128

CENTER CENTER PEDAL function assignment

LEFT LEFT PEDAL function assignment

AUX AUX PEDAL function assignment

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PF-1000.

Help Messages

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUC H SETTING

HELP

2 31 5 6 7 84

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

BACK NEXT

EXIT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

2-1 Select the desired

Help topic.

2-2 Call up the topic.

Select the Language, if necessary. The language

selected here are also used for various “Messages”

shown during operations.

Help messages can be displayed in

any one of the following languages:

ENGLISH

JAPANESE

GERMAN

FRENCH

SPANISH

ITALIAN

Use this to select

different pages.

Help messages also feature links to the detailed

explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic.

Simply select the underlined word (using the [DATA

ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to

the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the

selected topic.

Press this to return

to the previous

display.

END

The language can also be selected

in the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE”

(page 140) display.

When “JAPANESE” is selected for

the Language parameter, and you

change this to one of the western

languages, the kanji and kana char-

acters of the ﬁle name stored in the

disk drive are changed to western

characters. In the opposite case,

special Latin characters and marks

are changed into normal characters.

Also, in the case of ﬂoppy disk data,

text in the ﬁles are changed to char-

acters that cannot be read by the

instrument.

Keep in mind that similar problems

may occur when trying to access

ﬁles originating or edited by a com-

puter having a different language

operating system. In general, be

careful when switching languages

— you risk not being able to access

the data properly.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and

check how a speciﬁc tempo sounds.

The metronome starts by pressing the METRONOME [START/STOP]

button. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO[–] [+] buttons (see below).

To stop the metronome, press the [START/STOP] button again.

This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of

a song or an accompaniment style.

Using the Metronome

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUC H SETTING

METRONOME

START/STOP

The sound, volume level,

and the beat (time signature)

of the metronome can all be

changed (page 137).

Adjusting the Tempo

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

TAP TEMPO

RESET

TEMPO

Songs and accompaniment

styles have been given

default (initial) tempo

settings, designed to best

suit the song/style.

TAP TEMPO

RESET

TEMPO

EXIT

Press either the TEMPO [–]

button or the [+] button.

Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [

–]

[

+] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

The number in the display indicates how many

quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The

range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value,

the faster the tempo.

When you change the tempo, both tempos of the

current song and style will be changed to the same

tempo. To restore their respective default (initial)

tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [

–] [+]

buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo

Indications — MAIN display” (page 51) for more

about tempo.

1 2

Press this to

close the

TEMPO display.

END

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PF-1000

Tap Tempo

This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style.

Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or

the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping.

■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display

There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below.

Hitting the [TAP TEMPO]

button produces a tapping

sound. You can change this

sound, if desired (page 138).

You can also use Tap Tempo

to automatically start the

song or accompaniment

style at the desired tempo.

While both the song and

accompaniment style are

stopped, tap the [TAP

TEMPO] button several

times, and the selected

accompaniment style starts

automatically at the tempo

you tapped. While a song is

set to Sync. Start stand-by

(page 60, 74), tapping the

[TAP TEMPO] button starts

the song playback in the

same manner. For songs

and styles in 2/4 and 4/4

time, tap four times; for 3/4

time, tap three times; for 5/4

time, tap ﬁve times.

TAP TEMPO

RESET

TEMPO

Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice

to change the tempo.

Playback the song or the

accompaniment style

(page 59, 74).

Indicates the default (initial) tempo

setting for the currently selected

song (unless the tempo has been

changed manually).

Indicates the current tempo for the

selected song, accompaniment

style or the metronome which is

now playing back. When nothing is

playing back (stopped), this

indicates the tempo for the selected

style. When the song and style are

played back simultaneously, the

tempo of the style is automatically

changed to match the tempo of the

song, and is displayed here. This

tempo is used for recording when

recording a song or

accompaniment style.

Indicates the default (initial) tempo

setting for the currently selected

accompaniment style (unless the

tempo has been changed

manually).

PF-1000

Reference

Playing the Demos

The PF-1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices and

rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared

showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PF-1000.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUC H SETTING

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

BACK NEXT

2 31 5 6 7 84

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

2-3 Press one of these buttons twice

— once to select the desired

demo, and once again to start it.

2-2 Use these to select

different display pages.

Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting from the ﬁrst

item at the top left of the display. This is available only from the FUNCTION page.

All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one at top left.

The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button; however, all demo songs

are played back in sequence.

Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos (otherwise

available in step 3 below).

2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category.

Function Demos ....... These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PF-1000.

Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices of the PF-1000.

Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PF-1000.

Pressing the [DEMO]

button automatically

plays back the Demo

songs at random.

Playing the Demos

PF-1000

2 31 5 6 7 84

EXIT

Relevant explanations are shown in the display.

END

Return to the MAIN screen.

DATA ENTRY

BACK NEXT

2 31 5 6 7 84

ENTER

This example shows the Voices in the

FUNCTION demo.

For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and

the Demo starts playing.

Select the desired word or item by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press

the [ENTER] button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.) to call it up.

Use the [BACK][NEXT]

buttons in the introduction

screen to call up the previ-

ous or next page.

Press the SONG [START/

STOP] button to stop the

Demo song. To start the

Demo again from the point

at which it was stopped,

press the SONG [START/

STOP] button again.

Rewind and fast-forward

can also be used with the

Demo songs (page 76).

PF-1000

Voices

The PF-1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings and

brass — and many, many more.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

USERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

PIANO & ORGAN &

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

VOICE

Selecting a Voice

USERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

PIANO & ORGAN &

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

VOICE

BACK NEXT

2 31 5 6 7 84

END

EXIT

Select the desired voice group.

2-3 Select the voice.

2-1 Select the memory location of the

voice (PRESET/USER/FLOPPY DISK).

Press this to start the

demo of the selected

voice. To stop the demo

at any time, press this

button again.

Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group.

Indicates that the display

is for selecting the MAIN

voice (page 25).

2-2 Select the

various pages

in the current

voice group.

Play the keyboard to hear the

selected

voice.

Press this to return to

the MAIN display.

When you select a voice

group, the last selected

voice will automatically be

selected.

Selecting a voice automati-

cally selects the best-suited

effect and other settings for

that particular voice. You can

disable this so that settings

are not automatically

selected (page 132).

You can set how much the

volume of the voice changes

according to your playing

strength (page 130).

For a list of the available

voices, refer to the separate

Data List.

You can set whether the

voice bank and program

change numbers (“MSB-

LSB-Program Change num-

ber” at the right above the

voice name) are displayed or

not (page 138).

XG is a major enhancement

of the GM System level 1 for-

mat, and was developed by

Yamaha specially to provide

more voices and variations,

as well as greater expressive

control over voices and

effects, and to ensure com-

patibility of data well into the

future.

Voices

PF-1000

One-touch Piano Play

This convenient, easy-to-use feature completely and automatically reconﬁgures the entire PF-1000 for optimum piano

performance. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel, you can instantly call up the piano settings by a

single button press.

PIANO button

This reconﬁgures all of the panel settings for playing the PF-1000 as a piano.

Voice Characteristics

The voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the voice name.

Natural!

These rich and luscious voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument sounds and are especially intended

for playing piano and other keyboard parts. Since they use a completely independent sound source, you can play

full, sustained chords — even along with the accompaniment style — and not have to worry about notes cutting

off. They also take full advantage of Yamaha’s advanced sampling technology such as Stereo Sampling, Dynamic

Sampling, Sustain Sampling, and Key-off Sampling.

Live!

These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound — full of

atmosphere and ambience.

Cool!

These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount

of memory and some very sophisticated programming.

Sweet!

These acoustic instrument sounds also beneﬁt from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so

ﬁnely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing!

Drum

Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the

keyboard.

SFX

Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.

Keyboard Percussion

When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and

special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various

drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys. Keep in

mind that even though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are

identical.

Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.

Piano Lock function

The convenient Piano Lock function lets you “lock” the piano so that you don’t

inadvertently change the settings by pressing another button on the panel. Once

locked, the PF-1000 stays in the piano mode, even if other buttons are pressed —

preventing you from accidently starting a song or accompaniment style during a piano

concert.

Hold down the [PIANO] button for a short time, until a message appears prompting

you to enable Piano Lock.

To enable Piano Lock, select “OK.”

To turn Piano Lock off, hold down the [PIANO] button again for a short time.

You can also use the metro-

nome with this function

(page 50).

PIANO

Even if you turn Piano Lock

off, the piano settings are

still active.

Voices

PF-1000

The PF-1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these

three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance.

Playing a layer of two voices

Playing two voices separately — on the left

and right sections of the keyboard

Playing three different voices — one on the

left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of

two on the right

Layer — Layering Two Different Voices

Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

ON/OFF

LAYER

LEFT

VOICE

PART

LAYER part

MAIN part

LEFT part

MAIN part

Split point

Left range Right range

LEFT part

MAIN part

Split point

LAYER part

Left range Right range

ON/OFF

LAYER

LEFT

VOICE

PART

EXIT

END

Press this to

turn the LAYER

function on. To

turn it off, press

the button again.

There is an alternate

way for quickly select-

ing both the MAIN and

LAYER voices from the

panel: While holding

down one panel voice

button, press a second

voice button. The ﬁrst

selected voice

becomes the MAIN

voice, and the second

becomes the LAYER.

Select LAYER with the [G] button. Press the same button

to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select

the speciﬁc voice you want to play in a layer with the

Main voice. The method of selecting a voice here is the

same as that in VOICE (MAIN) display (page 54).

Press this to return to the

MAIN display.

Voices

PF-1000

Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard

This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard.

■ REVERB

Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a performance space — anything from a small jazz club to a

concert hall.

■ DSP

The PF-1000 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process the

sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways — such as

by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give the

sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can completely

change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part (MAIN/

LAYER/LEFT).

■ VARIATION (Regular voice only; page 86)

This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected

type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 119), this lets you switch the rotor speed between

slow and fast.

The split point can be freely

set to any key on the key-

board. To set it, call up the

SPLIT POINT display by

pressing the [I] (SPLIT

POINT) button in the MAIN

display. The operation steps

are the same as in the

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT

POINT display of the FUNC-

TION page (page 127).

Each part (MAIN, LAYER,

and LEFT) can have its own

volume setting (page 61).

You can also use the LAYER

and LEFT functions

together, to create a combi-

nation layer/split. To do this,

set separate voices for the

left and right sections of the

keyboard (as indicated), and

set up a layer of two different

voices on the right.

Set the LEFT to

ON. Press this

button again to

set it to OFF.

ON/OFF

LAYER

LEFT

VOICE

PART

Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same

button to call up the VOICE display, from which you

can select the speciﬁc voice you want to play in a

left. How to select the voice is the same as the way of

VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 54).

EXIT

END

Press this to

return to the

MAIN display.

Applying Voice Effects

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB DSP VARIATION

VOICE EFFECT

Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off.

For explanations on each of the effects, see below.

The DSP and VARIATION

effect types and the their

depth can be selected and

adjusted in the MIXING CON-

SOLE display (page 119).

Voices

PF-1000

■ HARMONY/ECHO

This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section

of the keyboard (page 132).

■ MONO

This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a

time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the

lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last

note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically.

Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the

Portamento effect, when playing in legato.

■ LEFT HOLD

This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the

same effect as when the damper (sustain) pedal is pressed. This function is especially

effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a

chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the left part on and the

Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall

accompaniment sound.

■ Damper Pedal (Right)

■ Sostenuto Pedal (Center)

■ Left Pedal

When the Piano voice is selected, pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly

changes the timbre of the notes you play.

The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected voice.

■ Foot Controller/Footswitch

An optional Yamaha foot controller (FC7) or footswitch (FC4 or FC5) can be connected to

the AUX PEDAL jack and used to control various functions assigned in the FUNCTION page (page 128).

You can add special empha-

sis to melody lines you play

over chords by using the

Layer function with a mono-

phonic voice. Set the Main

voice to play polyphonically

and set the Layer voice to

play monophonically

(MONO). In this case, the

melody you play — including

the top notes of any chords

— sounds monophonically.

Try this using the following

voices.

MAIN voice

: Brass Section

(polyphonic) +

LAYER voice

Sweet Trump (monophonic)

The Portamento effect creates

a smooth pitch glide between

successively played notes.

Using the Pedals

You can also assign one of

many other functions to

these pedals (as well as the

optional foot controller or

footswitch). For example, you

can use it to start/stop the

accompaniment style, or use

it to play Fill-ins (page 128).

Damper Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Left Pedal

Included with the PF-1000 is

a special pedal unit that

features the following pedals.

• Some voices may sound

continuously or have a

long decay after the notes

have been released while

the damper pedal is held.

• Certain voices in the [PER-

CUSSION] and [XG]

groups may not be affected

by use of the damper pedal.

When you press the damper pedal here,

the notes you play before you release the

pedal have a longer sustain.

The damper pedal performs the same function as the

damper pedal on an actual acoustic piano, letting you

sustain the sound of the voices even after releasing the

keys.

• Certain voices, such as

[STRINGS] or [BRASS],

sustain continuously when

the sostenuto pedal is

pressed.

• Certain voices in the

[PERCUSSION] and [XG]

groups may not be

affected by use of the sos-

tenuto pedal.

When you press the sostenuto pedal

here while holding the note, the note will

sustain as long as you hold the pedal.

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the

sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will

be sustained as long as the pedal is held, but all

subsequently played notes will not be sustained.

The depth of the left pedal

effect can be adjusted

(

page 128

PF-1000

Styles

The PF-1000 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz, Latin

and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected

Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you

play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUC H SETTING

STYLE CONTROL

POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER

MARCH &

WORLD

STYLE

Playing a style

BACK NEXT

2 31 5 6 7 84

POP & ROCK

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER

MARCH &

WORLD

STYLE

2-2 Select a Style.

2-1 Select a location

(Preset, User, Floppy

Disk) for saving the

style.

When you've opened a lower directory's display,

this button (UP) lets you call up the next higher

directory, from which you can select Style groups.

For a list of the available

accompaniment styles, refer

to the separate Data List

(Style List).

Styles

PF-1000

BREAK

ACMP

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

END

When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto

accompaniment section of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be

the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.)

Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on.

The Tempo can be adjusted

using the TEMPO [–][+] or [TAP

TEMPO] button.

If you tap the [TAP TEMPO]

button, the tempo will adjust to

the same speed that you tapped.

You can set the key range

for auto accompaniment

(page 127).

• You can begin the rhythm

channels (tracks) of the

Style by pressing the

[START/STOP] button.

• The rhythm channels of

the style can also be

started by tapping the

[TAP TEMPO] button.

With the style stopped,

tap the [TAP TEMPO]

button three, four or ﬁve

times (three for 3/4 time,

four for 2/4 or 4/4 time,

ﬁve for 5/4 time).

Stop the style.

When you simultaneously

play back accompaniment

styles with a song, the

accompaniment parts

recorded to the song (chan-

nels 9 - 16) are temporarily

replaced by the selected

accompaniment style — let-

ting you try out and use dif-

ferent accompaniment with

the song (page 75).

Turn ACMP off.

Sync. Start

Enabling this lets you start

the style simply by playing

the keyboard.

As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section, the style starts.

For details about chord ﬁngerings, refer to page 62.

Accompaniment Style Characteristics

The deﬁning characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display.

Session!

These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with

chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of

certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all

songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-

bass chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment.

Piano Combo!

These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since

this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs.

Pianist!

These special styles provide piano-only accompaniment — effectively recreating the left-hand performance of an accomplished pianist.

Just by playing the proper chords with your left hand, you can automatically add complicated arpeggios and bass/chord patterns — such as

difﬁcult-to-play stride piano parts.

Styles

PF-1000

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only

Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

Rhythm starts.

Select a style (page 59).

The Rhythm channels are

part of the styles. Each style

has different rhythm pat-

terns.

Set to off.

Play along with the rhythm playback.

The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [–][+] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons.

If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that

you tapped.

When selecting the style

group “PIANIST,” the

rhythm doesn’t sound.

When you want to use any

of the styles, always make

sure that ACMP is turned

on.

Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

button again to stop the rhythm playback.

END

You can also start the

rhythm simply by playing a

key on the keyboard, if Sync

Start is enabled (turn on the

[SYNC.START] button).

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PAR T

BALANCE display

Adjust the output level of the Part.

Parts played from the

keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/

LEFT)

STYLE part (Auto

Accompaniment section)

SONG part

MIC part

CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF]

button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to

only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for

the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply

press the appropriate channel button again.

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

in the song data (page 147).

The channels are assigned

as shown below.

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Call up the

BALANCE

display.

Call up the

Channel ON/

OFF display.

Styles

PF-1000

The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of

ﬁngerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 128), and select the Chord Fingerings. The

page shows how to play chords with your left hand.

SINGLE FINGER

Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major,

seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section

of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord ﬁngerings described below are used.

MULTI FINGER

The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ﬁngerings,

so you can use either type of ﬁngering without having to switch ﬁngering modes. If you

want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER

operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the

root of the chord.

FINGERED

This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto

accompaniment section of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various

chord types listed on the next page.

FINGERED ON BASS

This mode accepts the same ﬁngerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note

played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note,

allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C

major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C).

FULL KEYBOARD

This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar

to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example,

playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord

with your left hand and a melody note with your right.

AI FINGERED

This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three

notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).

AI FULL KEYBOARD

When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PF-1000 will

automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything,

anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords.

Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for

use with this feature.

This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the

chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9

and 11

chords cannot be played.

Chord Fingerings

For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key

and a black key to its left.

For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root

key and a white key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the

root key and both a white and black key to its left.

Chord detection in the AI

Full Keyboard mode occurs

at approximately 8th-note

intervals. Extremely short

chords — less than an 8th

note in length — may not be

detected.

In Full Keyboard mode,

chords are detected based

on the lowest and second

lowest notes you play. If the

two lowest notes fall within a

single octave, those two

notes determine the chord. If

the lowest note and the sec-

ond lowest note are sepa-

rated by more than one

octave, the lowest note

becomes the bass and the

chord is determined from the

second lowest note and the

other notes played in the

same octave.

Artiﬁcial Intelligence

Styles

PF-1000

* Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion.

Chord Name [Abbreviation] Normal Voicing

Display for root “C”

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Ninth [9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C9

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C6

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7

]

1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7

CM7

Flatted ﬁfth [ 5] 1 - 3 - 5 C 5

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - 5 Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7aug

Minor [m] 1 - 3 - 5 Cm

Minor ninth [m9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 Cm9

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 Cm7

Minor seventh eleventh [m7

] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Cm7

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Cm7 5

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - 3 - 5 Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 C7

Seventh ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* C7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7

]

1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7

Seventh add thirteenth [7

] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 C7

Seventh sharp ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2

Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords)

( )

CM7

( )

Caug

Cm6

Cm7

( )

Cm7



CmM7



Cm7

( )

Cm9

CmM7

( )

CmM7

( )

Cdim

Cdim7

( )



( )



Csus4



( )

CM7



( )

CM7



( )



( )

C7aug

Cm7

( )

CM7aug

( )

C7sus4 Csus2

• Notes in parentheses can

be omitted.

• For FINGERED, FIN-

GERED ON BASS, and AI

FINGERED, if you play

any three adjacent keys

(including black keys), the

chord sound will be can-

celed and only the rhythm

instruments will continue

playing (Chord Cancel

function). This let you play

back only the rhythm.

• Playing two same root

keys in the adjacent

octaves produces accom-

paniment based only on

the root.

• A perfect ﬁfth (1 + 5) pro-

duces accompaniment

based on the root and the

ﬁfth.

• The auto accompaniment

Style will sometimes not

change when related

chords are played in

sequence (e.g. some

minor chords followed by

the minor seventh).

• You can also have the PF-

1000 “teach” you how to

play Fingered chords.

From the CHORD FIN-

GERING display

(page 128), specify the

chord you want to learn,

and the notes you should

press are indicated in the

display.

 



 













 

 



 





















 





Styles

PF-1000

The PF-1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow you to

vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching

among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional-

sounding arrangement in your performance.

Arranging the Style Pattern

(SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)

You can also use this func-

tion to play only rhythms

(page 61).

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

Select a style (page 59).

2-1 Turn the ACMP function on.

2-2 Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section

before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again.

2-3 Turn the SYNC. START function on.

The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto

Accompaniment section of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section.

Press this button to add breaks.

• If you press the [INTRO]

button, you can play back

an Intro section while an

accompaniment is play-

ing.

• You can dynamically con-

trol the level of the

accompaniment by how

softly or strongly you play

the keys in the Auto

Accompaniment section

of the keyboard

(page 127).

• If you press the [SYNC.

START] button while an

accompaniment is play-

ing, the accompaniment

will stop and the PF-1000

will enter Synchronized

Start standby status.

• You can also change

style sections by using

the pedal (page 128).

• The Break section lets

you add dynamic varia-

tions and breaks in the

rhythm of the accompani-

ment, to make your per-

formance sound even

more professional. If you

press the [BREAK] but-

ton while an accompani-

ment is playing, the ﬁll-in

will play back for one

measure.

• The indicator of the desti-

nation section (MAIN A/

B/C/D) will ﬂash while the

Break is playing.

• When the [AUTO FILLIN]

button is set to on and the

MAIN [A][B][C][D] but-

ton is pressed after the

ﬁnal half beat (eighth

note) of the measure, the

ﬁll-in will begin from the

next measure.

• Section button indications

— [BREAK], [INTRO],

[MAIN], [ENDING] but-

tons

LED is green

— The section is not

selected.

LED is red

— The section is cur-

rently selected.

LED is off

— No section data; the

section cannot be

played.

Main sections can be shifted.

Styles

PF-1000

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP)

When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop

completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released.

Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment

section is played.

Fade-in/Fade-out

The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that

gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in,

press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in

before starting the style, press the button again.

To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the

fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 137).

• Styles can also be started

by pressing the STYLE

CONTROL [START/

STOP] button.

• You can select the Intro

and Ending type by press-

ing the [E] button in the

MAIN window (page 66).

• If you press the [INTRO]

button while the ending is

playing, the Intro section

will begin playing after the

ending is ﬁnished.

• When the [AUTO FILLIN]

button is set to on and you

press a MAIN button while

the ending is playing, ﬁll-in

accompaniment will

immediately start playing,

continuing with the Main

section.

• You can begin the accom-

paniment by using the

Ending instead of the Intro

section. In this case, the

auto accompaniment

doesn’t stop when the

ending is ﬁnished.

• If you select a different

style while the style is not

playing, the “default”

tempo for that style is also

selected. If the accompa-

niment is playing, the

same tempo is maintained

even if you select a differ-

ent style.

• When STOP ACMP is set

to on and the accompani-

ment is not playing, you

can play both chords and

bass in the Auto Accom-

paniment section in the

keyboard (page 127).

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

END

This switches to the ending section. When the ending is ﬁnished,

the Style stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually

slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same [ENDING/rit.]

button again while the ending is playing back.

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on.

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when

SYNC. STOP is turned on.

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment

starts.

You can also use the SYNC.

STOP function by pressing

the auto accompaniment

section/left-hand range

brieﬂy (page 127).

The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys.

Playing a chord with your

left hand automatically

restarts the auto

accompaniment.

Press the [SYNC. STOP]/

[SYNC. START] button

again to stop the

accompaniment.

Synchro Stop cannot be set

to on when the ﬁngering

mode is set to Full Key-

board/AI Keyboard or the

auto accompaniment on the

panel is set to off.

END

Styles

PF-1000

Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when

changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In

Select a Intro

Select a Ending

Play the style using

the Intro or Ending

section (page 30, 31).

To call up the [MAIN] dis-

play, ﬁrst press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button, then press

the [EXIT] button.

Fill

A short phrase used to add

variation to the style.

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play

(page 30, 31).

Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main

sections.

You can also add a ﬁll-in by

pressing the selected MAIN

button again.

To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again.

You can temporarily disable

Auto Fill In during a perfor-

mance by pressing the next

Main section’s button twice

quickly.

END

Styles

PF-1000

The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style

you’re playing. Each preset style has four pre-programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button.

Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style

(ONE TOUCH SETTING)

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYN C.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

4321

ONE TOUCH SETTING

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

4321

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Select a style (page 59).

Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ([1] - [4]).

4321

ONE TOUCH SETTING

LED is green — The One Touch

Setting is not selected.

LED is off — No One Touch

Setting data. The button is not

available.

LED is red — The One Touch Setting is currently selected.

As soon as you play a

chord with your left

hand, the auto

accompaniment starts.

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

Stop the Auto Accompaniment.

Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One

Touch Setting setups (page 68).

Various settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected

style can be instantly recalled. When the style is not playing, Auto

Accompaniment and Sync. Start will automatically be turned on.

For details about the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to the

separate Data List (Parameter Chart).

Styles

PF-1000

Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link

The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when

you select a different Main section (A - D).

Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING)

This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (four setups per style). For a list of One Touch

Setting setup parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart).

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

When you switch among the Main sections (A

- D), the corresponding One Touch Setting will

be called up automatically.

The Main sections A, B, C, and D correspond

to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3, and 4,

respectively.

The One Touch Settings

can be set to change with

the sections in one of two

different timings (page 127):

• Immediately when you

press a section button.

• At the next measure (in

an accompaniment style),

after you press a section

button.

To cancel the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button again.

END

MEMORY

4321

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Select a style.

Set up the panel controls

such as selecting a voice

as required.

Press the [MEMORY]

button.

END

A message prompting you to save the current style will appear. Select “YES”

to call up the STYLE display, then save the panel settings (page 38, 44).

Unless you store the panel

settings here, the registered

settings will be deleted

when you select a different

accompaniment style.

Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons:[1] through [4].

The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice, Harmony and Pedal settings.

Styles

PF-1000

The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the

instrument — including voice, style, and One Touch Settings — simply by selecting the

desired song title. If you want to play a certain song but don’t know which style and voice

settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function will help you out.

The recommended settings, which together make up a “record,” can also be edited and

stored. This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall.

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder

The MUSIC FINDER records

and its contents is just one

example of the recom-

mended panel setups. You

can also create your own

Music Finder settings for

your favorite songs and

genres.

Keep in mind that Music

Finder is a performance aid

in that it automatically ﬁnds

appropriate accompaniment

styles and voices for your

playing. Even though you

can specify song titles, it

does not actually contain

song data.

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TE MPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

MUSIC

FINDER

2 31 5 6 7 84

MUSIC

FINDER

Select a record. For example, select the

top record by pressing the [1▲▼] button

to call up the recommended setups.

The setting data shown here is referred

to as a “record.”

All ..........................Show all records.

FAVORITE.............. Show the records that have added to the “Favorite” page.

SEARCH1,2...........Show the results by SEARCH function (page 70).

Sorting the records

MUSIC ...... The record is sorted by song title.

STYLE.......The record is sorted by style name.

BEAT ........ The record is sorted by beat.

TEMPO ..... The record is sorted by tempo.

Change the order of the records

(ascending or descending).

Add the selected record to “Favorite (Bookmark)” page

When you press the [H] button, the “Add selected

data to the favorite list? YES/NO” message will be

displayed. Select [YES] to add the selected page to

“FAVORITE” page.

Search record(s). Enter the condition of the search

in the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display (page 70).

The results of SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the

“SEARCH 1” or “SEARCH 2” page respectively.

Turn TEMPO LOCK on/off. TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid changing

the Tempo during style playback when selecting another record. The on/off

setting affects all pages (ALL/FAVORITE/SEARCH 1/SEARCH 2).

Select a record by style name. When sorting the records by style name, press these buttons

to move the cursor to the next /previous style. Simultaneously press the [▲▼] buttons to move

the cursor to the ﬁrst record.

Select a record by song title.

When sorting records by song title,

use the [1▲▼] button to skip up or

down through the songs

alphabetically. Simultaneously

press the [▲▼] buttons to move the

cursor to the ﬁrst record.

Show the

number of

records of

each page.

Play the style (page 60).

Records can be selected by

using the [DATA ENTRY]

dial and pressing the

[ENTER] button.

Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT (page 71) display

(for editing the selected record).

Styles

PF-1000

Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search

You can search the record by music title or keywords. The results appears in the display.

■ [A] MUSIC

Searches by music or song title. Press this button to call up the display for

inputting the song title.

When you enter the song title (page 45), the search function calls up all

records that contain the entered word or words.

■ [B] KEYWORD

Searches by keyboard. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the

keyword.

When you enter the keyword (page 45), the search function calls up all

records that contain the entered word or words. You can search several

different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. The search function ﬁnds and

displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords.

■ [C] STYLE

Searches by style name. Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press

the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style. This

convenient function lets you ﬁnd all songs that use a certain accompaniment style.

■ [D] BEAT

Searches by beat or rhythmic feel.

■ [E] SEARCH AREA

Selects a speciﬁc location for searching. You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2

selections.

■ [F]~[H] CLEAR

Clears the entered item at left.

■ [1▲▼] TEMPO FROM

You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search. Press

the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum.

■ [2▲▼]TEMPO TO

You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search.

Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum.

■ [3▲▼]~[5▲▼] GENRE

Selects the speciﬁc music genre for searching. The available range includes all genres (ANY), the preset genres, and any

genres you’ve entered yourself (page 69).

■ [8▼] CANCEL

Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Start searching the record.

The results that satisfy all

the conditions appear in the

SEARCH page. For details

about the search settings in

this display, see below.

Press the [I]

(SEARCH 1)

button or [J]

(SEARCH 2)

button in the

MUSIC FINDER

display.

Enter the

conditions for

the search

(see below),

then start

search by

using [START

SEARCH]

button.

The STYLE FILE SELECT

display can only be used to

select the style name for

searching; it cannot be used

to call up the actual accom-

paniment style.

Styles

PF-1000

Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit

From this display, you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your

preferences. You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records.

■ [A] MUSIC

Selects the music or song title for editing. Press the button to call up the

display for inputting the music or song title, then edit the name as desired.

■ [B] KEYWORD

Selects the keyword for editing. Press the button to call up the display for

inputting the keyword, then edit it as desired.

You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator (comma)

between each.

■ [C] STYLE

Selects the style name for editing. Always enter the name when a new record is registered.

Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button

in the display to select the desired style you want to change/clear/register.

■ [D] BEAT

Selects the beat (time signature) for editing. When another ﬁle is selected by pressing the

[C] button, the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected ﬁle.

■ [E] FAVORITE

Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page (page 69).

■ [F]~[H] CLEAR

Clears the entered item at left.

■ [I] DELETE RECORD

Clears the selected record. The deleted record number becomes empty. When you press this button, a message appears

prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation.

YES .................. Press this to clear the record and close the display.

NO .................. Press this to close the display without clearing the record.

CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

You can also change/clear a

preset record. To avoid chang-

ing/clearing the record, register

the record as a new record

after editing.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Press the [8 ▲▼] (RECORD EDIT) button in the MUSIC FINDER display.

Change/clear the record data. You can also register new records. For details

about all settings and operations, see below.

All Music Finder records can be

stored together as a single ﬁle

(page 140). When calling up a

stored ﬁle, a message appears

prompting you to replace or

append the records as desired.

• Replace:

All Music Finder records cur-

rently in the instrument are

deleted and replaced with the

records of the selected ﬁle.

• Append:

The records called up are

added to the vacant record

numbers.

The STYLE FILE SELECT

display can only be used to

select the style name for

record editing; it cannot be

used to call up the actual

accompaniment style.

Keep in mind that the Beat

setting made here is only for

the Music Finder search

function; this does not affect

the actual Beat setting of the

accompaniment style itself.

Styles

PF-1000

■ [J] NEW RECORD

Registers a new record. The smallest available empty record number is used for registering.

When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel

the operation.

YES .................. Press this to register the record and close the display.

NO .................. Press this to close the display without registering the record.

CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

■ [1▼▲] TEMPO

Determines the tempo for the selected style. When changing the style with the [C] button, the tempo is automatically

changed to that of the changed style.

■ [3▼▲]~[5▼▲] GENRE

Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned. The available range includes all preset genres

as well as any you’ve entered yourself.

■ [6▼▲] GENRE NAME

For entering a genre name. Press the button to call up the display for inputting

the genre name, then edit the name as desired. A maximum of 200 genre

names can be stored.

The genre name you input becomes effective when the current record is edited (overwritten) by pressing the [8▲] (OK)

button, or when a new record is registered by pressing the [J] (NEW RECORD) button.

If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record, the input genre name

is deleted.

■ [8▲] OK

Executes all editing and changes to the record. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to

execute, abort or cancel the operation.

YES .................. Press this to replace the record and close the display.

NO .................. Press this to close the display without replacing the record.

CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

■ [8▼] CANCEL

Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display.

The maximum number of

records is 2500, including

internal records.

To maintain the edited and registered data, make sure to save all Music Finder records as a ﬁle (page 140). If no saved, the data will

be lost when another Music Finder ﬁle is called up or the factory-programmed settings are restored (page 140).

PF-1000

Song Playback

Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve

recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 90), and commercially available song data. You can use this

highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song, as well as

practicing and learning new music with the Repeat (page 77) function. You can also display the music notation and

lyrics in the LCD.

• Internal songs (Song Book)

• Song data on included disk (50 greats for the piano)

• Commercially available song data

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General

MIDI).

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG

format. XG is a signiﬁcant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard,

providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect

sections and effect types.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

format.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s original MIDI ﬁle format.

• Songs you recorded (page 90) and stored to the PF-1000 or disk.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

Compatible Song Types

Commercially available

music data is subject to

intended only for your own

personal use.

For more information on the

song ﬁle types compatible

with the PF-1000, see

page 148.

Song Playback

PF-1000

Playing the Internal Songs

Song Playback

BACK

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

END

2-2 Open a folder and

select a song to be

played back.

2-1 Select the PRESET tab with the [BACK]

button.

You can enable the Synchro

Start for the song by simul-

taneously pressing the

[TOP] button and the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton. The song starts as

soon as you play the key-

board. You can also use this

function along with the

Style’s Synchro Start func-

tion (page 60).

You can have the volume

automatically fade in and

fade out at the beginning

and end of the song. Simply

press the [FADEIN/OUT]

button at the start of song

playback to fade in the song,

and press it again at the end

of the song to fade out.

Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [–][+] buttons

(page 50) or the [TAP TEMPO] button.

You can even change the playback speed by tapping out

the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice.

The song starts.

To stop the song immediately, press the

button again.

Press the button in order to go back to the

previous screen.

START/STOP

EXIT

If the MAIN screen (at left) is

not displayed, press the

[DIRECT ACCESS] button

followed by the [EXIT] button.

You can also make a variety

of other settings (such as

tempo, voice selection, etc.)

and have them automati-

cally called up when you

play back the song

(page 102).

Songs can also be played

back continuously. Set

SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON

from the SONG SETTING

display (page 126).

Make sure that the Language

setting for the instrument

(page 140) is the same as that

of the ﬁle name of the song that

you are playing back.

Song Playback

PF-1000

Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style

When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 -

16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you

to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts

of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of

the song’s chord data.

• [ACMP] button .....................ON

• [AUTO FILL IN] button ........ON

Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.

Select the desired accompaniment style.

Start the style by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE

section buttons.)

Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections.

The style automatically stops when the song ﬁnishes or is stopped.

The accompaniment stops

when you stop the song. If

the accompaniment style is

playing and you start the

song, the accompaniment

automatically stops. How-

ever, for internal songs that

use accompaniment styles,

the accompaniment style is

not stopped.

END

Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the

accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback.

Song Playback

PF-1000

Playing Back Songs on Disk

Insert the disk into the drive.

The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions

(page 74), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display.

Other Playback-related Operations

■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward

■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Speciﬁc Channels

CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel

by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the

appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press

that channel’s button again.

Before proceeding, make

sure to read the section

“Handling the Floppy Disk

Drive (FDD) and Floppy

Disk” (page 6).

You can set whether or not

the PF-1000 automatically

calls up the ﬁrst disk song

when a disk is inserted

(page 139).

Some song data for the PF-

1000 has been recorded

with special “free tempo” set-

tings. During playback of

such song data, the mea-

sure numbers shown in the

display will not correspond to

the actual measure; this only

serves as a reference as to

how much of the song has

been played back.

Songs containing a large

amount of data may not be

able to be read properly by

the instrument, and as such

you may not be able to

select them. The maximum

capacity is about 200–

300KB, however this may

differ depending on the data

contents of each song.

Insert the disk shutter side

ﬁrst and label face up.

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again

from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped,

pressing this button returns the song to the beginning.

Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION

display (see below). To return to the SONG display,

press the [EXIT] button.

When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the

beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.

When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the

[REW] and [FF] buttons.

Phrase Mark

This data speciﬁes a certain

location in the song data.

SONG POSITION display

“PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the

[J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW]

and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark.

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PAR T

Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 61).

Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below).

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

in the song data. The chan-

nels are assigned as shown

below for the PF-1000.

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Song Playback

PF-1000

This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you

want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play

that part yourself.

This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly.

Muting Speciﬁc Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

Select the song to be played back (page 73).

Use this button to turn on/off the right-hand part.

Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part.

Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts

(all but the right hand/left hand).

Start the song.

Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [–][+] buttons (page 50).

All tracks are automatically

set to on when selecting a

different song.

To stop the song, press the

button again.

START/STOP

END

You can change the channel

assignments for Track 1 and

Track 2 (page 126), letting

you specify which parts are

muted when pressing the

[TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/

[EXTRA TRACKS] buttons.

Repeat Playback of a Speciﬁc Range

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

START/STOP

Play back the song (page 74, 76).

You can also specify Points

A and B when the song is

stopped. Set Point A by

pressing the [REPEAT] but-

ton, then use the [FF] but-

ton to move to the desired

end location, then set Point

B by pressing the

[REPEAT] button again.

Stop the song.

To cancel the Repeat function, press the

button again.

REPEAT

Press this button at the point you want the

repeating phrase to start (Point A).

Press this button at the point you want the

repeating phrase to end (Point B).

After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from

point A to point B is played back repeatedly.

Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP]

button returns to point A.

Point B cannot be selected

unless Point A has been

selected ﬁrst.

Specifying only Point A

results in repeat playback

between Point A and the

end of the song.

The speciﬁed A and B

points will be erased when

selecting a different song

number, cancelling the

Repeat function, or select-

ing a different repeat mode

— such as Phrase Repeat

or repeat in Song Chain

Play (page 126).

END

Song Playback

PF-1000

With this feature, you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays. This can be used

with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs.

Displaying Music Notation — Score

2 31 5 6 7 84

Select the

desired song

(page 74, 76).

Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range.

Depending on other settings, this parameter may be

unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the

case, go to the detailed setting display (shown

below; use the [8▲▼] buttons) and set the LEFT

CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or,

go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function

menu (page 126) and set the TRACK 2 parameter

to any channel except “OFF.”

Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range.

Channel 1 is automatically selected when [TRACK1]

is set to [OFF] from the SONG SETTING display

(page 126).

Enables/disables display of the chords.

If the selected song does not contain chord data, chords

are not displayed.

Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch).

Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation.

SMALL ..... Notation is shown in small size.

LARGE ..... Notation is shown in large size.

The displayed notation is

generated by the PF-1000

based on the song data. As

a result, it may not be

exactly the same as com-

mercially available sheet

music of the same song —

especially when displaying

notation of complicated pas-

sages or many short notes.

Some song data for the PF-

1000 has been recorded

with special “free tempo”

settings. For such song

data, the tempo, beat, mea-

sure and music notation will

not be displayed correctly.

[RIGHT] and [LEFT] cannot

be turned off at the same

time.

The note name is indicated

at the left of the note. When

the space between the

notes is too small, the indi-

cation may be moved to the

top left of the note.

You can increase the num-

ber of measures that will be

displayed by decreasing the

other items to be displayed

(parts, lyrics, chords, etc.).

When accidentals (sharp

and ﬂats) and notes cannot

be displayed on one line,

they are displayed in the

next line from the middle of

the measure.

The notation functions can-

not be used to create song

data by inputting notes. For

information on creating

song data, see page 94.

If the MAIN screen (at left)

is not displayed, press the

[DIRECT ACCESS] button

followed by the [EXIT] but-

ton.

This calls up the detailed setting display for notation.

For details, see the next page.

Enables/disables display of the lyrics.

If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed.

Song Playback

PF-1000

Detailed Settings for Notation

■ [1▲▼] LEFT CH/[2▲▼] RIGHT CH

This determines the Left channel (channel for the left-hand part) and Right channel (channel for the right-hand part).

This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected.

AUTO .........................The channels for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts

to the same channel as the channel which is speciﬁed in the SONG SETTING display of the

Function menu (page 122).

1-16............................Assigns the part to the speciﬁed channel, 1- 16.

OFF (LEFT CH only)....No channel assignment.

■ [3▲▼], [4▲▼] KEY SIGNATURE

This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position, allowing you to transpose

key at any point within a song. For a list of the key signatures, with their relative minor keys and accidentals, see the

chart below.

■ [5▲▼] QUANTIZE

This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct

the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure

to select the smallest note value which is used in the song.

Note resolution:

1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/16 note, 1/32 note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/8 note triplet, 1/16 note

triplet, 1/32 note triplet

When “LEFT” and “RIGHT”

are set to the same channel,

the notation of the right-hand

notes and left-hand notes

are displayed in piano format

(two connected staves).

2 31 5 6 7 84

The note indicates the root note of the major key, and the note indicates the root of the relative minor.

C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F

min) E Maj (C

min) B Maj (G

min) F

Maj (D

min) C

Maj (A

min)

Maj (A

min) G

Maj (E

min) D Maj (B

min) A

Maj (F min) E

Maj (C min) B

Maj (G min) F Maj (D min)

Key Signatures and Accidentals

Short notes and ornamented

notes (such as trills and

grace notes) which are

shorter than the Note resolu-

tion will not be displayed in

the notation.

Song Playback

PF-1000

■ [6▲▼] NOTE NAME

Select the Note Name type when “NOTE” (page 78) is set to ON.

ABC ................. Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).

Fixed Do.......... Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language (page 49).

English.............. Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti

French..............Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si

Italian............... Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si

German............Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si

Spanish............. Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si

Japanese...........

Movable Do..... Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to

the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of Sol

would be indicated as Do.

As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.

■ [8▲] OK

This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation. You can also

execute this by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel.

■ [8▼] CANCEL

This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings. You can also

execute this by pressing the [EXIT] button or [RECORD] button on the panel.

You can select the display

pages (one before and after)

by the using the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons or the pedal

(page 128).

Song Playback

PF-1000

This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your

performance or song playback.

Displaying the Lyrics

Select the

desired song

(page 74, 76).

The contents of the display

can also be shown on a

connected TV (page 133,

142).

The lyrics are

in reverse

display along

with song

playback.

Stop the song.

To return to the previous page, press the

button.

EXIT

END

The lyrics can be changed

(page 105).

The language used for lyr-

ics display depends on the

particular lyric data. If the

lyrics are garbled or unread-

able, you can remedy this

by changing the “LYRICS

LANGUAGE” setting from

the SONG SETTING dis-

play (page 122).

Start the song.

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

If the selected song does

not contain lyric data, lyrics

are not displayed.

If the selected song con-

tains chord data, chord

names are displayed with

the lyrics.

PF-1000

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PF-1000 just as you want — selecting speciﬁc voices,

styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those settings,

simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button.

This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION

MEMORY buttons. Make all the settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration

Memory will “remember” them for you.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TE MPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

4321FREEZE 8 MEMORY765

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory

Keep in mind that songs or

styles on disk cannot

registered to Registration

Memory. If you want to

or style, copy the relevant

data to “USER” in the

SONG/STYLE display

(page 38) and register the

data separately.

END

2 31 5 6 7 84

4321FREEZE 8 MEMORY765

REGISTRATION MEMORY

4321FREEZE 8 MEMORY765

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Set up the panel controls as desired.

For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List

(Parameter Chart).

Select the desired parameter groups

for the settings you want to register.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY]

dial to navigate in this display. To

the corresponding box. Groups left

without checkmarks will not be included

in the Registration Memory setting.

This allows you to maintain certain

settings, even when switching among

Registration Memory presets. You can

also use the Freeze function (page 84)

to override the Registration Memory

changes — letting you prevent certain

panel settings from being changed.

Enters a checkmark to the

selected box. You can also

use the [ENTER] button.

Removes the checkmark from

the selected box. You can also

use the [ENTER] button.

Cancels the registration

and returns to the MAIN

display. You can also use

the [EXIT] button.

Press the desired number button for registering the settings.

Any data that was previ-

ously registered to the

selected REGISTRATION

MEMORY button (indicator

is green or red) will be

erased and replaced by the

new settings.

Indicator is green......The panel setting is registered, but not selected.

Indicator is red .........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected.

Indicator is off ..........The panel setting is not registered.

The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform

the Save operation explained on the next page.

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

PF-1000

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups

The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single ﬁle.

REGISTRATION EDIT display

The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The

names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant

REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green.

From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets.

Select ...............Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8]

buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns

on (indicator is red).

Name ...............This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 41) in “Basic Operations

— Organizing Your Data.”

Delete ..............This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 43) in “Basic Operations —

Organizing Your Data.”

Keep in mind that the size of

the Registration bank ﬁles

and the memory space they

occupy depends on the

amount of functions set in

each.

BANK 01

4321 8765

All settings registered to buttons [1]-

[8] are referred to as a “bank.” The

banks can be saved to “USER” or

“FLOPPY DISK” as Registration

bank ﬁles.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button and [EXIT]

button to call up the MAIN

display.

Save the settings you’ve made to the Registration Memory buttons as a single Registration bank ﬁle (page 44).

The REGISTRATION EDIT display

appears. For details on this display,

see below.

The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION

BANK display by pressing the [8▼] (UP) button and save the data (page 44).

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

PF-1000

You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you speciﬁcally want or need. For example, if you

de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you

change the Registration Memory preset.

Recalling the Registered Settings

Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 83).

Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are

green) to recall the desired settings.

Selecting the Freeze Settings

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup

You can program your

Registration Memory presets

to be called up in sequence,

in any order you desire.

Once programmed, the

presets 1 - 8 can be selected

in sequence with the

[BACK][NEXT] buttons or

the pedal (page 131).

4321FREEZE 8 MEMORY765

REGISTRATION MEMORY

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

4321FREEZE 8 MEMORY765

REGISTRATION MEMORY

4321FREEZE 8 MEMORY765

REGISTRATION MEMORY

2 31 5 6 7 84

Select the Freeze settings.

Enters a checkmark

to the selected box.

Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you speciﬁed in the Freeze

page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.

Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the

desired settings.

Removes the

checkmark from the

selected box.

Call up the “FREEZE”

page from the

REGIST.SEQUENCE/

FREEZE/VOICE SET

screen (page 131).

PF-1000

Editing Voices — Sound Creator

The PF-1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by

editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can

save it as a USER voice for future recall.

• The Voice can be edited in

realtime while playing

back a song/style.

• Keep in mind that adjust-

ments made to the param-

eters may not make much

change in the actual sound

depending on the original

settings of the voice.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TE MPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

SOUND

CREATOR

Operation

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the

Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the

voice you wish to edit.

Indicates the parameters available for editing in

this display. These correspond to the parameters/

values shown at the bottom of the display.

Select the desired menu by

pressing the [NEXT]/

[BACK] button.

Opens the Save (Voice) display

for saving the edited voice as a

User voice (page 44).

Select the desired menu.

The selected menu is highlighted.

Can be used during editing to

compare the sound of the original

voice with the edited voice.

Save the edited voice to the USER drive

(Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 44).

NATURAL VOICE

The voice can also be

selected in the SOUND

CREATOR display.

Press the

[SOUND

CREATOR]

button.

Edit the voice parameters.

The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail, starting on page 87.

REGULAR VOICE

The settings are lost if the

edited part’s voice is

switched to another voice.

Important data should be

saved to User Drive or ﬂoppy

disk.

Press the [USER] button to select the

edited voice, and play the keyboard.

CAUTION

Editing the voice — Sound Creator

PF-1000

SOUND CREATOR Parameters

The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display.

PIANO Determines the parameters unique to piano sounds, such as tuning curve or sustain

sampling. This page is available only when the Natural piano voice is selected.

COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave.

SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice (Regular voice only).

EFFECT Determines the effect depth or type.

HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings.

Common parameter Other location

MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 58

PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 118

LEFT PEDAL TYPE CONTROLLER (FUNCTION) page 128

LEFT PEDAL SETTING CONTROLLER (FUNCTION) page 128

FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 118

FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 118

REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 119

CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 119

DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 57

DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 119

DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 57,119

HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132

HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132

HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132

HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132

HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132

HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132

Natural Voices and Regular Voices

Built into the PF-1000 are two different tone generation sources, Natural and XG. The

Natural tone generation source and its voices feature a huge amount of wave

memory, giving you enormous and ﬁnely detailed expressive power over the sound.

The XG source (which powers the Regular voices) provide maximum compatibility

with a wide variety of devices and song data.

The maximum amount of polyphony for each tone generation source is set up to best

enhance your performance. In general, the songs and styles are played back using the

XG source, while the Natural voices are played from the keyboard — allowing you to

play the Natural voices with full polyphony, even if the song and style data exceeds the polyphonic limit.

* Depending on the particular style selected, a Natural voice may be used for the accompaniment. Usually, songs are played back using the

XG voices (page 149); however, you can have them automatically “re-voiced” — using the exceptionally rich and realistic sounds exclusive

to the PF-1000 (page 117).

The available parameters

differ depending on the

selected voice type, Regular

or Natural (see below).

Keep in mind that there are

certain parameters whose

Sound Creator settings

affect only the Main part’s

voice.

Voices sounded with the XG

source are divided into two

groups. One is the original

set of PF-1000 voices

(Cool!, Sweet!, Live!), and

the other is the conventional

XG set.

Natural! Cool! Sweet! Live! XG

PF-1000-exclusive voices GM/XG-compatible voices

Natural voices (sounded by Natural tone

generation source)

Regular voices (sounded by XG tone generation source)

Used mainly for keyboard-played voices For keyboard-played voices, song/style playback*

Editing the voice — Sound Creator

PF-1000

PIANO (Piano Voice has been selected)

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.

COMMON

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.

SOUND (Regular Voice only)

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.

2 31 5 6 7 84

These controls are used to adjust the

brilliance of the tone. This setting

affects all Natural voices globally. When

other than piano voice (Natural) is

selected, set this on EFFECT page. For

details, see the EFFECT page

(page 89).

Determines the tuning curve, especially

for piano voices. Select “FLAT” if you

feel the tuning curve of the piano voice

does not quite match that of other

instruments voices.

STRETCH .. Tuning curve particularly

for pianos

FLAT .......... Tuning curve in which the

frequency is octave

doubled over the entire

keyboard range

Determines the depth of

sustain sampling for the

damper pedal.

The available parameters

differ depending on the

selected voice.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Set the volume of the current edited

voice.

Set the portamento time of each

part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE)

(Regular Voice only) (page 118).

Determines the touch sensitivity, or

how greatly the volume responds to

your playing strength.

0 —– – Produces more dramatic

level drops, the more softly

you play.

—

– Normal response.

127— Produces high volume for

any playing strength (ﬁxed)

Shift the octave range of the

selected voice up or down in

octaves. When the Main or Layer

part’s voice is used, the M/LYR

parameter is available; when the

Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT

arameter is available.

The parameters are the same

as for CONTROLLER display.

For details, see page 128.

This determines whether the voice

is played monophonically (Regular

Voice only) (page 58).

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the ﬁlter, EG, and

vibrato settings (see below).

Editing the voice — Sound Creator

PF-1000

■ FILTER

FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a

certain frequency range.

■ EG

The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce

many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion

sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.

• ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum

level after the key is played. The higher the value, the

slower the attack.

• DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain

level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher

the value, the slower the decay.

• RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after

the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release.

■ VIBRATO

• DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher

settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato.

• SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).

• DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the

playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see

diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato

onset.

In addition to making the

sound either brighter or

more mellow, Filter can be

used to produce electronic,

synthesizer-like effects.

Cutoff frequency

Volume

Frequency

(pitch)

Cutoff range

These frequencies are

“passed” by the filter.

• BRIGHTNESS

Determines the cutoff frequency or

effective frequency range of the ﬁlter (see

diagram). Higher values result in a

brighter sound.

Resonance

• Harmonic Content

Determines the emphasis given to the

cutoff frequency (resonance), set in

BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram).

Higher values result in a more

pronounced effect.

Resonance

Volume

Frequency

(pitch)

Time

Level

Key on

Key off

ATTACK RELEASE

DECAY

If RELEASE is set to a large

value, the sustain becomes

long.

VIBRATO

Creates a wavering in the

sound by periodically chang-

ing the pitch.

DEPTH

SPEED

DELAY

Time

Level

Editing the voice — Sound Creator

PF-1000

EFFECT

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.

HARMONY

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.

The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 133.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the effect type (Reverb/

Chorus/DSP) for the Natural voices.

When a regular voice is selected, the

DSP type and Variation are set in two

separate menus. For information on the

effect structure, see page 121; for a list

of available effect types, refer to the

separate Data List.

Determines the brilliance of the tone,

when a Natural voice is selected. This

can also be set from the PIANO page

(page 87), when a piano voice is

selected.

• Metallic ......... Sharp metallic tone

• Bright............ Bright tone

• Normal.......... Standard tone

• Mellow .......... Soft and mellow tone

• Dark .............. Dark tone

The same as the “Mixing Console”

on page 119.

• If you select [Bright] or

[Metallic] as the type of

brilliance, the volume level

will increase slightly. In

this case, raising the

[MASTER VOLUME] may

result in distortion. If this

happens, lower the vol-

ume accordingly.

•“SPEED” parameter is

added when selecting

VIBE ROTOR DSP type.

This parameter enables

you to set the speed of

vibrato when you select

the Vibraphone voice, rec-

reating the effect of a vibe

rotor pedal.

This parameter enables you to select whether the

sound is sustained while you press the keys on

the keyboard (“PIANO LIKE”), or the sound is

sustained only while you press and hold down the

sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone

(“NORMAL”) (for Vibraphone voice).

PF-1000

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs

— Song Creator

With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store

them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 91), which lets you

record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 92), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording

(page 94), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard

performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song can be stored to

internal memory or ﬂoppy disk (page 38, 44).

About Song Recording

■ Quick Recording (page 91)

This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano

song you are practicing. You can select from three parts: right hand, left hand

and auto accompaniment. For example, you can record only your right hand

performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right hand and the

auto accompaniment.

■ Multi Recording (page 92)

This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create

the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each

instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can

also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with

your own performance.

■ Step Recording (page 94)

This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note

individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise

recordings, or for recording parts that are difﬁcult to play.

■ Song Editing (page 100)

The PF-1000 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick

Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYN C.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DIGITAL

RECORDING

SONG

• The internal memory capacity of

the PF-1000 is about 580KB. Mem-

ory capacity for 2DD and 2HD

ﬂoppy disks is about 720KB and

1.44MB, respectively. When you

store data to these locations, all ﬁle

types of the PF-1000 (Voice, Style,

Song, Registration, etc.) are stored

together.

• The microphone input signal can-

not be recorded.

• Songs recorded on thePF-1000

are automatically recorded as SMF

(Standard MIDI File format 0) data.

For details on SMF see page 148.

• Playback of the recorded song data

can be transmitted from MIDI OUT,

letting you play the sounds of a

connected external tone generator

(page 135).

• The volume level of each channel

of the song can be adjusted from

the Mixing Console and the set-

tings can be saved. Moreover, even

after you’ve set a voice for your

keyboard play during recording,

you can record voice selections, so

that the voice changes automati-

cally during playback (page 102).

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so

you can check your progress.

■ Play back your new song

To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by

using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the

song.

You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 103).

Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data

(page 38, 44).

Quick Recording

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

■ When creating a new song:

■ When recording over the part of an internal

song or a song on disk with your own

performance:

Select the desired song (page 74, 76).

Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song.

If you want to record to the Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON.

Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well.

Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button

corresponding to the track you want to record.

You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the

same time.

To record your keyboard performance:

Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button.

To record the auto accompaniment performance:

Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.

To stop recording, press

the [REC] button again.

If the “LAYER” or “LEFT”

button is on before pressing

the REC button, the corre-

sponding Layer and Left parts

are automatically recorded to

different channels.

The performance of track 1/2

is recorded to the channel

speciﬁed in the SONG SET-

TING display (page 122).

Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE

CONTROL [START/STOP] button. Recording can also be

started by pressing down the pedal, if the song start/stop

function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 128).

To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again.

Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the pedal, if the song start/

stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 128).

END

To pause, press the SONG

[START/STOP] button. To

resume recording, press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

You can also use the metro-

nome click as a guide while

recording.

The sound of the metronome

is not recorded.

You can overdub a second

right-hand performance onto

Track 2 after recording the

ﬁrst right-hand performance

(including the layer voices)

on Track 1. To do this, set the

[LEFT] button to OFF and

repeat steps 2 and 3.

REC

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

Turning off the power

automatically deletes your

recorded performance. If

you wish to save the

recording, make sure to

store it to internal mem-

ory (USER drive) or ﬂoppy

disk (page 38, 44).

CAUTION

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of

a full band or orchestra.

The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below.

About the accompaniment style parts

Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used.

Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others.

Chord........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices.

Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir.

Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.

Channels

Parts

(default settings)

Available parts Channels

Parts

(default settings)

Available parts

1 Voice MAIN

Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2

Accompaniment style BASS

Accompaniment style CHORD1

Accompaniment style CHORD2

Accompaniment style PAD

Accompaniment style PHRASE1

Accompaniment style PHRASE2

MIDI

Accompaniment style

RHYTHM 1

Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2

Accompaniment style BASS

Accompaniment style CHORD1

Accompaniment style CHORD2

Accompaniment style PAD

Accompaniment style PHRASE1

Accompaniment style PHRASE2

MIDI

2 Voice MAIN 10

Accompaniment style

RHYTHM 2

3 Voice MAIN 11

Accompaniment style

BASS

4 Voice MAIN 12

Accompaniment style

CHORD1

5 Voice MAIN 13

Accompaniment style

CHORD2

6 Voice MAIN 14

Accompaniment style

PAD

7 Voice MAIN 15

Accompaniment style

PHRASE1

8 Voice MAIN 16

Accompaniment style

PHRASE2

Multi Recording

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

SONG

REC

2 31 5 6 7 84

■ When creating a new song:

■ When recording over the part of an internal

song or a song on disk with your own

performance:

Select the desired song (page 74, 76).

Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously

holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼]

- [8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time.

REC......................... Enables recording for the channel

ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel

OFF......................... Mutes the channel

To cancel or disable recording, press the [REC] button once again.

The part is automatically

selected when setting the

several channels to “REC” at

the same time.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded.

This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the

accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the

recording channels selected in step #2.

For a list of the initial default assignments, see page 92.

When selecting the MIDI

part

• Setting a single channel

to MIDI

All incoming data received

via any of the MIDI chan-

nels 1 - 16 is recorded.

When using an external

MIDI keyboard or control-

ler to record, this lets you

record without having to

set the MIDI transmit

channel on the external

device.

• Setting several channels

to MIDI

When using an external

MIDI keyboard or control-

ler to record, this records

data only over the set

MIDI channel — meaning

the external device must

also be set to the same

channel.

A single part (with the

exception of MIDI parts) can-

not be assigned to several

channels.

Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the

SONG/STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

The recording can be started/stopped by pressing

the pedal if the recording punch in/out function is

set to the pedal (page 99).

To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.

You can also use the pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the recording

punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 99).

To pause, press the SONG

[START/STOP] button. To

resume recording, press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

You can also use the metro-

nome click as a guide while

recording.

The sound of the metronome

is not recorded.

Play back your new song.

To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the

beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP]

button.

Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the

beginning of the song.

To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above.

You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them

while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a

ﬁnished song.

You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16)

displays (page 103).

Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store

the recorded data (page 38, 44).

END

Turning off the power

automatically deletes your

recorded performance. If

you wish to save the

recording, make sure to

store it to internal mem-

ory (USER drive) or ﬂoppy

disk (page 38, 44).

The settings of the recorded

parts is stored temporarily

until you execute Quick

Recording, select a song, or

turn the power off.

CAUTION

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is

also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately.

Operation

Recording Individual Notes — Step Record

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

Select an existing song (page 74, 76) to

which you want to add parts or re-record.

If you want to create a new song,

simultaneously press the [RECORD] button

and the [TOP] button.

Press the [A] button to call up the Song

Creator display.

Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.

Using the [BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons, select the “1 -16”

tab for recording melodies

and other parts, or select

the “CHD” (Chord) tab for

recording chords, and after

selecting the “1-16” tab,

select a record channel

with the [F] (CH) button.

BACK NEXT

Call up the Step Record

display by pressing the

[G] button.

Any voice, effect and other

settings you make in the

Mixing Console are automat-

ically cancelled when you

call up the CHD (Chord)

page.

The voices in the USER and

FLOPPY DISK pages can-

not be selected for Step

recording. You can select

voices from the PRESET

page; however, these may

sound slightly different from

the original voice.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

■ Measure/Beat/Clock

■ Velocity

The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values.

■ Gate Time

The following settings are available:

Normal ....................... 80%

Tenuto ........................ 99%

Staccato...................... 40%

Staccatissimo.............. 20%

Manual .......................

The gate time (note length) can be speciﬁed as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Kbd. Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp

Actual

playing

strength

127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15

2 31 5 6 7 84

Moves the cursor

position up and down.

Returns the cursor to

the beginning of the

song (the ﬁrst note of

the ﬁrst measure).

Determines the velocity

(loudness) of the note to be

entered (only when recording

the melody). For information

on velocity settings, see

below.

Determines the length of

the note (as a percentage)

from the position at which it

is to be entered. (This is

available only when

recording the melody.) For

information on gate time

settings, see below.

Each press of this button toggles

among the three basic note

selectors at the bottom of the

display: normal, dotted, and triplet.

(This is available only when

recording the melody.)

Deletes the event at the cursor.

Use these to move the selected event,

in units of measures (BAR), beat, and

clocks. For information on measure/

beat/clock settings, see below.

Speciﬁes the type of note to be input next.

(Sixteenth notes are available only when

recording the melody.) This also determines

the position to which the pointer will

advance after a note has been entered.

First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, ﬁrst specify the length and loudness in this display,

then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard.

To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded

data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 44).

END

Measure

Beat

Clock

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note)

In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording

by guiding you through this actual music example,

shown at right.

The operations here apply to step 6 on page 95.

■ Play back the newly created melody

Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button

to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be

edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 103).

1-1 Select this note.

1-3 ...press this (to input a tie).

1-2 While holding down this note...

2-2

2-3

2-4

2-1 Select this note.

3-1 Press this button to

display the dotted notes.

3-2 Select this note.

3-3

4-1 Call up the normal notes

by pressing this button.

4-3

4-2 Select this note.

The notation display on the instrument may not be accurate,

especially for tied notes or longer notes. To have the notation

displayed accurately, set the gate time to tenuto by using the [H]

button, and input the notes as desired.

To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note.

▲

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step

Record (Chord)

The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with

precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord

changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion.

The operations here apply to step 6 on page 95.

Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step)

For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below.

C F G F G7 C

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

Enter the chords by using the currently

selected chord ﬁngering method in the Auto

Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right.

C F G

MAIN A

MAIN

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

001:1:000

001:3:000

002:1:000

C F G F G7

MAIN A BREAK

BREAK INTRO

002:3:000

002:4:000

Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right.

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

■ Play back the newly created chord progression

Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the

SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the

recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG

CREATOR (CHD) display (page 104). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the

SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data.

Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right.

C F G F G7 C

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

MAIN

003:1:000

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

To enter a ﬁll-in, press the

[AUTO FILL IN] button and

press one of the MAIN [A] –

[D] buttons.

END Mark

An “END” mark is shown in

the display, indicating the

end of the song data.

The actual position of the

End mark differs depending

on the section that is input at

the end of the song. When

an Ending section is input,

the End mark automatically

follows the Ending data.

When a section other than

Ending is input, the End

mark is set two measures

after the ﬁnal section.

The End mark can be freely

set to any position desired.

▲

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording.

To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation

steps 1 - 3 on page 94.

About Punch In/Out

This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a speciﬁc section of an already recorded channel. The

illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,

Punching In/Out — Rec Mode

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the measure at which

Punch In overwrite recording starts

(when “PUNCH IN AT” is selected).

These settings determine how recording will start.

Normal

Overwrite recording starts when you press the

SONG [START/STOP] button or when you play the

keyboard with Synchro standby set to ON.

First Key On

Overwrite recording starts as soon as you start

playing the keyboard. This setting also preserves

the previous lead-in data, letting you record over

the original lead-in without erasing it.

Punch In At

The song plays back normally up to the indicated

Punch In measure (set by the [3▲▼] buttons),

then starts overwrite recording at that Punch In

measure.

These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data.

Replace All

This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped.

Punch Out

This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped.

Punch Out At

Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons),

then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally.

Determines the Punch Out measure —

the measure at which Punch In overwrite

recording stops (when “PUNCH OUT AT”

is selected).

Calls up the SONG

display, from which

you can save the

edited data.

When the Pedal Punch In/

Out function is set to ON, the

current function assignment

of the sostenuto pedal is

cancelled.

When this is set to ON, you can use

the sostenuto (center) pedal to control

the punch-in and punch-out points.

Press and hold down the sostenuto

pedal to record. Recording stops when

you release the pedal.

12345678

REC START setting

REC END setting

12345

Deleted

Start/start overwrite recording

Original data

Previously recorded data

Newly recorded data

Deleted data

NORMAL

REPLACE ALL

12345678

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT

12345678

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT AT=006

12345

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording

FIRST KEY ON

REPLACE ALL

12345678

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT

12345678

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT AT=006

12345

PUNCH IN AT=003

REPLACE ALL

12345678

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT

12345 7

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT AT=006

*1 When measures 1 - 2 are not

overwritten, recording starts

from measure 3.

*2 You’ll have to press the [REC]

button at the end of 5 measures.

Start/start overwrite recording

Stop recording

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

100

Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing

features to change the song data.

Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel

Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons.

Quantize

Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following

musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.

Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead

of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to

the speciﬁed note value (see below).

■ About Quantize Size

Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the

data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4

note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.

Editing a Recorded Song

2 31 5 6 7 84

Use this to select the

desired edit operation.

Selects the desired

channel to be quantized.

Selects the quantize size (resolution).

See the below for the details.

Determines how strongly the notes will

be quantized. If a value less than

100% is selected, notes will be moved

toward the speciﬁed quantization

beats only by the speciﬁed amount.

Applying less than 100% quantization

lets you preserve some of the “human”

feel in the recording.

Executes the Quantize

operation. After the

operation is completed, this

button changes to [UNDO],

letting you restore the

original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Quantize

results. The Undo function

only has one level; only the

previous operation can be

undone.

Calls up the SONG

display, from which you

can save the edited data.

One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization

1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note +

1/8 note triplet *

1/4 note

1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note +

1/8 note triplet *

1/16 note +

1/16 note triplet *

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different

note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes

and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to

straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting,

both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

Quantize Size

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

101

PF-1000

Delete

This lets you delete recorded data in the speciﬁed channel.

Mix

This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the

data from one channel to another.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Deletes all data in the

selected channel. After the

operation is completed, this

button changes to [UNDO],

letting you restore the

original data. The Undo

function only has one level;

only the previous operation

can be undone.

Calls up the SONG

display, from which you

can save the edited data.

These select the channel to be deleted.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Executes the Mix operation.

After the operation is

completed, this button

changes to [UNDO], letting

you restore the original data

if you’re not satisﬁed with

the Mix results. The Undo

function only has one level;

only the previous operation

can be undone.

Calls up the SONG

display, from which you

can save the edited data.

These let you specify the two

source channels to be mixed.

If “COPY” is selected here, the data from

Source 1 is copied to the Destination channel.

Determines the channel into which the

mix or copy results will be placed.

All data other than the mixed

note data is derived from the

Source 1 channel.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

102

Channel Transpose

This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in

semitone increments.

Set Up

You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing

console or panel controls.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Executes the Channel

Transpose operation. After

the operation is completed,

this button changes to

[UNDO], letting you restore

the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Channel

Transpose results. The

Undo function only has one

level; only the previous

operation can be undone.

Calls up the SONG

display, from which you

can save the edited data.

Determines the amount of transpose for each channel.

Toggles between the two

channel displays: Channels

1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16.

To simultaneously set all

channels to the same

value, adjust the Channel

Transpose for one of the

channels while holding

down this button.

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Executes the SET

UP operation. Once

SET UP has been

executed, the

operation cannot be

cancelled or undone.

Calls up the SONG

display, from which you

can save the edited data.

Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All

events, with the exception of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song.

Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the

beginning by using the [TOP] button, and stop playback.

Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console.

Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when

playing back the song. Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To

record a voice change for the keyboard-played part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the

desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE) button.

Lyrics Language ........ Stores the settings of the Lyrics display.

Score Setting.............. Stores the settings of the Score display.

Mic. Setting................. Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console.

Use this to checkmark the

selected item.

Checkmarked items are

stored with the song.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

103

PF-1000

Editing Note Events — 1 - 16

From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on

page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.

Note Events

Parameter Description

Note Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note.

Ctrl (Control change)

Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate

Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

Prog (Program change)

Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to

the separate Data List booklet (Voice List).

P.Bnd (Pitch bend) Determines the pitch bend value.

A.T. (After touch) Determines the after touch value.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Use these to move the

cursor up/down and select

the desired event.

Determines the

channel to be edited.

For coarse adjustment of the event value.

Calls up the Step

Recording display

(page 95).

Calls up the Filter display

(page 105), letting you

select only the events you

wish to shown in the

Event List.

Calls up the SONG

display, from which you

can save the edited data.

Holding this button down

while using the [A] and

[B] buttons lets you

select multiple events.

For ﬁne adjustment of the event value.

Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events

are copied and can be pasted to another location.

Adds a new event to the Event List.

Copies all selected events. The copied

events can be pasted to another location.

Deletes the event at the cursor position.

Pastes all cut or copied events to

the selected location.

If the value at the cursor has been changed,

pressing this restores the original value.

Determines the current

position of the event being edited.

Returns to the beginning

position of the current song

(the ﬁrst note of the ﬁrst

measure).

Use these to move the

cursor left/right and select

the desired parameter of

the highlighted event. Keep

in mind that moving the

cursor away from the just-

edited value automatically

enters that value.

To actually enter an edited

value, move the cursor away

from the value or press the

SONG [START/STOP] button.

The sound of the voices

recorded with Step recording

may sound slightly different

from the original.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

PF-1000

104

Editing Chord Events — CHD

From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song.

Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.

With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events

(page 103).

Chord Events

Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)

From this display, you can edit recorded System events.

Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The

operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 103).

System Events

Parameter Description

Style (Accompaniment

style)

Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select

the desired style.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Chord Speciﬁes the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note.

Sect (Section) Speciﬁes the section — its name and variation.

OnOff (Channel on/off) Determines whether speciﬁc channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off.

CH.Vol (Channel volume) Determines the level of speciﬁc channels (rhythm, bass, etc.).

S.Vol (Style volume) Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style.

Parameter Description

ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the

music notation. Only one value can be speciﬁed at the beginning of the song data.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature.

Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting.

XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the

separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

SysEx (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;

however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;

however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Press this to convert the

recorded chord and section

entries into song data.

To actually enter an edited

value, move the cursor away

from the value or press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator

105

PF-1000

Inputting and Editing Lyrics

This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct

already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to

step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as

those in Editing Note Events (page 103).

In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”

Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on page 74.

Lyrics Events

Customizing the Event List — Filter

This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for

display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To ﬁlter out an event so that it is not shown on the list,

remove the checkmark so that the box is empty.

To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or

LYRICS (page 103 - page 105).

Parameter Description

Name (Song name) Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name.

Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.

Code (Other controls) CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Move the

cursor to the

event

containing the

lyric “star.”

Use these buttons to call up the Lyric display, from which you can input lyrics.

From the Lyric display (page 45), enter the new word, “(your name).”

Press this button

to save the newly

changed lyric

data.

Move the

cursor to the

word “star.”

To actually enter an edited value, move

the cursor away from the value or press

the SONG [START/STOP] button.

The song “Twinkle Twinkle

Little Star” is in the folder

“For Children” in the Song

Book (page 74).

2 31 5 6 7 84

EXIT

Calls up the Main Filter

display. For more information

on each event type, refer to

the separate Data List

booklet (MIDI Data Format).

Enters checkmarks for all items.

Reverses the checkmark

settings for all boxes. In

other words, this enters

checkmarks to all boxes

that were previously un-

checked and vice versa.

Calls up the Control

Change Filter display. For

more information on each

event type, refer to the

separate Data List booklet

(MIDI Data Format).

Calls up the Accompaniment Filter

display. For more information on each

event type, refer to the separate Data

List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the

item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER”

is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time.

Selects the item, scrolling up/down one

item at a time.

Enters/removes the checkmark for the

selected item.

Selects only note data;

checkmarks for all other

boxes are removed.

Execute the settings

by pressing the

[EXIT] button.

END

PF-1000

106

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just

as with the preset styles.

About Creating Accompaniment Styles

The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section

of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to

the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create.

■ Realtime Recording (page 108)

You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the

keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself

— you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the

style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your

own custom style.

Realtime Recording Characteristics

• Loop recording

Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can

also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two

measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you

record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded.

• Overdub recording

This feature lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the

original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you speciﬁcally delete it yourself. For

example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record

notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new

material while hearing the previous parts.

■ Step Recording (page 109)

This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and

specify its length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difﬁcult to play.

■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 110)

This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining

various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For

example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you

could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass

pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8

Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one

accompaniment style.

■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 111)

With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve

created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from

other styles.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYN C.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING

DIGITAL

RECORDING

STYLE CONTROL

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

START/STOP

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

Section Channel

INTRO A - D

RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,

BASS, CHORD 1,

CHORD 2, PAD,

PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2

MAIN A - D

FILL IN A - D

BREAK

ENDING A - D

For information on the part

structure of accompaniment

styles, see page 92.

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

8Beat 1

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

8Beat 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

60’s 8 Beat

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

107

PF-1000

Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of

Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into

a single uniﬁed format. By using the edit

functions, you can take full advantage of the

SFF format and freely create your own styles.

The chart at right indicates the process by

which the accompaniment is played back.

(This does not apply to the rhythm

channels.)The basic or “source” pattern in the

chart is the original style data. This source

pattern is recorded using accompaniment style

recording (see below).

As shown in the chart at right, the actual

output of the accompaniment is determined by

various parameter settings and chord changes

(played in Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard) entered to this source pattern.

Source Pattern

1 Source Root (root note of basic chord)

2 Source Chord (type of basic chord)

Pitch Conversion

3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

4 NTT (Note Transposition Table)

Other Settings

5 High Key (threshold of the pitch

conversion)

6 Note Limit (soundable range)

7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of

the chord change)

Output

These are the patterns

recorded to the

accompaniment styles

(page 114).

This data is created by

chords played in the

Auto Accompaniment

section of the

keyboard (page 62).

These settings are

edited from the

PARAMETER display.

These parameters

determine how the

pitch of the source

pattern is converted

when you play chords

in the Auto

Accompaniment

section of the

keyboard (page 114).

Chord changes (in Auto Accompa-

niment section of the keyboard)

Operation

BACK NEXT

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

Select the desired accompaniment style

for editing. To record a new

accompaniment style from scratch, call

up the BASIC page in the Style Creator

display and select “New Style” by

pressing the [C] button.

Record and edit the

accompaniment style. For

details on the operations for

each display, refer to the

explanations starting on the next

page.

Use the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons to

select the various

pages.

Press the [EXIT] button to

close the STYLE CREATOR

display.

END

Call up the Style display by pressing the [I]

(SAVE) button (in Assembly page: [J] button),

then save the recorded / edited data to the

USER or FLOPPY DISK page.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PF-1000

108

You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based

on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107.

Realtime Recording — Basic

REC.... Channel is enabled for recording.

ON...... Channel is enabled for playback.

OFF .... Channel is muted.

Selects an empty

style, allowing you to

create a new style

from scratch.

Calls up the display for changing the

tempo or beat (time signature).

To release or cancel the

selection, press the [1▼] -

[8▼] button corresponding to

the channel you wish to

cancel. As long as you

continue to hold down the [J]

button, you can toggle

between deleting and

restoring the selected data.

Releasing the [J] button

permanently deletes the

data. Before recording to one

of the non-rhythm channels

(BASS - PHR 2), make sure to

delete the existing data of the

appropriate channel.

Available only when the channel

is set to [RHY1] or [RHY2], this

lets you delete speciﬁc

percussion sounds during

recording. Simultaneously hold

down this button and press the

key corresponding to the

instrument you want to delete.

First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE

CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern

loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while

listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the

percussion instruments assigned to the keys.

Stop recording by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button

again.

With the REC CHANNEL display shown, close the display by pressing

the [EXIT] button.

END

If you’ve enabled Sync Start

(by pressing the SYNC.

START button), you can

start recording by simply

pressing a key on the key-

board.

Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and

pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button.

Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data

of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC

Display” on page 109) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the

REC CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.

• Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can

be selected for the RHY 2

channel.

• For the non-rhythm chan-

nels (BASS - PHR 2), all

voices with the exception

of the Drum Kit/SFX Kit

can be selected.

When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over

channels containing data. To delete data from a speciﬁc

channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press the

appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

109

PF-1000

With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to

perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107.

The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 94), with the exception of the points described

below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 103).

•

In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating

accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically ﬁxed according to the

selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark

position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen.

• When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event

data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change,

etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.).

Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 108) beforehand.

Other Parameters in the BASIC Display

[I] (SAVE) button

Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data.

[3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons

Determines the section to be recorded.

[5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons

Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill

In/Break section is ﬁxed at a length of one measure.

[D] (Execute) button

Executes the Pattern Length change.

Recording — Precautions

• The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord. All

chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source chord. When

recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of CM7), keep the

following points in mind:

* When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the recommended

notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment

style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)

* When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that

you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work,

providing you use them as short passing tones.)

The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the

section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 114.

• When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord

progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to

“HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINER” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that

would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment

pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts.

You can also select the

desired section for recording

by pressing the appropriate

panel button. Pressing one

of the Section buttons calls

up the SECTION display,

from which you can change

sections by using the [6▲▼]/

[7▲▼] buttons. To actually

enter the change, press the

[8▲] button. To select the Fill

In section, press the [AUTO

FILL IN] button.

CRC CRC

C = chord note

C, R = recommended note

Step Recording

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PF-1000

110

This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns —

from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step

4 on page 107.

Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly

2 31 5 6 7 84

Selects the style section and

channel that will be copied to

the corresponding channels,

selected with the [A]-[D] and

[F]-[I] buttons above.

Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can

assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and

channel that will be copied are playing.

SOLO ........... Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM

channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display

(page 108) are played back simultaneously.

ON ............... Plays back the selected channels. Any channels

set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display

(page 108) are played back simultaneously.

OFF .............. Mutes the selected channel. If the selected

channel is set to ON in the REC CHANNEL

display (page 108), OFF does not appear and is

not available.

These let you select the accompaniment style that

will be used for each channel of your original

style. Select the desired channel by pressing the

[A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same

button to call up the Style screen, from which you

can select the accompaniment style.

After repeating steps 1 and 2

as desired, press the [J] (SAVE)

button to save the assembled

style data. From here, you can

store the settings of all

channels (RHYTHM1,

RHYTHM2, BASS, etc.) to a

single accompaniment style.

If you change the section and channel in steps

#1 and #2, the currently speciﬁed section and

channel are also changed. The channels being

recorded are also changed and recording is

stopped automatically.

The PLAY TYPE parameter affects only the

playback, and does not change the actual

accompaniment style data.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

111

PF-1000

Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics

These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment

style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107.

■ Groove

Groove parameters

Original Beat Speciﬁes the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is

applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (speciﬁed in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For

example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are

shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12

Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above.

For example, if the speciﬁed ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat”, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th,

6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of

swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced.

Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to

be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine

which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the speciﬁed beat —but not including the ﬁrst beat — will be played early

or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B”

types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style

2 31 5 6 7 84

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Calls up the Style display and

lets you store the edited

accompaniment style data.

Executes the Groove operation. After

the operation is completed, this button

changes to [UNDO], letting you

restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Groove results. The

Undo function only has one level; only

the previous operation can be undone.

Determines the settings for each of the

Groove parameters (see the list below).

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PF-1000

112

■ Dynamics

Dynamics parameters

Accent Type Selects the type of accent.

Strength

Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The

higher the value, the stronger the effect.

Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity

value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower

than 100% compress it.

Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above

100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Calls up the Style display

and lets you store the

edited accompaniment

style data.

Executes the Dynamics operation. After the

operation is completed, this button changes

to [UNDO], letting you restore the original

data if you’re not satisﬁed with the

Dynamics results. The Undo function only

has one level; only the previous operation

can be undone.

Determines the settings for each of the

Dynamics parameters (see the list below).

Select the desired channel to which

Dynamics is to be applied.

Velocity is determined by

how strongly you play the

keyboard.

The more strongly you play

the keyboard, the higher the

velocity value and, hence,

the louder the sound.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

113

PF-1000

Editing the Channel Data

In this display, there are ﬁve different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded

accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107.

■ Quantize

Refer to page 100.

■ Velocity Change

Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the speciﬁed channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL)

buttons), according to the speciﬁed percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons).

■ Bar Copy

This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the

speciﬁed channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the ﬁrst and last measures in the

region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the ﬁrst measure of the destination location, to which

the data is to be copied.

■ Bar Clear

This function clears all data from the speciﬁed range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP)

and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the ﬁrst and last measures in the region to be cleared.

■ Remove Event

This function lets you remove speciﬁc events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons

to select the desired event type to be removed.

See the explanations below.

Preset channel BASS-

PHRASE2 can not be

edited.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PF-1000

114

Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter

This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style

change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the

parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 107. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 107.

■ Source Root/Chord

These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default

setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data

is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you

change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also

change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 109.

■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table)

• NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available.

Root Trans (Root Transpose)

When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3,

E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that

contain melody lines.

Root Fixed

The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key

of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.

When NTR is set to “Root

Fixed” and NTT is set to

“Bypass,” the “Source

Root” and “Source Chord”

parameters are changed to

“Play Root” and “Play

Chord,” respectively. In this

case, you can change

chords and hear the result-

ing sound for all channels.

See the explanations below.

CRC CR CRC C RC CRC C CR CRC C CR

CCC CR

CCC C CR CCC C RC

CRC

RCR

CR CR

CR CCR

CCR

RRCCC

CC RC

CR CC

CR C CR

CC RC C

CCR

CR R RC

CCR

CCC

CRC

CCC C

CRC CR

CRC CC

CCC

CCCR

RCC

CCC

RCC

CRC CRR

CRC

RCC

CR CC CCR CR

CMaj

CM7

Caug Cm6

Cm7



5 Cm7

Cm7

CmM7 CmM7

Cdim

Cdim7



Csus4

Csus2

C1+8

C1+5



CM7



C7aug

CM7aug

C7sus4



When the Source Root is C:

C = chord note

C, R = recommended

note

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

115

PF-1000

• NTT (Note Transposition Table)

This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available.

Bypass

No transposition.

Melody

Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.

Chord

Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano

or guitar-like chordal parts.

Bass

Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes on-

bass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS ﬁngering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines.

Melodic Minor

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by

a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a

semitone. Other notes are not changed.

Harmonic Minor

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in

the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and ﬂatted sixth

intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed.

■ High Key/Note Limit

• High Key

This sets the highest key (upper octave limit)

of the note transposition for the chord root

change. Any notes calculated to be higher

than the highest key are transposed down to

the octave just below the highest key. This

setting is effective only when the NTR

parameter (page 114) is set to “Root Trans.”

• Note Limit

This sets the note range (highest and lowest

notes) for voices recorded to the style

channels. By judicious setting of this range,

you can ensure that the voices sound as

realistic as possible — in other words, that no

notes outside the natural range are sounded

(e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo

sound). The actual notes that sound are

automatically shifted to the set range.

■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord

changes.

Stop

The notes stop sounding.

Pitch Shift

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord.

Pitch Shift to Root

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord.

Retrigger

The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord.

Retrigger To Root

The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note

remains the same.

C3-E3-G3

F3-A3-C4



2-A



2-C



3-F3-G



Example — When the highest key is F

Root changes

Notes played

E3-G3-C4

High Limit

Low Limit

F3-A3-C4



F3-G



3-C



Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4

Root changes

Notes played

PF-1000

116

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over

the sound.

You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button

(page 61).

■ About the parameters

• VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 117)

This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto

Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 149) with the rich and dynamic voices

that are exclusive to the PF-1000. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your song

playback.

• FILTER (page 118)

These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound.

• TUNE (page 118)

These give you various tuning controls.

• EFFECT (page 119)

These control the amount of effect applied to the sound.

Mixing Console

This set of controls lets you

adjust the balance of the

voices and their stereo posi-

tion, as well as the amount

of effect that is applied to

each voice.

STYLE CONTROL

INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYN C.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

OP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B COUNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 321

21FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE

VOICE EFFECT O NE TOUCH SETTIN

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

Operation

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

PANEL PART

Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/

Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song,

microphone input

STYLE PART

Accompaniment parts

SONG CH 1 - 8

Channels 1 - 8 of song playback

SONG CH 9 -16

Channels 9 - 16 of song playback

Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters.

For information on the various parameters and settings and how

to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 117.

From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button

repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the

button switches among the displays listed below.

You can quickly and easily

set all parts to the same

value for the same parame-

ter (except for the VOICE

parameter). Simulta-

neously hold down the [A] -

[J] button that corresponds

to the parameter you want

to change and use the [1] -

[8] buttons or the [DATA

ENTRY] dial to change the

value.

For details on parameters

related to the Sound Cre-

ator, see page 86.

Close the Mixing

Console display by

pressing the [EXIT]

button.

END

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

117

PF-1000

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116.

Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice

2 31 5 6 7 84

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of

the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special

voices of the PF-1000. To use the normal XG voice

set, turn this off.

These let you select the voice of each part, and adjust the panpot and volume.

VOICE Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 54). When

the Style/Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected.

PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound

hard left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right.

VOLUME Determines the level of each channel, giving you ﬁne control over the balance of all the

parts.

Selects the XG voices

to be replaced (voices

usually used when

playing back)

Selects the voices used to

replace the XG voices (when

SONG AUTO REVOICE is

set to ON).

Executes the settings and closes the

Auto Revoice Setup display.

Closes the Auto Revoice

Setup screen without

executing the settings.

Each press of this

button switches

among the various

parts/channels.

Use these to select the

VOICE, PANPOT, or

VOLUME parameter rows.

Allows you to select

the speciﬁc voice to

be replaced.

PIANO and BASIC can be

called up simultaneously.

ALL REVOICE

Replaces all of the replaceable XG voices with the

rich and authentic voices of the PF-1000.

PIANO REVOICE

Replaces only the piano

voices.

BASIC REVOICE

Replaces only the

recommended voices that

are suitable for playing

back the song.

ALL NO REVOICE

All the voices are returned

to the original XG voices.

When changing the rhythm/

percussion voices (drum

kits, etc.) of the accompani-

ment style and song from

the VOICE parameter, the

detailed settings related to

the drum voice are reset,

and in some cases you may

be unable to restore the

original sound. In the case

of song playback, you can

restore the original sound

by returning to the begin-

ning of the song and playing

back from that point. In the

case of accompaniment

style play, you can restore

the original sound by select-

ing the same style again.

Keep in mind that using the

Revoice function may result

in unnatural or unexpected

sound, depending on the

particular song data.

When playing GM song data,

channel 10 (in the SONG

CH 9 - 16 page) can only be

used for a Drum Kit voice.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

PF-1000

118

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116.

PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 58, 87), this determines the Portamento time. The

higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only

applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).

PITCH BEND RANGE ...........When the Pitch Bend or Glide effect is assigned to the pedal, this determines the range of

the pitch change in semitones.

OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down.

TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument.

Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter

For details about the Filter,

see page 88.

When a Natural voice is

selected, Harmonic and

Brightness cannot be

changed.

Be careful with these con-

trols. Depending on the

selected voice, extreme set-

tings may result in noise or

distortion.

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters.

HARMONIC .........Allows you to adjust the resonance effect

(see “Harmonic Content” on page 88).

BRIGHTNESS .....Determines the brightness of the sound by

adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 88).

Each press of this

button switches among

the various parts/

channels.

Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune

Portamento is used to cre-

ate a smooth transition in

pitch from one note to the

next.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO

TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING.

These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units.

MASTER... Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback.

SONG ....... Transposes the pitch of the song playback.

KBD .......... Transposes the pitch of the keyboard.

Refer to the explanation below.

When a Natural voice is

selected, Portamento Time

cannot be changed.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

119

PF-1000

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116.

Adjusting the Effects

There are three effect sec-

tions: Reverb, Chorus, and

DSP (which contains a vari-

ety of effect types). These

are available independently

for the Natural voices and

Regular voices. For details,

refer to the Effect Block list

(page 120).

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PAR T

MIXING

CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

Switches among the

effect sections:

REVERB, CHORUS,

and DSP.

Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information about the

characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 120.

Press this to edit and store

the effect (page 119, 120).

These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect.

BLOCK............ Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects).

PART ...............Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only

when the block is set to “DSP1” and the CONNECTION parameter is set to

“Insertion” (page 120).

CATEGORY..... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This

parameter may not be available depending on the selected block.

TYPE ...............Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The

actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block.

When the BLOCK parameter is set to REVERB1, CHORUS1, or

DSP1, press this to call up the display from which you can change the

detailed settings for the effects.

Each press of this

button switches among

the various parts/

channels.

Indicates the type name for

each effect block.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

PF-1000

120

Effect Block

Block Parts Characteristics

Number of User Effect

REVERB 1

(for Regular Voices)

All parts

Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in

a concert hall or jazz club.

REVERB 2

(for Natural Voices)

All parts except microphone (MIC) —

CHORUS 1

(for Regular Voices)

All parts

Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts

are being played simultaneously.

CHORUS 2

(for Natural Voices)

All parts except microphone (MIC) —

DSP 1

(for Regular Voices)

Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),

MIC

In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this

section features a variety of special effects,

including distortion.

DSP 2

(for Natural Voices)

All parts except microphone (MIC) —

BRILLIANCE

(for Natural Voices)

All parts except microphone (MIC)

Changes the brightness and clarity of the

sound.

—

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the effect block.

Calls up the

display for storing

the effect.

Determines the effect category.

Determines the effect type.

Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted.

Determines the level of the

effect (return level). This is

not available when BLOCK

is set to “DSP1,”

PARAMETER is set to

“CONNECTION,” and

VALUE is set to “Insertion.”

Determines the value of

the selected parameter.

Calls up the display

for naming the User

Effect (page 45).

2 31 5 6 7 84

Select the

destination to

which the effect is

to be stored. The

number of memory

spaces available

for the destination

differs for each

block (refer to the

chart below).

Stores the effect settings you

made above to a User Effect

location (SYSTEM) for future

recall. To call up the effect, select

USER from the CATEGORY

parameter and select the desired

effect from the TYPE parameter.

Keep in mind that in some

cases noise may result if

you adjust the effect param-

eters while playing the

instrument.

This parameter cannot be

set when BLOCK is set to

“REVERB2,” “CHORUS2,”

or “DSP2” (or “BRIL-

LIANCE”).

Switches between

the upper/lower

parameters. For the

lower parameter, the

depth can be

changed when the

[VARIATION] button

is on.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

121

PF-1000

Effect Structure

The PF-1000 features the following digital effect systems, which can be applied independently for the Natural voices

(page 86) and the Regular voices (page 86). The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set with the panel

controls.

• Reverb .......... Normally the settings that ﬁt the selected style are called up. For most of the Natural voices, settings

that ﬁt the voice are called up.

• Chorus.......... Normally the settings that ﬁt the selected style are called up. For most of the Natural voices, settings

that ﬁt the voice are called up.

• DSP .............. Normally the settings which ﬁt the selected voice are called up. Variation (settings in which the

expression of the effect is changed) is prepared for each type, and it can be turned ON/OFF by the

[VARIATION] button on the panel.

When the Natural voice is selected, the [VARIATION] button does not work.

The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal ﬂow for the send/return

controls set on the PF-1000.

For Natural Voices (REVERB2, CHORUS2, DSP2)

For Regular Voices (REVERB1, CHORUS1, DSP1)

OUT

Rev Send

MAIN VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

When DSP is set as an Insertion effect

(here, PART is set to MAIN),

it is put here in the signal flow.

(For Natural voices,

DSP can only be used

as a System effect.)

Rev Send

LAYER VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

LEFT VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

MIC

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

CHORUS

BRILLIANCE

REVERB

DRY LINE

DSP

Chorus

Return

DSP

Return

Reverb

Return

DSP

When DSP is set as a System effect,

it is put here in the signal flow.

(For Natural voices, DSP can only

be used as a System effect.)

(Natural Voices only)

STYLE/SONG

(each channel)

PF-1000

122

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These

sophisticated functions let you customize the PF-1000 to your own musical needs and preferences.

Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning — Master Tune and Scale Tune

■ Master Tune (page 124)

This allows you to make ﬁne adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the

tuning with that of other instruments.

■ Scale Tune (page 124)

This determines the particular tuning system (or temperament) for the instrument. This is especially useful for playing

period pieces, to match the tuning system used during speciﬁc musical eras.

Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 126)

These allow you to set parameters related to song playback.

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord

Fingering

■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 127)

These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point.

■ Chord Fingering (page 128)

This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can

even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

METRONOME

STYLE CONTROL

START/STOP

FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK

BREAK INTRO

ENDING/rit.

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START

TOPREC

NEW SONG

SYNC.START

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2

STYLE L

TRACK1

START/STOP

REW

REPEAT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND

CREATOR

DIGITAL

RECORDING

DIRECT

ACCESS

BALANCE

CHANNEL

ON/OFF

PART

MIXING

CONSOLE

LCD

CONTRAST

ACMP

AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

MAIN

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

ON/OFF

LAYER

BACK

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

RESET RESET

POP BALLADS

DANCE

SWING & JAZZ

R & B CO UNTRY

LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST

USER 4321

4321FREEZEUSERXGSYNTH.

CHOIR & PAD

BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS

LEFT HOLDMONOECHO

HARMONY/

REVERB

PIANO & ORGAN &

DSP VARIATION

BASSGUITAR

PERCUSSION

HARPSI. E.PIANO

ACCORDION

8 MEMORY765

MARCH &

WORLD

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

STYLE

SONG

DIGITAL

STUDIO

2 31 5 6 7 84

VOICE

PART

PIANO

VOICE REGISTRATION MEMORY

VOICE EFFECT ONE TOUC H SETTING

FUNCTION

Operation

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

Select the desired function.

Set the parameters of the selected function.

The operations for each function are covered in the

following explanations.

To return to the previous

display, press the [EXIT]

button.

END

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

123

PF-1000

Making Settings for the Pedals and

Keyboard — Controller

■ Pedal (page 128)

These settings determine how the connected pedals

(including foot controllers and footswitches) are used.

They can be assigned to a variety of functions, letting

you control operations with your feet — such as

turning the accompaniment style on/off, or triggering

Fill In patterns.

■ Keyboard / Panel (page 130)

These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the

keyboard (how touch affects volume), and let you

independently transpose the keyboard, song data,

and the entire instrument.

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,

and Voice Set

■ Registration Sequence (page 131)

This determines the order in which the Registration

Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the

[BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal.

■ Freeze (page 131)

This lets you specify the settings you want to be

maintained or left unchanged, even when changing

Registration Memory presets.

■ Voice Set (page 132)

This lets you determine whether certain voice-related

settings (such as Effects, EQ, Harmony, etc.) are

automatically called up or not when you select a

voice.

Setting Harmony and Echo (page 132)

These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect

applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the

amount of effect.

Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV —

Video Out (page 133)

These settings determine the display characteristics when

outputting the PF-1000’s display contents to a TV

monitor (connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal). You

can set the size and color of the displayed characters, as

well as the color of the display background.

Making MIDI Settings

■ System (page 134)

These determine various system messages settings

(such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well

as Local Control on/off.

■ Transmit (page 135)

This determines how playback data is sent to

connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are

assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also

lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over

each channel.

■ Receive (page 136)

This determines how the parts of the PF-1000 respond

to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e., which

parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive channels.

This also lets you specify the type of data to be

received over each channel.

■ Root (page 136)

This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root

notes, for use with the auto accompaniment.

■ Chord Detect (page 136)

This determines the channel(s) recognized for the

chords, for use with the auto accompaniment.

Other Settings — Utility

■ Conﬁg 1 (page 137)

This page contains settings for Fade In/Out,

Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound.

■ Conﬁg 2 (page 138)

From this page, you can adjust the display, make

speaker settings, and change the voice number

indication.

■ Disk (page 139)

From this page, you can format disks, and copy from

disk to disk.

■ Owner (page 140)

From this page, you can set the language of the

instrument, and input your own name — which is

shown automatically every time the power is turned

on.

■ System Reset (page 140)

This function restores the PF-1000 to its original

factory settings. You can also specify which types of

settings are to be restored, as well as store your own

original settings for future recall.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

124

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune

Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune

Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune

Hz (Hertz)

This unit of measurement

refers to the frequency of a

sound, and represents the

number of times a sound

wave vibrates in a second.

The Tune function does not

affect the Drum Kit or SFX

Kit voices.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the overall

pitch of the PF-1000, from

414.8 - 466.8 Hz. Press the

4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to the

factory setting of 440.0 Hz.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Cent

A unit of pitch equal to 1/100

of a semitone (100 cents = 1

semitone).

You can register your original

scale tunings to a REGIS-

TRATION MEMORY button.

To do this, checkmark

“SCALE” in the REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY display

(page 82).

Selects which parts

should be affected by the

scale setting. Select the

part to be set by pressing

6 or 7 [▲/▼] and set the

function ON or OFF by

pressing [8▲/▼].

Determines the Scale

(page 125).

Determines the base note for

each scale.

When the base note is changed,

the pitch of the keyboard is

transposed, yet maintains the

original pitch relationship

between the notes.

Selects the note to be tuned.

Adjusts the scale tuning of the selected note.

[4▲/▼] : in 50-cent steps

[5▲/▼] : in 1-cent steps (–64 through +63)

Press the 4 or 5 [▲/▼] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the factory setting.

When you adjust the scale tuning, the scale template

name shown at the top of the display will change to

“EDITED SCALE” indicating some adjustment has

been done from the preset scale template.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

125

PF-1000

Scale

■ Equal Temperament

The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This

is the most commonly used tuning in music today.

■ Pure Major/Pure Minor

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, ﬁfth).

You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing.

■ Pythagorean

This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect ﬁfths, which are

collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and

suitable for some leads.

■ Mean-Tone

This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in

tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.

■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on

the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character.

The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when

performing period music on the harpsichord.

■ Arabic

Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C)

The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument.





EFF





Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2

Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2

Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8

Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7

Arabic1 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0

Arabic2 0.0 00.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

126

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings

Quick Start

On some commercially avail-

able song data, certain set-

tings related to the song

(such as voice selection, vol-

ume, etc.) are recorded to

the ﬁrst measure, before the

actual note data. When

Quick Start is set to “ON,”

the PF-1000 reads all initial

non-note data of the song at

the highest possible speed,

then automatically slows

down to the appropriate

tempo at the ﬁrst note. This

allows you to start playback

as quickly as possible, with a

minimum pause for reading

of data.

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

(page 147). The channels

are assigned as follows:

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Phrase Mark

This data speciﬁes a certain

location in the song data.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Turns Quick Start on/off (see note).

Allows you to play back all songs

from the same folder continuously.

Determines the MIDI channel assigned

to the [TRACK2] button.

Determines the MIDI channel assigned

to the [TRACK1] button.

When set to “ON,” this automatically sets

the proper Track 1 and Track 2 channels.

Normally, this should be set to “ON.”

Determines the language of the

displayed lyrics.

When this is set to “AUTO,” the

language defaults to that of the

song data. When not set to “AUTO,”

the language defaults to Japanese,

when the internal setting

(page 140) is “JAPANESE”; for all

other languages, this is set to

“INTERNATIONAL.”

Determines whether the Phrase

Mark Repeat function for the song is

on or off. When this is on, you can

repeatedly play back a speciﬁed

phrase (selection of measures) of

the song. The method for specifying

a phrase mark is the same as that in

the SONG POSITION display

(page 76).

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

127

PF-1000

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting

and Split Point

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters —

Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering

2 31 5 6 7 84

These select the part to which the split point

setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand

range, or both. Press the desired key for the split

point while holding down one of these buttons.

The pressed key is included in the range for the

Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard

(ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT).

A+L (ACMP + LEFT)

Allows you to simultaneously set the split

point for both the left-hand range and the

Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard.

Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to “ON,”

you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords

— even when the accompaniment style is not playing back.

This applies to the OTS Link function, in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up

with changes in the section. This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change

with the section. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)

Real Time

One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button.

Next Bar

One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a section button.

The PF-1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 65) simply by

quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time.

Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,”

the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in

the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard).

Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting

different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped).

Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the left-

hand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each

independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these

buttons by themselves to set the split point value.

About Section Set

When any of the Main A-D

sections is not included in

the accompaniment style

data, the nearest section is

automatically selected. For

example, when Main D is not

contained in the selected

accompaniment style, Main

C will be called up.

L (LEFT)

Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard.

A (ACMP)

Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard.

About Section Set

When any of the Main A-D

sections is not included in

the accompaniment style

data, the nearest section is

automatically selected. For

example, when Main D is not

contained in the selected

accompaniment style, Main

C will be called up.

Split point can be set in the

MAIN display.

About Split Point

Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto

Accompaniment section (ACMP) and left-hand section (LEFT) from the

right-hand section (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than

the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than

the LEFT split point.

Split point (A) Split point (L)

Split point (A) + (L)

Auto

Accompaniment

section

Auto Accompaniment section

+ Left-hand section

Left-hand

section

Right-hand

section

Right-hand

section

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

128

Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering

This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn

how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below).

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

Making Settings for the Pedals

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the ﬁngering

type (page 62).

This lets you change the root

note from the chord.

This lets you change the

chord type.

Indicates the note that belongs to a

chord in the music.

Indicates the note that

belongs to a chord. Some

notes can be omitted. The

chord name is indicated

next to “CHORD NAME.”

...Required

...Can be omitted

...Either note can be

omitted

...Can be omitted when

the note indicated by

is omitted

The chord indication in the

display applies to the Fin-

gered method, regardless if

another method is actually

selected.

Chord Tutor

The Chord Tutor feature is

essentially an electronic

“chord book” that shows you

appropriate ﬁngerings for

chords; it is useful when you

want to play certain chords.

Simply specify the desired

chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼]

buttons, and the ﬁngerings

for the Fingered method are

indicated in the display.

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the particular

pedal to which a function is

to be assigned.

Determines the function to be assigned to the

selected pedal. Any one of the available functions

can be assigned to each pedal.

For information on the assignable functions, see

“Pedal-controllable Functions” on page 129.

If necessary, you can turn

the corresponding part ON/

OFF or set the control depth

(see the next page).

Pedal on/off operation may

differ depending on the

particular pedal you’ve

connected to the [AUX

PEDAL] jack. For example,

pressing down on one pedal

may turn the selected

function on, while pressing

a different make/brand of

pedal may turn the function

off. If necessary, use this

setting to reverse the

operation.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

129

PF-1000

Pedal-controllable Functions

* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if

SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.

* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (AUX pedal only) to control the volume.

SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any

sustained notes.

SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the ﬁrst note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when pressing

the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to certain

voices — PIANO, for example.

GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is

produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento

time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 118). It does not work for Natural voices.

PITCHBEND*

Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed.

MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed. This

does not work for the Natural voices.

DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button. This does not work for the Natural voices.

VIBROTOR ON/OFF Turns the “VibRotor” effect type (page 119) on and off. This only works for the Natural voices.

HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.

SCORE PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page (one page only).

SCORE PAGE- While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page (one page only).

SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button.

STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button.

SYNCRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button.

INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button.

MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button.

MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button.

MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button.

MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button.

FILL DOWN A ﬁll-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left.

FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing.

BREAK Break starts playing.

FILL UP A ﬁll-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right.

ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button.

FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 62).

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the ﬁngering

is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.

PERCUSSION

The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4

▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the

desired percussion instrument.

LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button.

LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button.

OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting.

OTS- Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.

SONG, STYLE, MIC, LEFT,

LAYER, MAIN

These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.

HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the right pedal until the damper effect (page 58) starts working.

DEPTH Determines the depth of the left pedal effect, when SOFT is selected. This only works for the Natural voices.

UP/DOWN

When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).

RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.

ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed.

OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released.

KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular

drum kit used for the pedal.

PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This

determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

130

Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel

Keyboard Touch

The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to

customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences.

Transpose Assign

This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button.

2 31 5 6 7 84

HARD 2

Requires strong playing to produce

high volume. Best for players with a

heavy touch.

HARD 1

Requires moderately strong playing for

higher volume.

NORMAL

Standard touch response.

SOFT 1

Produces high volume with moderate

playing strength.

SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even

with light playing strength. Best for

players with a light touch.

Determines the Touch sensitivity

setting (refer to the table at right).

Determines whether touch is on or not for the corresponding parts.

The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep

in mind that you can set each voice to a different

touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to

play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can

set this so that the voice is not affected by touch

(page 87).

Determines the ﬁxed volume

level when Touch is set to “OFF.”

2 31 5 6 7 84

KEYBOARD

For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the

keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and

the accompaniment styles.

SONG

For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of

the songs.

MASTER

For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the

entire instrument (keyboard voices,

accompaniment styles, and songs).

Transpose

Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices,

accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone

units.

Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via

TRANSPOSE ASSIGN, appears.

Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the

[EXIT] button.

• Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song

These settings can be used to match both the song and your

keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say

you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song.

The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in

D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C.

To match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at

“0,” set the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose

to “-3.” This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song

data down to your comfortable singing key.

RESET

TRANSPOSE

END

The transpose function

does not affect the Drum

Kit or SFX Kit voices.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

131

PF-1000

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets —

Registration Sequence

You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the

appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up

the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play.

Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze

This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration

Memory presets. For details, see page 84.

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set

2 31 5 6 7 84

Turns the Registration

Sequence function

on/off. When this is

set to “ON,” the

programmed

Registration

Sequence is shown at

the top right of the

Main display, and you

can step through the

sequence in this

display by using the

[BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons or the pedals.

Determines which pedal is used to advance

(increment) through the sequence.

Determines which

pedal is used to

reverse (decrement)

through the

sequence.

Determines how Registration

Sequence behaves when

reaching the end of the

sequence.

Stop

Pressing the [NEXT] button or

the “advance” pedal has no

effect. The sequence is

“stopped.”

Top

The sequence starts again at

the beginning.

Next Bank

The sequence automatically

moves to the beginning of the

next Registration Memory bank

in the same folder.

Indicates the ﬁle name of the selected

Registration Memory bank.

Indicates the Registration Memory preset

numbers, in the order of the current

Registration Sequence.

These move the cursor position in the sequence.

Replaces the number at the cursor position with the

currently selected Registration Memory number.

Inserts the number of the currently

selected Registration Memory preset

immediately before the cursor position.

Deletes the number at the

cursor position.

Deletes all Registration

Memory numbers in the

sequence.

Setting Registration

Sequence Enable to “ON”

overrides any other Pedal

settings (for pedals assigned

to “Regist (+) Pedal” and

“Regist (-) Pedal” here).

These include the pedal set-

tings on page 128, and in

Voice Set on page 132.

When both “Regist (+)

Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”

are set to “OFF,” the pedals

cannot be used to step

through the Registration

Sequence; only the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons can be used

in the MAIN display.

When both “Regist (+)

Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”

are set to the same pedal,

“Regist (+) Pedal” takes

priority.

Registration Sequence data

is included as part of the

Registration Memory bank

ﬁle. To save your newly pro-

grammed Registration

Sequence, store the current

Registration Memory bank

ﬁle (page 38, 44). Any Reg-

istration Sequence data is

lost when changing Regis-

tration Memory banks,

unless you’ve stored it with

the Registration Memory

bank ﬁle.

Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button.

END

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

132

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set

When changing voices (selecting a voice ﬁle), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound

Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page , you can set the on/off status for each part. For

example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the

LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to "OFF" in this page.

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Use these to select the

desired part.

These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings (Voice

selection, Effects, Harmony/Echo, and left pedal assignment) are automatically

called up or not when you select a voice. These settings can be turned on or off

independently for each part.

Normally, these should all be

set to "ON."

Harmony/Echo and Left

pedal assignment cannot be

set for the Layer and Left

parts.

Setting Harmony and Echo

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the Harmony type.

For details, see page 133.

Determines the lowest velocity value at

which the harmony note will sound. This

allows you to selectively apply the harmony

by your playing strength, letting you create

harmony accents in the melody. The

harmony effect is applied when you play

the key strongly (above the set value).

Determines the level of the Harmony effect.

Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill

effects. This parameter is only available when Echo,

Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above.

This lets you assign the Harmony

effect to various parts. For details,

see page 133.

When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony

effect is applied only to the note that

belongs to a chord played in the Auto

Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

This parameter is not available when Multi

Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in

Type above.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

133

PF-1000

About the Harmony Types

When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected

When “Multi Assign” is selected

Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to

separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the ﬁrst is played by the Main voice and the

second by the Layer voice.

When “Echo” is selected

An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.

When “Tremolo” is selected

A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.

When “Trill” is selected

Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo.

About the Harmony Assignments

Multi

This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the

Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be

played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice.

Main

Harmony is applied only to the Main part.

Layer

Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

Split point

Chords played to the left of the

split point control the harmony.

Harmony notes (based on the chord

and the selected type) are automatically

added to the melody played to the right

of the split point.

Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV — Video Out

• Occasionally some ﬂashing parallel

lines may appear in the television or

video monitor. This does not necessarily

indicate that the monitor is malfunction-

ing. You may be able to remedy the situ-

ation by changing the Character Color

or Background Color parameters. For

optimum results, also try adjusting the

color settings on the monitor itself.

• Avoid looking at the television or video

monitor for prolonged periods of time

since doing so could damage your eye-

sight. Take frequent breaks and focus

your eyes on distant objects to avoid

eyestrain.

• Keep in mind that even after adjusting

all settings as recommended here, the

monitor you are using may not show the

PF-1000’s display contents as expected

(e.g., the display contents may not ﬁt on

the screen, the characters may not be

completely clear, or the colors may be

incorrect).

2 31 5 6 7 84

VIDEO IN

Television

VIDEO OUT

Set this to

correspond to the

standard used by

your particular

television/video

equipment: NTSC

or PAL.

Set this to “SMALL” if the contents of the

display do not ﬁt in your monitor screen.

Determines the background color

of the display.

Determines the colors of the characters

displayed on the video screen.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

134

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the

USER display, for future recall.

For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 145).

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System

Call up the display as described in step 2 above.

Local Control

Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PF-1000 controls

its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set

Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PF-1000’s tone generator section so

that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an

external MIDI sequencer to play the PF-1000’s internal voices, and use the PF-1000 keyboard to record notes to the

external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.

Setting the MIDI Parameters

2 31 5 6 7 84

Select the

desired

template.

Call up the Edit display, then

select and set the desired

functions/parameters.

For details about each of the

MIDI edit displays, see the

following pages.

Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set)

All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer

and Left.

Master KBD The PF-1000 functions as a master

keyboard for controlling external tone

generators or other devices.

KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard

play instead of the individual parts

(Main/Layer/Left).

Song All Transmit channels are set to

correspond to the Song channels 1-16.

Use this to play the PF-1000 song data

with an external tone generator, or to

record your entire performance to an

external sequencer.

Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock

and PF-1000 synchronizes with a

external MIDI device.

MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the

keyboard voice and accompaniment

style with a MIDI accordion.

MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI

accordion control the accompaniment

style, as well as play the chord and

bass parts.

MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN

terminal controls the bass note of the

accompaniment.

MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN

terminal plays the bass part.

MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor

received.

Call up the User display

and press this button to

save the newly edited

MIDI settings.

Up to ten setups can

be saved.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

END

The saved settings can be named (page 41)

or deleted (page 43) in the User page.

For editing the Local Control parameters.

For editing the Message Switch

parameters.

For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock,

Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop

parameters.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

135

PF-1000

Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop

■ Clock

Determines whether the PF-1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an

external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PF-1000 is being used alone. If you are using the

PF-1000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PF-1000 to be

synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the external device must be

connected to the PF-1000 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.

■ Transmit Clock

Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is

transmitted.

■ Receive Transpose

When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PF-1000 is not transposed, and when it is set to “ON,” the

received note data is transposed according to the current PF-1000 keyboard transpose (page 130) setting.

■ Start/Stop

Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or

style playback.

Message Switch

SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT).....................Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system

exclusive message data ON or OFF.

SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment

ON or OFF.

CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and

type) ON or OFF.

CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE).......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external

equipment ON or OFF.

Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit

Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display

* Available in RECEIVE display only (page 136).

Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a speciﬁc note number

which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.

Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data.

Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers.

Pitch Bend (PB) See page 129.

After Touch (AT)* With this function, the PF-1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that

pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater

expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.

FA, FC

MIDI messages for starting/stop-

ping the song or style. The “FA”

message corresponds to start,

and “FC” corresponds to stop.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the

channel for changing

transmit settings.

Determines the Part for the

selected channel.

Turns transmission of the

speciﬁed data type on or

off. See below for details

on the data types.

The dots corresponding

to each channel (1-16)

ﬂash brieﬂy whenever

any data is transmitted

on the channel(s).

This determines which parts will

send MIDI data and over which

MIDI channel the data will be sent.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

136

Receiving MIDI Data — Receive

MIDI Receive Parts

Setting Root Note Channels — Root

The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the

accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point

settings.

Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect

The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the

accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the ﬁngering type. The root notes will be detected

regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that

of the ROOT display above.

OFF No MIDI data is received.

SONG Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16

correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively.

MAIN The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

LAYER The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

KEYBOARD MIDI note data received by the PF-1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard.

ACMP RHYTHM1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 notes.

ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS notes.

ACMP CHORD1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 notes.

ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD notes.

ACMP PHRASE1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 notes.

EXTRA PART1-5 There are ﬁve parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument

itself. When these ﬁve channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the channel for

changing receive settings.

Determines the Part for the

selected channel. See below for

details about the receive parts.

Turns reception of the

speciﬁed data type on or off.

See page 135 for details on

the data types.

The dots corresponding to each

channel (1 - 32) ﬂash brieﬂy

whenever any data is received

on the channel(s).

The MIDI IN/OUT terminals

and Port A of the TO HOST

terminal (Port A of the CBX

driver) correspond to chan-

nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO

HOST terminal (Port B of the

CBX driver) corresponds to

channels 17 - 32.

This determines which parts will

receive MIDI data and over which

MIDI channel the data will be

received.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Selects the channels in groups

of eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24,

and 25 - 32, respectively.

Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF.

Sets all channels to OFF.

The MIDI IN/OUT terminals

and Port A of the TO HOST

terminal (Port A of the CBX

driver) correspond to chan-

nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO

HOST terminal (Port B of the

CBX driver) corresponds to

channels 17 - 32.

When several channels are

simultaneously set to “ON,”

the root note is detected

from merged MIDI data

received over the channels.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

137

PF-1000

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and

Tap — CONFIG 1

Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time

These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out.

Metronome

These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters.

Other Settings — Utility

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the time it takes for the

volume to fade in, or go from minimum to

maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).

Determines the time it takes for the volume

to fade out, or go from maximum to

minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).

Determines the time the volume is held

at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 -

5.0 seconds).

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the level of the

metronome sound.

Determines which sound is used for the metronome.

Bell Off ........................ Conventional metronome sound, with no bell.

Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell.

English Voice .............. Count in English (One, Two, Three, Four)

German Voice.............. Count in German (Eins, Zwei, Drei, Vier)

Japanese Voice........... Count in Japanese (Ichi, Ni, San, Shi)

French Voice ............... Count in French (Un, Deux, Trois, Quatre)

Spanish Voice ............. Count in Spanish (Uno, Dos, Tres, Cuatro)

Determines the time

signature of the metronome

sound.

When you start the song or

accompaniment style, the

values matching to them are

automatically set.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

138

Parameter Lock

This function is used to “lock” the speciﬁed parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls

— in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or song and sequence data.

Tap Count

This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 51).

Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System, and Voice Number

Indication — CONFIG 2

2 31 5 6 7 84

Selects the desired

parameter for locking/

unlocking.

Determines whether the selected

parameter is locked (checkmarked)

or unlocked (empty).

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the level of the tap

sound.

Determines the particular sound

used for the Tap Start function.

Any drum or percussion sound in

the Standard Kit (page 55) can be

selected.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Determines the brightness of

the backlit display.

Determines whether or not the voice bank

and number are shown in the PRESET

page of the VOICE display (page 54). This is

useful when you want to check the proper

bank select MSB/LSB values and program

number to specify when selecting the voice

from an external MIDI device.

HEADPHONE SW (SWITCH)

Speaker sounds normally, but is cut off

when headphones are inserted to the

PHONES jack.

Speaker sound is always on.

OFF

Speaker sound is off.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

139

PF-1000

Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk

• Copying cannot be done

between a 2DD disk and

2HD disk. When copying,

make sure both disk are

the same type.

• Depending on the amount

of data contained in the

original source disk, you

may have to swap the two

disks several times until all

of the data is properly

copied.

• Make sure to read the

section “Using the Floppy

Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks” on page 6.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Turns the Song Auto Open function on

or off. When this is set to “ON,” the PF-

1000 automatically calls up the ﬁrst disk

song when a disk is inserted.

This function copies all the data

from one disk to another, letting

you back up all your important

data before editing. For

instructions, see “Copying from

Disk to Disk” below.

This function formats a ﬂoppy

disk (see below).

Source

disk

Copy Copy

Destination

disk

Internal memory

Copying from Disk to Disk

As shown below, ﬁrst copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PF-1000, then

copy the data to the backup (destination) disk.

Press the [F] button. A message

appears, prompting you to insert

the source disk.

Insert the disk containing the

original data into the drive and

press “OK.”

A “Now copying” message

appears, and the PF-1000

begins copying data to internal

memory. To abort the operation,

press “CANCEL.”

At the “Please insert a destination

disk and press the OK button ”

prompt, eject the source disk and

replace it with a blank, formatted

disk, then press “OK.” To abort the

operation, press “CANCEL.”

When the operation is ﬁnished

(or when prompted), eject the

destination disk.

Commercially available

music data is subject to

protection by copyright

laws. Copying commer-

cially available data is

strictly prohibited,

except for your own per-

sonal use. Some music

software is purposely

copy-protected and

cannot be copied.

Formatting a Disk

When using an unformatted disk for

the ﬁrst time, make sure to properly

format it on the PF-1000. This

includes blank disks as well as disks

already initialized in a different

format. Formatting erases all data on

the disk.

Insert the disk with shutter facing

away from you and the label side

up. To start the Format operation,

press the [H] (DISK FORMAT)

button, in the DISK page above.

The Format operation initial-

izes a disk with a speciﬁc ﬁle

system, allowing the corre-

sponding device (in this case,

the PF-1000) to access it

properly.

Since there are several types

of formats and disks avail-

able, you should know which

ones to use with the PF-

1000. 2DD disks are format-

ted to a capacity of 720 KB,

and 2HD disks are formatted

to a capacity of 1.44 MB.

Formatting a disk completely

erases all data on the disk.

Make sure that the disk

you’re formatting does not

contain important data!

CAUTION

Disk Lamp

When the power is turned on, the disk lamp

(at the bottom left of the drive) lights to

indicate the drive can be used.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PF-1000

140

Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PF-1000 —

System Reset

This operation lets you restore the PF-1000 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI

Setup, User Effect, Music Finder, and Files & Folders.

2 31 5 6 7 84

Press this button to enter an

Owner name (page 16; for

instructions on naming see

page 45). This name is

automatically shown when you

turn the power on.

Determines the language

used for the display

messages. Once you

change this setting, all

messages will be shown in

the selected language.

When “JAPANESE” is selected for the Language parame-

ter, and you change this to one of the western languages,

the kanji and kana characters of the ﬁle name stored in

the disk drive are changed to western characters. In the

opposite case, special Latin characters and marks are

changed into normal characters. Also, in the case of

ﬂoppy disk data, text in the ﬁles are changed to characters

that cannot be read by the instrument.

Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying

to access ﬁles originating or edited by a computer having

a different language operating system. In general, be

careful when switching languages — you risk not being

able to access the data properly.

2 31 5 6 7 84

These call up the corresponding Open/Save

displays. These let you store the

corresponding data as ﬁles to disk, for future

recall. Pressing each of these buttons calls

up the corresponding Open/Save display,

from which you can select the corresponding

PRESET page. From this PRESET page,

you can save the relevant data.

Restores the System Setup parameters to the original

factory settings. You can also restore only the System

Setup settings by simultaneously holding down the highest

key on the keyboard (C7) and turning on the power.

Restores the MIDI

templates to the original

factory settings.

Restores the User Effects

(page 120) to the original

factory settings.

Restores the Music

Finder data to the

original factory settings.

Deletes all ﬁles and

folders stored in the User

page.

Executes the Factory Reset operation

for all items checkmarked above.

The functions and settings

below do not apply to the

Factory Reset operation.

However, you can restore

these to their original set-

tings by calling up the preset

System Setup ﬁles, using

the Open/Save System Files

function.

Language

Owner Name

LCD Brightness

Video Out settings (NTSC/

PAL, Size, Character Color,

Background Color)

All Music Finder records can

be stored together as a sin-

gle ﬁle. When calling up a

stored ﬁle, a message

appears prompting you to

replace or append the

records as desired.

Replace:

All Music Finder records cur-

rently in the instrument are

deleted and replaced with

the records of the selected

ﬁle.

Append:

The records called up are

added to the vacant record

numbers.

141

PF-1000

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

1 Using the Headphones

(PHONES jacks).

To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES

jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the left side

of the keyboard. You can also determine whether or not

the internal stereo speaker system is shut off when a pair

of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack

(page 138). Two people can enjoy listening to the PF-

1000 together by connecting two pairs of headphones to

the two jacks.

2 Connecting the Microphone

or Guitar (MIC/LINE IN jack).

By connecting a microphone to the PF-1000, you can

enjoy singing along with your own performance or song

playback. (A dynamic microphone is recommended.) The

PF-1000 outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the

built-in speakers.

Connect your microphone to the MIC/LINE IN jack

(standard 1/4" phone jack).

Set the [MIC LINE] switch (located next to the [MIC/

LINE IN] jack) to the MIC position.

Use the [INPUT VOLUME] knob (located next to the

MIC/LINE IN jack) to set the microphone volume.

Before connecting the PF-1000 to other electronic components,

turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power

on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0).

Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may

occur.

CAUTION

PEDAL AUX PEDALAC INLET

VIDEO OUT AUX IN

MIDI TO HOSTHOST SELECT

L/L+R

RL R

L/L+R

THRU

ON OFF

MIDI PC-2 MacPC-1

OUT

AUX OUT PHONES POWER

LEVEL FIXED

MIN MAX

INPUT

VOLUME MIC

LINE IN MIC LINE

134

6 87

P.142 P.142 P.142

P.143 P.143 P.143

Use an unidirectional microphone for best results.

MIC LINE MIC LINE

When connecting a microphone When connecting a guitar

You should set the [MIC LINE] switch to the LINE position when

connecting an audio source with line-level output to the MIC/LINE

IN jack.

MIN MAX

INPUT

VOLUME

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

PF-1000

142

345 Connecting Audio &

Video Devices

You can connect the PF-1000 to a wide range of audio

equipment by using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks,

which are located at the bottom left of the instrument.

Connect as shown in the illustrations below using

standard audio cables.

3 Playing the sounds of the PF-1000

through an external audio system, and

recording the sounds to an external

recorder (AUX OUT jacks)

4 Outputting the sound of an external

device through the built-in speakers of

the PF-1000 (AUX IN jacks)

5 Showing the display of the PF-1000 on a

connected TV monitor (VIDEO OUT)

You can connect the PF-1000 to a television or video

monitor to display the lyrics in your song data or LCD

on a larger screen.

The size and color of the displayed characters can also

be set, as well as the color of the display background

(page 133).

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance.

When the PF-1000 AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external

audio system, ﬁrst turn on the power to the PF-1000, then to the

external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power

off.

CAUTION

Never connect the PF-1000 AUX OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks,

either directly or via external audio equipment. Such connections

could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance

impossible, and may even damage the PF-1000.

CAUTION

RL R

L/L+R

AUX OUT

LEVEL FIXED

Audio cable

To powered speaker

RCA pin

plug

RCA pin plug

AUX IN

Cassette tape recorder

stereo system

Phone plug

(standard)

When these are connected

(with RCA pin plug; LEVEL

FIXED), the sound is output to

the external device at a ﬁxed

level, regardless of the

[MASTER VOLUME] control

setting.

When these are connected

(with standard phone

plugs), you can use the

[MASTER VOLUME]

control to adjust the volume

of the sound output to the

external device.

PF-1000

• If you connect the PF-1000 to a monaural device, use only the

AUX OUT L/L+R jack.

When the PF-1000’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external

device, ﬁrst turn on the power of the external device, then that of

the PF-1000.

CAUTION

AUX IN

L/L+R

Audio cable

LINE OUT

Tone generator

Phone plug

(standard)

PF-1000

• The PF-1000’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input sig-

nal from the AUX IN jacks.

• If you connect the PF-1000 to a monaural device, use only the

AUX IN L/L+R jack.

• For information on setting the video standard (NTSC or PAL),

refer to page 133. The default setting is “PAL.”

• Use an audio-video cable with good high-frequency characteris-

tics and RCA-type pin jacks to connect the PF-1000 to a televi-

sion or video monitor.

VIDEO OUT AUX IN

L/L+R

RCA pin

plug

RCA pin

plug

VIDEO IN

Television

PF-1000

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

143

PF-1000

6 Using the Pedal (footswitch)

or Foot Controller (AUX

PEDAL jack)

By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the

FC7) to the AUX PEDAL jack, you can control any one of

a variety of important functions with your foot — such as

dynamically adjusting the volume as you play (page 128).

By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to this jack,

you can replicate the function of some panel buttons,

doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment.

7 Connecting external MIDI

devices (MIDI terminals)

Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI

device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the PF-1000. Make sure

to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to MIDI when

you use these connectors. For more information about

connections, see “What You Can Do With MIDI” on

page 147.

MIDI IN........... Receives MIDI messages from an

external MIDI device

MIDI OUT ....... Sends out MIDI messages generated by

the PF-1000

MIDI THRU ..... Simply relays the MIDI messages

received at MIDI IN

For a general overview of MIDI and how you can

effectively use it, refer to the following sections:

• What’s MIDI? (page 145)

• What You Can Do With MIDI (page 147)

• MIDI functions (page 134)

8 Connecting to a Computer

(MIDI terminals/TO HOST

terminal)

Connect your PF-1000 to computer and take advantage of

the wide range of powerful and versatile software for

creating and editing music. The PF-1000 can be

connected in three ways.

■ Using the TO HOST terminal

■ Using the MIDI terminals

■ Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional

USB interface (UX series)

Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power

is turned off.

CAUTION

• Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters.

Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI

driver)

To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the

PF-1000’s TO HOST terminal, you need to install a

speciﬁed MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for

Windows). You can download this driver from the XG

Library on the Yamaha Web site:

http://www.yamaha-xg.com

• Yo u ’ll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such

as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform.

• When connecting the PF-1000 to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn

off the power to both the PF-1000 and the computer before con-

necting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After

making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of

the computer ﬁrst, then that of the PF-1000.

• If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PF-1000, make

sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable is

left connected, the PF-1000 may not function properly.

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” “PC-2,” or

“Mac,” you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connec-

tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI con-

nectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is

set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO

HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST ter-

minal.

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

PF-1000

144

Using the TO HOST terminal

Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-

232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST

terminal of the PF-1000. For the connection cable, use the

appropriate cable below (sold separately) that matches

the personal computer type.

■ IBM-PC/AT (Windows)

Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the

TO HOST terminal on the PF-1000 using a serial cable

(D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PF-

1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2.” (Data

transfer rate is 38,400 bps.)

■ Macintosh

Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the

computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PF-1000

using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set

the PF-1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “MAC” (Data

transfer rate is 31,250 bps).

Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are

using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owner’s

manual for the particular software you are using.

Using the MIDI terminals

When using a MIDI interface device installed in the

personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the

personal computer and the PF-1000 with standard MIDI

cables.

• When the computer has a MIDI interface installed,

connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal

computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST

SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

• When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series

computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the

computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI

interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the

MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PF-1000,

as shown in the diagram below.

Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the

TO HOST terminal is disabled.

• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the

MIDI interface clock setting in the application

software to match the setting of the MIDI interface

you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s

manual for the particular software you are using.

If your system does not work properly with the connections and set-

tings listed above, your software may require different settings.

Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT

switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1”

is 31,250 bps.)

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

MINI DIN

8-pin

D-sub

9-pin

MINI DIN

8-pin

D-sub

25-pin

D-sub

9-pin

PF-1000

HOST SELECT

MIDI PC-2 MacPC-1

* When using a D-SUB 25P

→ MINI DIN 8P cross

cable, connect using a D-

SUB9P plug adaptor on

the computer side of the

cable.

MINI DIN

8-pin

MINI DIN

8-pin

PF-1000

HOST SELECT

MIDI PC-2 MacPC-1

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

PF-1000

HOST SELECT

MIDI PC-2 MacPC-1

MIDI IN

RS422

MIDI OUT

MINI DIN

8-pin

PF-1000

HOST SELECT

MIDI PC-2 MacPC-1

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

145

PF-1000

Using the USB terminal on your computer

with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96/

UX16, etc.)

Connect the UX256/UX96/UX16 and the computer with a

USB cable. Install the included UX256/UX96/UX16 driver

to the computer, and connect the UX256/UX96/UX16 to

the PF-1000 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT

switch on the PF-1000 to “MIDI.” For details, refer to the

owner’s manual of the UX256/UX96/UX16.

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer

and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant

owner’s manuals.

What’s MIDI?

Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as

representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you

strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and

plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string

and the note sounds.

But how does a digital instrument go about playing a

note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note)

stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is

played based on information received from the keyboard,

and output through the speakers.

Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a

recording. When you playback a music CD (for example,

a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound

(vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called

audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.

In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the

pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as

audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play

back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the

actual piano performance. The piano itself is not

necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds

of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.

Personal computer

MIDI IN

USB

cable

MIDI OUT

USB interface

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

PF-1000

HOST SELECT

MIDI PC-2 MacPC-1

MIDI

IN OUT

Internal ampInternal amp

Tone generator

(Electric circuit)

Playing

the keyboard

Pluck a string and the body

resonates the sound.

Based on playing information

from the keyboard, a

sampled note stored in the

tone generator is played

through the speakers.

Acoustic guitar note

production

Digital instrument note

production

Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic

instrument (audio data)

Recording Playback

Tone generator

Sequencer

Recording and playing back the performance of a digital

instrument (MIDI data)

Controller (keyboard, etc.)

Recording Playback

In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent

through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument.

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

PF-1000

146

The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration

above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic

example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard

is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In

order to record the audio performance on an acoustic

piano, special recording equipment is needed. However,

since the PF-1000 features a built-in sequencer that lets

you record performance data, this recording equipment is

unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument — the PF-

1000 — allows you to both record and play back the data.

However, we also need a sound source to produce the

audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The

tone generator of the PF-1000 ﬁlls this function. The

recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer,

playing back the song data, using a tone generator

capable of accurately producing various instrument

sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another

way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator

is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays

the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data

and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our

piano performance played by another instrument, such as

guitar or violin.

Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets

recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the

sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note

using the grand piano sound on the PF-1000 keyboard.

Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated

note, the electronic instrument puts out information from

the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which

key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and

“when was it released.” Then each piece of information is

changed into a number value and sent to the tone

generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone

generator plays the stored sampled note.

■ Example Keyboard Data

Panel operations on the PF-1000, such as playing the

keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored

as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs

also consist of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument

Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical

instruments to communicate with each other, by sending

and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program

Change and various other types of MIDI data, or

messages.

The PF-1000 can control a MIDI device by transmitting

note related data and various types of controller data.The

PF-1000 can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages

which automatically determine the tone generator mode,

select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change

parameter values and of course play the voices speciﬁed

for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel

messages and System messages.

■ Channel Messages

The PF-1000 is an electronic instrument that can handle

16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO HOST

terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16

instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit

information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for

each of the 16 channels.

Tone generator

Sequencer

Keyboard performance

(MIDI data)

Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PF-1000 can be

thought of as containing several electronic components: a control-

ler, a tone generator, and a sequencer.

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed)

and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed numerically

(quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Message Name PF-1000 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the

keyboard is played. Each message includes

a speciﬁc note number which corresponds to

the key which is pressed, plus a velocity

value based on how hard the key is played.

Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select

MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.

MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:

• The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI

songs to ﬂoppy disk.

• The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of

changing voices and transforming the data.

The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI

data.

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

147

PF-1000

MIDI channels

MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen

MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the

performance data for sixteen different instrument parts

can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV

station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc

channel.Your home TV set receives many different

programs simultaneously from several TV stations and

you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired

program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The

transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc

MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single

MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving

instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel)

matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument

will sound according to the data sent by the

transmitting instrument.

For example, several tracks (channels) can be

transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as

shown below).

Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PF-1000 to an

external sequencer

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data

is to be sent over which MIDI channel when

transmitting MIDI data (page 135). The PF-1000 also

allows you to determine how the received data is

played back. (page 136).

■ System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI

system. System messages include messages like Exclusive

Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument

manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the

MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the PF-1000 are

shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI

Implementation Chart in the separate Data List.

What You Can Do With MIDI

The following MIDI settings can be made on the PF-

1000:

• MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various

applications) (page 134)

• Transmit (page 135)

• Receive (page 136)

• Local Control (page 134)

• Clock (page 135)

■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the

PF-1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a external

sequencer (such as a personal computer). After

recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play

it again on the PF-1000 (playback).

When you want to use the PF-1000 as an XG-compatible

multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI

channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI Receive (page 136).

■ Play and control the PF-1000 from a separate

keyboard

Weather Report

News

MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

The PF-1000’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also

connected by MIDI (page 134).

MIDI cable or

serial cable

PF-1000 track (channnel)

MAIN

LAYER

LEFT

STYLE instrument

External sequencer

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Message Name PF-1000 Operation/Panel Setting

System Exclusive

Message

Effect type settings (Mixing Console),

etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation

Personal cumputer,

QY series etc.

MIDI receive

MIDI transmit

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

PF-1000

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI receive

PF-1000

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

PF-1000

148

Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data

compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can

playback the data recorded by PF-1000, and whether or

not the PF-1000 can playback commercially available

song data or song data created for other instruments or on

a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data

characteristics, you may be able to play back the data

without any problem, or you may have to perform some

special operations before the data can be played back. If

you run into problems playing back data, please refer to

the information below.

Disk format

Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used

with various devices, including computers. Different

devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it

is necessary to ﬁrst conﬁgure the ﬂoppy disk to the system

of the device being used.This operation is called

“formatting.”

• There are two types of ﬂoppy disks: MF2DD (double

sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided,

high density), and each type has different formatting

systems.

• PF-1000 can record and playback with both types of

ﬂoppy disks.

• When formatted by the PF-1000, a 2DD disk stores up

to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to1.44

MB (megabytes). (The ﬁgures “720 KB” and “1.44MB”

indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used

to indicate the format type of disk.)

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be

used is compatible with the format of the disk.

Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence

format.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of

the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PF-1000 is

compatible with the following formats.

■ SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two

types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are

compatible with Format 0, and most commercially

available software is recorded as Format 0.

• The PF-1000 is compatible with both Format 0 and

Format 1.

• Song data recorded on the PF-1000 is automatically

recorded as SMF Format 0.

• Song data loaded to the PF-1000 is automatically

saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original

format.

■ ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PF-1000 series

instruments.This is a common format used with various

Yamaha software.

■ XF

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI

File) format with greater functionality and open-ended

expandability for the future.

• The PF-1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an

XF ﬁle containing lyric data is played.

■ Style File

The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle

format which uses a unique conversion system to provide

high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide

range of chord types.

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices

149

PF-1000

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice

allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback.

The PF-1000 is compatible with the following formats.

■ GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System

Level1, as is most commercially available software.

■ XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1

format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to

provide more voices and variations, as well as greater

expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure

compatibility of data well into the future.

• Song data recorded on the PF-1000 using voices in the

[XG] category is XG-compatible.

■ DOC

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PF-1000 series

instruments.This is also a common format used with

various Yamaha software.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,

the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the

speciﬁcations of the devices and particular data recording

methods.

PF-1000

150

Assembling the Keyboard Stand

You can use the PF-1000 without installing the stand.

However, if you wish to attach the stand to the PF-1000,

follow the steps below.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts. Make sure that you

install all parts in the correct orientation. Assemble

the stand in accordance with the steps below.

• At least two persons should assemble the stand

together.

• Be sure to use the correct-size screws, as indicated

below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damages

to the stand.

• When you attach each part, be sure to tighten all

screws.

• Reverse the assembly procedure to disassemble the

stand.

Keyboard

Remove the following parts from the package.

Screws

Attaching the front legs to the stand.

Attaching the rear legs to the stand.

Attaching the plate.

Use the included wrench.

Plate

Stand

Front left leg Front right leg

Rear left leg Rear right leg

Pedal unit

AC power cord

Long screws (6x65mm) x 8

Short screws (6x20mm) x 8

Cap bolts x 4

Cord holders x 2

Wrench x 1

1 Place the stand on the ﬂoor so that

the bottom side (with smaller

holes) faces up.

4 Attach the front left leg in the same way.

2 Use a short screw to attach

the bracket of the front right

leg to the bottom side of

the stand.

3 Use two long screws to ﬁx

the bracket of the front right

leg to the front side of the

stand.

1 Use a short screw to attach

the bracket of the rear left leg

to the bottom side of the

stand.

2 Use two long screws to ﬁx the

bracket of the rear left leg to

the rear side of the stand.

3 Attach the rear right leg in

the same way.

Align the holes on the plate

with the holes of the rear side

of the bracket on the rear legs,

then ﬁx them using four short

screws.

Assembling the Keyboard Stand

151

PF-1000

Raising the stand to the standing position.

Mounting the keyboard.

Fixing the keyboard.

Connecting the pedal unit.

Set the voltage selector and connect the power

cord to the AC INLET on the keyboard.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the

voltage selector (provided in some locations). To set the selector for

110V, 130V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a "minus" screwdriver

to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region

appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set

at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power

cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may also

be provided in some areas to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC

wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the PF-

1000 or result in improper operation.

After completing the assembly, please check the

following.

• Are any parts left over?

• Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the PF-1000 clear of doors and other movable ﬁx-

tures?

• Move the PF-1000 to an appropriate location.

• Does the PF-1000 make a rattling noise when you

shake it?

• Tighten all screws.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into

the sockets?

• Check the connections.

• If the keyboard stand creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play the keyboard, refer to the assembly

diagrams and retighten all screws.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers or drop the

keyboard.

CAUTION

Do not hold any part of the keyboard other than four

corners as shown in the illustration.

Use the front legs as

support to raise the

stand.

Be sure to hold the four corners of the

keyboard.

Mount the keyboard so that the rubber feet

on the bottom of the keyboard fall into the

holes on the stand.

Attach the cap bolts on the

bottom of the stand and tighten

them with your hand to ﬁx the

keyboard.

PEDAL

2 Connect the pedal cord plug

into the PEDAL jack on the left

side of the keyboard, with the

arrow on the plug facing up.

3 Attach the cord holders in the position shown in the

illustration, and clip the pedal cord to the holders.

* You can also clip the power cord to the cord holders.

1 Place the pedal unit in front of the rear legs.

AC INL ET

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

PF-1000

152

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

• The PF-1000 does not turn on; there is no

power.

Make sure that the PF-1000 has been plugged in properly. Securely insert the

female plug into the AC socket on the PF-1000, and the male plug into a proper

AC outlet (page 16).

• A click or pop is heard when the power is

turned on or off.

This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument.

• Noise is heard from the PF-1000’s speakers. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PF-1000 may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from

the PF-1000.

• The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature;

try adjusting the contrast (page 17).

• The keyboard volume is low compared to that

of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback.

The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard

part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower

the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 61).

• The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or

song playback is low compared to that of the

keyboard.

The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set

too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display

(page 117).

• The overall volume is low, or no sound is

heard.

• The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the

[MASTER VOLUME] dial.

• The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of

MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 61).

• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 61, 76).

• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. (This happens

when the speaker setting is set to “HEADPHONE SW”; page 138.) Unplug the

headphones.

• Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 138).

• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 134).

• The damper, sostenuto and soft functions do

not work for the relevant pedals.

Each pedal has been assigned to a different function. Make sure that each pedal

is properly assigned to SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, and SOFT (page 128).

• The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound

continuously sustains even when the damper

pedal is not pressed.

The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely

insert the pedal plug into the proper jack (page 150 - 151).

• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PF-1000. When this

happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played

notes sound. See page 154 for information on the maximum polyphony.

• Accompaniment style or Song playback does

not start.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”

(page 135).

• Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an

accompaniment style, press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button

(page 61); to playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button

(page 74).

•“New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an

appropriate song in the SONG display (page 74).

• The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the

beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 76).

• Only the rhythm channel plays.

Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button.

• The accompaniment style does not start,

even when Synchro Start is in standby

condition and a key is pressed.

You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand

range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment)

range of the keyboard.

• The desired chord is not recognized or output

by the auto accompaniment.

• You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord

Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 63).

• You may be playing the keys according to a different ﬁngering mode, and not

the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the

keys according to the selected mode (page 62).

Troubleshooting

153

PF-1000

• Auto accompaniment chords are recognized

regardless of the split point or where chords

are played on the keyboard.

This is normal if the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.”

If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the

keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different

ﬁngering mode (page 62).

• Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,”

changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as

the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 124).

• Some channels do not properly play back

when playing back song data.

Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 76).

• The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard ﬁngering

modes. Select an appropriate ﬁngering mode (page 62).

• The microphone input signal cannot be

recorded.

This is normal; recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible.

• MIDI data is not transmitted or received via

the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables

are connected properly.

Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI” (page 144). The MIDI

terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings.

• When a voice is changed, the previously

selected effect is changed.

Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled

when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 132).

• There is a slight difference in sound quality

between notes played on the keyboard.

• Some voices have a looping sound.

• Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher

pitches, depending upon the voice.

This is normal and is a result of the PF-1000’s sampling system.

• Some voices will jump an octave in pitch

when played in the upper or lower registers.

This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this

type of pitch shift.

• Even though a Registration Memory setting

containing a User voice is selected, the Open/

Save display shows a Preset voice.

This is normal; even with the Preset voice shown, the actual sounding voice is

the selected User voice. When a User voice is registered to the User drive or

ﬂoppy disk, the actual registered is: 1) the source Preset voice, and 2) the

parameter settings as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registration

Memory setting containing a User voice, the PF-1000 selects the Preset voice

(on which the User voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings

to it — so that your original User voice is sounded.

• Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1

megabyte of data to a ﬂoppy disk.

• The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or

Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display

(page 118).

• The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings

are appropriate.

• This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects,

especially distortion-type effects (page 119).

• Some ﬁlter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 88)

can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary.

• A strange “ﬂanging” or “doubling” sound

occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different

each time the keys are played.

Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the

same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 56) or change the voice for each

part (page 54).

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

PF-1000

154

Speciﬁcations

: available

PF-1000

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Display 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD

Keyboard 88 keys (A-1 - C7)

Voice Polyphony (max) 96

Voice Selection 308 voices + 480 XG voices + 16 Drum Kits

Regular Voice 287

Sweet Voice 8

Cool Voice 2

Live Voice 1

Natural Voice 21

Sound creator

Effects

Effect Blocks

Reverb 2

Chorus 2

DSP 2

Brilliance 1

Effect Types

REVERB1 28+3 User

REVERB2 5

CHORUS1 21+3 User

CHORUS2 3

DSP1 101+3 User

DSP2 12

Brilliance 5

Accompaniment

Style

Accompaniment Styles 194

Session Styles 12

Pianist Styles 36

Piano Combo Styles 17

Fingering Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,

Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Style Creator

OTS (One Touch Setting) Accompaniment Style

OTS link

Music Finder Approximately 2500 records

Edit

Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ

Preset Songs

Lyrics

Score

Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing

Record Channels 16

Memory

Device

Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD)

Flash Memory (internal) 1MB

Flash Availability Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc.

Tempo Tempo Range 5 - 500

Tap Tempo

Metronome

Sound Bell on/off, Human Voices (5 languages)

Specifications

155

PF-1000

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not

be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Registration

Memory

Buttons 8

Regist Sequence

Freeze

Others Demo Function, Voice, Style

Language 6 languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian)

Help

Direct Access

Piano setting button (including Piano Lock)

Master Volume

Fade In/Out

Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master

Tuning

Tuning Curve Flat/Stretch (Natural Piano Voice only)

Scale Equal Temperament, Pure Major/Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean Tone,

Werckmeister/Kirnberger, Arabic 1/2

Touch Response 5 level

Jacks/Connectors PHONES ✕ 2, MIDI (THRU, OUT, IN), TO HOST,

HOST SELECT, AUX PEDAL, AUX IN (L/L+R),

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), AUX OUT (L/L+R)

MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC/LINE IN),VIDEO OUT

Pedals Number of Pedals 3

Pedal Functions VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO,

PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, VIBROTOR ON/OFF,

SONG START/STOP, STYLE START/STOP, etc.

Ampliﬁers/

Speakers

Ampliﬁers 30 W ✕ 2

Speakers (16 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2

Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H]

(without music rest, pedal unit)

main unit 1430 ✕ 507 ✕ 165 mm [56-5/16" ✕ 19-15/16" ✕ 6-1/2"]

main unit with

keyboard stand

1430 ✕ 507 ✕ 782 mm [56-5/16" ✕ 19-15/16" ✕ 30-7/8"]

Weight

(without music rest, pedal unit)

main unit 31 Kg [68 lbs., 5 oz]

main unit with

keyboard stand

43 Kg [94 lbs., 13 oz]

PF-1000

156

Index

Numerics

1 - 16 ................................................................................. 103

[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 18, 38–45

[A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 18, 40

[AC INLET].....................................................................16, 19

Accessories ............................................................................ 6

Accompaniment style parts................................................... 92

[ACMP] button ...............................................................18, 60

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 116

Adjusting the display contrast...............................................17

Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 119

Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 50

Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 61

Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels...76

Adjusting values ...................................................................46

AI .........................................................................................62

AI FINGERED .......................................................................62

AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 62

Append ................................................................................ 71

Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 57

Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style.................... 67

Arabic ................................................................................ 125

Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 64

Assembling an Accompaniment Style.................................110

Assembling the keyboard stand .......................................... 150

ATTACK ...............................................................................88

AUTO .................................................................................. 20

Auto Revoice...................................................................... 117

[AUTO FILLIN] button.................................................... 18, 66

Automatically Changing One Touch Settings

with the Sections............................................................... 68

AUX IN [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................ 19, 142

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 142

AUX OUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks........................................ 19, 142

[AUX PEDAL] jack........................................................ 19, 143

[BACK] button..........................................................18, 40, 46

[BALANCE] button ......................................................... 18, 61

Bar Clear ............................................................................113

Bar Copy ............................................................................113

Base note ........................................................................... 124

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 38

Bass...................................................................................... 92

BEAT ..............................................................................70, 71

[BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 64

BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 88

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music ................................69

Cent ................................................................................... 124

Change the Rhythmic Feel.................................................. 111

Changing Pitch-related Settings .......................................... 118

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings .......... 132

Changing the Icon ................................................................46

Changing the Tone of the Voice ......................................... 118

Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose ...................130

Channel ................................................. 61, 76, 100, 113, 126

Channel Messages..............................................................146

Channel Muting....................................................................61

[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................18, 61, 76

Channel Transpose .............................................................102

CHD...................................................................................104

Chord ...................................................................................92

Chord Detect ......................................................................136

Chord Events.......................................................................104

Chord Fingering............................................................62, 128

Chord Tutor ........................................................................128

Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode....................63

Chorus................................................................................121

Clock..................................................................................135

COMMON ...........................................................................87

Compatible Song Types ........................................................73

CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................137

CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................138

Connect the power cord .......................................................16

Connecting Audio & Video Devices....................................142

Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................143

Connecting the Microphone or Guitar ................................141

Connecting to a Computer..................................................143

Controller ...........................................................................128

Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) ............................45

Cool! ....................................................................................55

COPY ...................................................................................43

Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................139

Copying Files/Folders............................................................43

Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................139

Creating Accompaniment Styles..........................................106

Current Memory ...................................................................39

Customizing the Event List — Filter.....................................105

CUT......................................................................................42

Damper pedal.................................................................19, 58

Data Compatibility..............................................................148

[DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................18, 46

Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........135

DECAY .................................................................................88

DELETE.................................................................................43

Delete.................................................................................101

DELETE RECORD..................................................................71

Deleting Files/Folders............................................................43

[DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 52

DEPTH..................................................................................88

Detailed Settings for Notation ...............................................79

[DIGITAL RECORDING] button........................14, 18, 90, 106

[DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................18, 47

Direct Access Chart ..............................................................48

Disk....................................................................................139

Disk format.........................................................................148

Disk Orchestra Collection.....................................................19

Displaying Music Notation ...................................................78

Displaying the Lyrics.............................................................81

Displaying Upper Level pages...............................................44

DOC...................................................................................149

Drum....................................................................................55

[DSP] button...........................................................18, 57, 121

Dynamics ...........................................................................112

ECHO...........................................................................58, 132

Index

157

PF-1000

EDIT...................................................................................109

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style...............................111

Editing a Recorded Song..................................................... 100

Editing Channel-related Parameters .................................... 100

Editing Chord Events .......................................................... 104

Editing Note Events ............................................................ 103

Editing Records .................................................................... 71

Editing System Events ......................................................... 104

Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 113

Editing Voices ...................................................................... 85

EFFECT.................................................................................89

Effect Block ........................................................................ 120

Effect Structure ................................................................... 121

Effects................................................................................. 119

EG........................................................................................88

Embellish and enhance your melodies

— with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29

END Mark ............................................................................98

ENDING .............................................................................. 66

[ENDING / rit.] button..............................................18, 30, 65

[ENTER] button .............................................................. 18, 46

Entering Characters............................................................... 45

Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ...........................97

Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)............................45

Entering numbers ................................................................. 45

Entering special character marks

(umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) ......................... 45

Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 140

Equal Temperament............................................................ 125

ESEQ ..................................................................................148

Example Keyboard Data .....................................................146

[EXIT] button ..................................................................18, 40

exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 40

[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button....................................18, 77

Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time ...........137

[FADE IN / OUT] button................................................. 18, 65

FAVORITE............................................................................71

[FF] button ..................................................................... 18, 76

File.......................................................................................39

File/Folder-related Operations .............................................. 41

Files/folders in a floppy disk ................................................. 42

Fill........................................................................................ 66

Filter..................................................................... 88, 105, 118

FINGERED ........................................................................... 62

FINGERED ON BASS............................................................ 62

First Key On ......................................................................... 99

FLOPPY DISK drive .............................................................. 39

Floppy disk drive..............................................................18, 6

Foot Controller .............................................................58, 143

Footswitch.................................................................... 58, 143

Formatting a Disk ...............................................................139

[FREEZE] button...................................................... 19, 84, 131

FULL KEYBOARD................................................................. 62

[FUNCTION] button .................................................... 18, 122

Gate Time ............................................................................ 95

GENRE ...........................................................................70, 72

GENRE NAME......................................................................72

GM System Level 1....................................................... 19, 149

Groove...............................................................................111

Groove parameters.............................................................111

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........6

Harmonic Content ................................................................88

HARMONY ............................................................58, 89, 132

Harmony Assignments ........................................................133

Harmony Types ..................................................................133

[HARMONY / ECHO] button..........................................18, 58

Headphones .................................................................17, 141

Help messages can be displayed in any one of the

following languages...........................................................49

[HELP] button .................................................................18, 49

High Key.............................................................................115

[HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 143

Hz ......................................................................................124

ICON SELECT .......................................................................46

[INPUT VOLUME] knob ...............................................19, 141

Inputting and Editing Lyrics.................................................105

Instant Selection of Displays .................................................47

INTRO..................................................................................66

[INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 64

KEY SIGNATURE ..................................................................79

Keyboard Percussion.............................................................55

Keyboard stand (assembly)..................................................150

Keyboard Touch .................................................................130

Keyboard/Panel...................................................................130

KEYWORD .....................................................................70, 71

Kirnberger...........................................................................125

Layer.....................................................................................56

Layering Two Different Voices..............................................56

LCD......................................................................................15

[LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................18, 17

Left .......................................................................................57

LEFT CH. ..............................................................................79

[LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................18, 58

Left pedal........................................................................19, 58

Live! .....................................................................................55

Local Control......................................................................134

Loop recording ...................................................................106

Lyrics............................................................................81, 105

MAIN A/B/C/D......................................................................64

MAIN [A] button.............................................................18, 64

MAIN [B] button.............................................................18, 64

MAIN [C] button.............................................................18, 64

MAIN [D] button ............................................................18, 64

Maintaining Panel Settings..................................................131

Making Global and Other Important Settings ......................122

Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)

....134

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,

Parameter Lock, and Tap.................................................137

Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System,

and Voice Number Indication .........................................138

Making Settings for the Pedals.............................................128

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard......................128

Making Style File Format Settings........................................114

Master Tune........................................................................124

[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................18, 17

Mean-Tone .........................................................................125

Index

PF-1000

158

Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 95

[MEMORY] button.......................................................... 19, 82

Message Switch..................................................................135

Messages................................................................................8

Metronome ........................................................................ 137

METRONOME [START / STOP] button...........................18, 50

[MIC LINE] switch ........................................................19, 141

[MIC / LINE IN] jack.....................................................19, 141

MIDI .................................................................................. 134

MIDI [THRU] [OUT] [IN] terminals.............................. 19, 143

MIDI channels.................................................................... 147

MIDI IN.............................................................................. 143

MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 143

MIDI Receive Parts.............................................................136

MIDI SET UP ......................................................................140

MIDI terminals ................................................................... 143

MIDI THRU........................................................................ 143

Mix .................................................................................... 101

[MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 116

[MONO] button .............................................................18, 58

Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 42

MULTI FINGER .................................................................... 62

Multi Recording ................................................................... 92

[MUSIC FINDER] button .................................... 15, 18, 33, 69

Music Finder Record Edit ..................................................... 71

Music Finder Search.............................................................70

Music rest............................................................................. 16

Muting Specific Parts............................................................77

NAME .................................................................................. 41

Naming Files/Folders............................................................41

Natural Voices ..................................................................... 86

Natural!................................................................................ 55

NEW (FOLDER)....................................................................44

NEW RECORD.....................................................................72

[NEXT] button .......................................................... 18, 40, 46

Normal................................................................................. 99

Note Events ........................................................................103

Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)................. 143

Note Limit ..........................................................................115

NOTE NAME........................................................................ 80

NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ...........................................114

NTT (Note Transposition Table).......................................... 115

OCTAVE ............................................................................ 118

One Touch Setting ............................................................... 32

ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons .................. 19, 67, 68

One-touch Piano Play .......................................................... 55

[ON / OFF] button (POWER) .......................................... 19, 17

Open/Save displays ..............................................................38

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder .......................... 44

Other Parameters in the Basic Display................................ 109

Other Playback-related Operations....................................... 76

Other Settings..................................................................... 137

[OTS LINK] button.......................................................... 18, 68

Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in

speakers of the PF-1000 ..................................................142

Overdub recording.............................................................106

Owner................................................................................ 140

Pad....................................................................................... 92

Parameter...........................................................................114

Parameter Lock................................................................... 138

PASTE.............................................................................42, 43

Pedal ..................................................................................128

Pedal (Center) .......................................................................58

Pedal (Left)............................................................................58

Pedal (Right) .........................................................................58

[PEDAL] jack ........................................................................19

Pedal unit .............................................................................16

Pedal-controllable Functions...............................................129

[PHONES] jacks............................................................19, 141

Phrase...................................................................................92

Phrase Mark..................................................................76, 126

[PIANO] button ........................................................15, 19, 55

PIANO (SOUND CREATOR).................................................87

Piano Lock function..............................................................55

PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................118

Pitch settings for each scale ................................................125

Playback of Songs.................................................................21

Playing a style.................................................................28, 59

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only................................61

Playing Along with the PF-1000............................................36

Playing and Practicing with the Songs...................................36

Playing Back Songs on Disk..................................................76

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands.........27

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing

accompaniment sections ...................................................66

Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously.................................56

Playing Styles........................................................................28

Playing the Demos..........................................................20, 52

Playing the Internal Songs.....................................................74

Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external

audio system, and recording the sounds to an external

recorder...........................................................................142

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously......................................26

Playing Voices ......................................................................25

PORTAMENTO TIME..........................................................118

PRESET drive.........................................................................39

Preset MIDI Templates........................................................134

Punch In/Out ........................................................................99

Pure Major..........................................................................125

Pure Minor..........................................................................125

Pythagorean........................................................................125

QUANTIZE...........................................................................79

Quantize.....................................................................100, 113

Quantize Size .....................................................................100

Quick Recording...................................................................91

Quick Start..........................................................................126

Realtime Recording.............................................................108

Realtime Recording Characteristics.....................................106

[REC] button ...................................................................18, 90

Rec Mode .............................................................................99

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup.................................84

Recalling the Registered Settings...........................................84

Receive...............................................................................136

Receive Transpose ..............................................................135

Receiving MIDI Data ..........................................................136

record...................................................................................69

Recording .............................................................................37

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment ......97

Recording Individual Notes...................................................94

Recording Melodies..............................................................96

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs................90

Registering Panel Setups .......................................................82

Index

159

PF-1000

Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ............68

REGISTRATION BANK.........................................................83

REGISTRATION EDIT display...............................................83

Registration Memory ............................................................ 82

REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons...................19, 82

Registration Sequence ........................................................ 131

Regular Voices ..................................................................... 86

RELEASE...............................................................................88

Remove Event .................................................................... 113

Repeat Playback of a Specific Range .................................... 77

[REPEAT] button.............................................................18, 77

Replace ................................................................................71

Resonance............................................................................ 88

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

of the PF-1000 ................................................................ 140

[REVERB] button............................................................. 18, 57

Reverb................................................................................ 121

[REW] button ................................................................. 18, 76

Rhythm ................................................................................ 92

RIGHT CH. .......................................................................... 79

Root ................................................................................... 136

RTR (Retrigger Rule) ........................................................... 115

SAVE ....................................................................................44

Save ............................................................................... 38, 44

Saving Files .......................................................................... 44

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.............................. 83

Scale .................................................................................. 125

Scale Tune ......................................................................... 124

Score....................................................................................78

Searching the Ideal Setups....................................................70

Searching the Music Finder Records.....................................34

Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN],

[ENDING] buttons ............................................................ 64

sections ................................................................................30

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/

Out ...................................................................................99

Selecting a Scale ................................................................ 124

Selecting a Voice.................................................................. 54

Selecting Files and Folders ................................................... 40

Selecting Intro and Ending Types..........................................66

Selecting items ..................................................................... 46

Selecting the Freeze Settings................................................. 84

Sequence Format................................................................ 148

sequencer........................................................................... 146

Set Up ................................................................................102

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters ............... 127

Setting Chord Channels ......................................................136

Setting Harmony and Echo .................................................132

Setting Root Note Channels................................................136

Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections

of the Keyboard ................................................................ 57

Setting Song-related Parameters.......................................... 126

Setting the Fingering Method..............................................128

Setting the Level Balance and Voice...................................117

Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................................... 134

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ... 131

Setting the volume................................................................ 17

SFX....................................................................................... 55

Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV ....................... 133, 142

Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style....75

SINGLE FINGER ...................................................................62

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................................................... 148

Song...............................................................................14, 73

SONG [START / STOP] button........................................ 18, 74

SONG AUTO REVOICE ..................................................... 117

Song Book ......................................................................22, 73

Song Creator.........................................................................90

Song Playback ..........................................................21, 73, 74

Song Recording.....................................................................90

Song Settings.......................................................................126

Sostenuto pedal ..............................................................19, 58

SOUND (SOUND CREATOR)...............................................87

SOUND CREATOR Parameters.............................................86

[SOUND CREATOR] button ...........................................18, 85

Source Root/Chord..............................................................114

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory

Presets.............................................................................131

SPEED...................................................................................88

Split Point ...........................................................................127

Step Record ..........................................................................94

Step Record (Chord)..............................................................97

Step Record (Note)................................................................96

Step Recording....................................................................109

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys................65

Style................................................................................14, 59

STYLE buttons...........................................................18, 28, 59

STYLE CONTROL [START / STOP] button.................18, 28, 60

Style Creator .......................................................................106

Style File.......................................................................19, 148

Style File Format .................................................................107

Style Sections........................................................................30

Style Setting ........................................................................127

sustain ..................................................................................88

Sweet!...................................................................................55

[SYNC.START] button.....................................................18, 60

[SYNC.STOP] button.......................................................18, 65

SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)..................................................104

System ................................................................................134

System Events .....................................................................104

System Messages.................................................................147

System Reset.......................................................................140

SYSTEM SET UP..................................................................140

Tap Count...........................................................................138

[TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................18, 51

TEMPO [–] [+] buttons....................................................18, 50

TEMPO FROM......................................................................70

Tempo Indications — MAIN Display ....................................51

TEMPO TO...........................................................................70

[TO HOST] terminal .......................................15, 19, 143, 144

[TOP] button...................................................................18, 76

[TRACK 1 (R)] button ......................................................18, 77

[TRACK 2 (L)] button.......................................................18, 77

Transmit..............................................................................135

Transmit Clock....................................................................135

Transmitting MIDI Data ......................................................135

TRANSPOSE [–] [+] buttons ..........................................18, 130

Transpose Assign ................................................................130

Tune ...................................................................................118

TUNING.............................................................................118

Tuning the Overall Pitch.....................................................124

UP ........................................................................................44

USER drive............................................................................39

USER EFFECT..............................................................120, 140

Using the USB terminal on your computer

with a USB/MIDI interface...............................................145

Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices ............................141

Utility .................................................................................137

Index

PF-1000

160

[VARIATION] button......................................................18, 57

Velocity........................................................................ 95, 112

Velocity Change.................................................................113

VIBRATO ............................................................................. 88

[VIDEO OUT] jack...............................................19, 133, 142

Voice Allocation Format..................................................... 149

VOICE buttons ......................................................... 15, 19, 54

Voice Characteristics............................................................55

Voice Effects......................................................................... 57

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button ......................... 18, 56

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button ............................18, 56

Voice Set............................................................................132

Volume/Voice .................................................................... 117

Werckmeister ..................................................................... 125

What You Can Do With MIDI ............................................ 147

What’s MIDI? ..................................................................... 145

XF ................................................................................ 19, 148

XG ............................................................................... 19, 149

161

PF-1000

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-

ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your

dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instruc-

tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.

For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the

Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem

persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet

replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-

ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire

size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations

that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for

enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that

unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool,

spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected

when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical

storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualiﬁed service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-

ing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss.

DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level

or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory

mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the product

or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are

stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

PF-1000

162

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

(polarity)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music

Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada

Musique Ltée.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-

ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-

tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-

minal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH

WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-

TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE

LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA

PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

163

PF-1000

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panamá S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Professionnelle

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain

Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: 971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0661

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victo-

ria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2445

SY23

DIC 338

Yamaha Web Site (English only)

www.yamahasynth.com

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

2002 Yamaha Corporation

V939640 205APAP1.3-01A0 Printed in Japan

This document is printed on recycled chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate

on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of

the main keyboard unit. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The

voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a

"minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the

pointer on the panel.

Before using the PF-1000, be sure to read “ Precautions„ on pages 3-4.

Owner's Manual

Transcripción de documentos

Owner's Manual Yamaha Web Site (English only) www.yamahasynth.com Before using the PF-1000, be sure to read “Precautions„ on pages 3-4. IMPORTANT Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ This document is printed on recycled chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink. Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation C 2002 Yamaha Corporation V939640 205APAP1.3-01A0 Printed in Japan DIC 338 Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. IIMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic prod- ucts are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. PF-1000 Model Serial No. Purchase Date ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 2 PF-1000 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The • • • • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Use only the supplied power cord/plug. Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter- is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, • • • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • • • • Assembling the keyboard stand • Read carefully this manual or the attached documentation extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the stand in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. (1)B-7 1/2 PF-1000 3 Connections Using the bench (If included) • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo- • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a • • Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving data Saving and backing up your data Handling caution • Current memory data (see page 39) is lost when you turn off the • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the • • • tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy disk/the User Drive (see page 39). Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a floppy disk. gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display. Backing up the floppy disk • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1)B-7 4 PF-1000 2/2 Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PF-1000 electronic piano! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the PF-1000. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference. Also, a separate Data List is provided. Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first. Quick Guide (page 20): This section explains how to use the basic functions. Basic Operation (page 38): This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls. Reference (page 52): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PF-1000’s various functions. Data List : Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. * The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. * The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English. * The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh co., Ltd. * Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Trademarks: • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. PF-1000 5 Accessories ■ “50 greats for the Piano” Disk (and Music Book) ■ Recording disk ■ Owner’s Manual ■ Data List ■ Pedal Unit ■ Bench (included or optional depending on locale) ■ Dust Cover ■ Music Rest ■ Keyboard Stand Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk Precautions Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Compatible Disk Type • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: • Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that data is not being written to the floppy disk. If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in the following operations, the messages “Now executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting” appears in the display. • Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data (page 42 - 44). • Naming files and folders (page 41); creating a new folder (page 44). • Copying a disk to an another disk (page 139); formatting the disk (page 139). Eject button Drive lamp When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. 6 PF-1000 • Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the data is being written to the floppy disk. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. • If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a halfpressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). write-protect tab open (protect position) Data backup Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks. • Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to Disk function on page 139. About the Floppy Disks To handle floppy disks with care: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. PF-1000 7 About the Display Messages A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button. You can select the desired language from the Help display (page 49). F G H I J 8 PF-1000 For this example, press the [G] (YES) button to execute formatting. Table of Contents Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION ................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 5 Accessories ............................................................... 6 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk..................................................... 6 About the Display Messages.................................... 8 Application Index ................................................... 12 What can you do with the PF-1000?...................... 14 Setting Up the PF-1000.......................................... 16 About the pedal unit ............................................................... 16 About the music rest ............................................................... 16 Turning the Power On and Off................................................ 16 Using headphones .................................................................. 17 Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18 Quick Guide Playing the Demos ................................................. 20 Song Playback ........................................................ 21 Help Messages........................................................ 49 Using the Metronome............................................ 50 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 50 Tap Tempo ............................................................. 51 Reference Playing the Demos .................52 Voices.....................................54 Selecting a Voice .................................................... 54 One-touch Piano Play.............................................. 55 Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously .................................................... 56 Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 56 Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard ..................... 57 Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 57 Using the Pedals..................................................... 58 Playback of Songs ....................................................21 Playing Voices ........................................................ 25 Playing a Voice ........................................................25 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands ...................................................27 Playing Styles ......................................................... 28 Playing a style ..........................................................28 Style Sections...........................................................30 One Touch Setting...................................................32 Music Finder........................................................... 33 Using the Music Finder ............................................33 Searching the Music Finder Records.........................34 Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data ...................35 Playing and Practicing with the Songs.................. 36 Styles......................................59 Playing a style ........................................................ 59 Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 61 Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 61 Chord Fingerings.................................................... 62 Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) ...................64 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 65 Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) ................................................ 66 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 66 Playing Along with the PF-1000 ...............................36 Recording ................................................................37 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING)......................................67 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data ....... 38 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link .............................. 68 Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING)........................... 68 Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 40 File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 41 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder.................................................... 69 Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search .... 70 Naming Files/Folders ...............................................41 Moving Files/Folders ................................................42 Copying Files/Folders...............................................43 Deleting Files/Folders...............................................43 Saving Files ..............................................................44 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............44 Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................44 Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................44 Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit ........... 71 Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 46 Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 47 PF-1000 9 Song Playback ....................... 73 Compatible Song Types ......................................... 73 Song Playback ........................................................ 74 Playing the Internal Songs........................................74 Playing Back Songs on Disk......................................76 Other Playback-related Operations...........................76 Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks............................ 77 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 77 Displaying Music Notation — Score ...................... 78 Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 81 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory ....... 82 Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory...................................... 82 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups .................83 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 84 Editing Voices — Sound Creator ................... 85 Operation ............................................................... 85 SOUND CREATOR Parameters ............................... 86 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator ..................... 90 About Song Recording........................................... 90 Quick Recording..................................................... 91 Multi Recording ..................................................... 92 Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 94 Operation ................................................................94 Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ..............96 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) ...............................97 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode............................ 99 Editing a Recorded Song ..................................... 100 Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel .....100 Editing Note Events — 1 - 16.................................103 Editing Chord Events — CHD.................................104 Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) .............................104 Inputting and Editing Lyrics ...................................105 Customizing the Event List — Filter........................105 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator .........106 About Creating Accompaniment Styles............... 106 Style File Format................................................... 107 Operation ............................................................. 107 Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 108 Step Recording..................................................... 109 Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly.. 110 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 111 Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics ................................... 111 Editing the Channel Data ...................................... 113 Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter ..... 114 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console ................116 Operation ............................................................. 116 Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice ............................................... 117 Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 118 Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 118 Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 119 Effect Structure ..................................................... 121 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function...........................122 Operation ............................................................. 122 Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune............................... 124 Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 124 Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune ............................. 124 Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings................................................ 126 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering......................................... 127 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 127 Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering... 128 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller...................................................... 128 Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 128 Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel ............................................. 130 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set..................................................... 131 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets — Registration Sequence.......... 131 Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .................... 131 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set.......................................... 132 10 PF-1000 Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 132 Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV — Video Out...................................................... 133 Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................... 134 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System.................134 Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................135 Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................136 Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................136 Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............136 Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 137 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............137 Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System, and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2........138 Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk ...................139 Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner............................................................140 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PF-1000 — System Reset ..........................140 Introduction Quick Guide Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data Playing the Demos Voices Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices................................. 141 Using the Headphones (PHONES jacks)..................141 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC/LINE IN jack)..............................................141 Connecting Audio & Video Devices .......................142 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (AUX PEDAL jack) ...............................................143 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals) .................................................143 Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................143 What’s MIDI? .........................................................145 What You Can Do With MIDI .................................147 Data Compatibility............................................... 148 Disk format ............................................................148 Sequence Format...................................................148 Voice Allocation Format .........................................149 Assembling the Keyboard Stand ................................... 150 Troubleshooting.................. 152 Styles Song Playback Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups - Registration Memory Editing Voices - Sound Creator Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs - Song Creator Creating Accompaniment Styles - Style Creator Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices - Mixing Console Making Global and Other Important Settings - Function Specifications ...................... 154 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices Index ................................... 156 Appendix PF-1000 11 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular application and situation. Listening Listening to the internal songs ................................................................................................................ page 74 Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 76 Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 52 Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 54 Listening to songs with the special voices of the PF-1000..................................................................... page 117 Playing Calling up the piano setting ................................................................................................................... page 55 Using the three performance control pedals........................................................................................... page 58 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 130 Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 56 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 57 Changing the sound Enhancing the sound with reverb and other effects .....................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 57 .................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 119 Adjusting the Level Balance ................................................................................................................. page 117 Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 56 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 57 Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 85 Playing the auto accompaniment Playing the accompaniment automatically ............................................................................................. page 59 Calling up ideal panel settings for your music ........................................................................................ page 69 Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part ................... “Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks” on page 77 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 50 Recording Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 91, 92 Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 94 Creating your original settings Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 85 Creating accompaniment styles............................................................................................................ page 106 12 PF-1000 Using a microphone Connecting the microphone............... ”Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC/LINE IN jack)” on page 141 Settings Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 82 Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 124 Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 122 Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 127 Making settings for the pedals ........... “Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller” on page 128 Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 130 Showing the display on a TV .......................“Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV — Video Out” on page 133 Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 134 Connecting the PF-1000 to other devices Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 145 Recording your performance...................”Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks)” on page 142 Raising the volume .................................”Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks)” on page 142 Outputting another instrument’s sound from the PF-1000 .............. ”Outputting the sound of an external device through the built in speakers of the PF-1000 (AUX IN jacks)” on page 142 Connecting a computer........... .”Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals)” on page 143 Assembling the keyboard stand Using the stand .......................................................................... “Assembling the Keyboard Stand” on page 150 Quick solution Basic functions of the PF-1000 and how you can best use it ...........................................................pages 12, 14 Resetting the PF-1000 to the default setting ............................ “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PF-1000 — System Reset” on page 140 Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 152 PF-1000 13 What can you do with the PF-1000? DEMO Explore the Demos (page 20, 52) These not only showcase the stunning voices and styles of the instrument, they introduce you to the various functions and features — and give you hands-on experience using the PF1000! SONG Playback previously recorded songs (page 21, 36, 73) Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs as well as songs on commercially available disks. LCD CONTRAST MENU DEMO A HELP B C FUNCTION D DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP AUTO FILL IN E REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG BREAK MIN MAX MASTER VOLUME 14 START/STOP METRONOME INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP D STYLE CONTROL PART SYNC.START TAP TEMPO RESET RESET TEMPO TRANSPOSE STYLE DIGITAL RECORDING Back up your performance with Auto Accompaniment (page 28, 59) Record your performances (page 90, 106) Playing a chord with your left hand automatically plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc. — and let the PF-1000 be your backing band! With the powerful and easy-to-use song recording features, you can record your own keyboard performances, and create your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions — which you can then save to the USER drive or a floppy disk for future recall. PF-1000 PART 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 LCD MUSIC FINDER PIANO The large LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easyto-understand control of the PF-1000’s operations. Call up the perfect accompaniment style (page 33, 69) Set up the piano — instantly (page 55) If you know what song you want to play, but you don’t know which style or voice would be right for it, let the Music Finder help you. Just select the song title, and the PF-1000 automatically calls up the most appropriate style and voice. You can call up all the optimum piano settings for the PF-1000 with just a single button press — then play the extraordinarily realistic grand piano voice. BACK F NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER G LEFT H I MUSIC FINDER J ENTER DATA ENTRY REVERB DSP VARIATION HARMONY/ ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD 1 VOICE EFFECT PIANO & HARPSI. ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG E.PIANO 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING PIANO EXIT 6 7 8 BRASS USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 VOICE 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY TO HOST terminal VOICE Make music with a computer — quickly and easily (page 143) Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices (page 25, 54) Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music software. Connections and setup are exceptionally easy, and you can play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument sounds — all from a single PF-1000! The PF-1000 features a wealth of exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices (more than 800) — including piano, strings, woodwinds, and more! VIDEO OUT AUX IN L/L+R AUX OUT R L/L+R R PHONES POWER ON L LEVEL FIXED R OFF INPUT VOLUME MIC/LINE IN AC INLET PEDAL AUX PEDAL MIDI HOST SELECT MIC LINE TO HOST MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac MIN IN OUT MAX THRU PF-1000 15 Setting Up the PF-1000 You do not need to install the stand to play the PF-1000. However, if you wish to assemble the stand, refer to page 150. About the pedal unit Insert the plug of the pedal unit, with the arrow in the plug facing upward. Turning the Power On and Off Connect the power cable. insert the plug of the power cable into the [AC 1 First INLET] on the left side panel, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. VIDEO OUT L/L+RAUX AC INLET IN R L/L+R AUX AC R INLET OUT L LEVEL FIXED R PEDAL AUX PHONE S PEDAL POWER MIDI ON OFF IN HOST MIDI SELECT PC-2 OUT PC-1 Mac TO HOST THRU VIDEO OUT L/L+R AUX IN R L/L+R AUX AC R INLET OUT L LEVEL FIXED R PEDAL AUX PHONES PEDAL 240V POWER MIDI ON OFF IN HOST MIDI SELECT PC-2 OUT PC-1 Mac TO HOST 220V THRU 11 0V 13 0V PEDAL VOLTAGE SELECTOR About the music rest The PF-1000 is supplied with a music rest that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the holes at the rear of the control panel. 16 PF-1000 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) WARNING Make sure your PF-1000 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the PF-1000. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the PF-1000 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) DO NOT modify the plug provided with the PF-1000. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. the [POWER] switch located on the left side 2 Press panel to turn on the power. → The main display appears in the LCD display. Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks on the left side panel. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) POWER ON Using headphones OFF A F B G C H VIDEO OUT L/L+RAUX IN R L/L+R AUX AC R INLET OUT L LEVEL D I E J FIXED R PEDAL AUX PHONE S PEDAL POWER MIDI ON OFF IN HOST MIDI SELECT PC-2 OUT PC-1 Mac TO HOST THRU When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch again. → The display will turn off. VIDEO OUT L/L+RAUX IN R L/L+R AUX AC R INLET OUT L LEVEL FIXED R PEDAL AUX PHONE S PEDAL POWER MIDI ON OFF IN HOST MIDI SELECT PC-2 OUT PC-1 Mac TO HOST THRU PHONES Adjusting the display contrast If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST] knob at the left of the LCD. LCD CONTRAST CAUTION Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. Setting the volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. MIN MAX MASTER VOLUME CAUTION Do not use the PF-1000 at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. PF-1000 17 Panel Controls and Terminals 33 LCD CONTRAST 34 MENU DEMO 27 A HELP 28 B C FUNCTION 29 D DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FADE IN/OUT 30 4 2 1 POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY MARCH & WORLD LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L USER 15 STYLE AUTO FILL IN ACMP 5 MAX MASTER VOLUME 7 8 METRONOME 9 3 ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C 10 SYNC.STOP SYNC.START 18 19 START/STOP 31 17 START/STOP TOP NEW SONG INTRO START/STOP DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R 16 REC OTS LINK 6 BREAK MIN E MIXING CONSOLE REW 20 SYNC.START SONG D FF 21 REPEAT 22 23 35 32 36 BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS PART CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4 5 TAP TEMPO 12 11 STYLE CONTROL 60 13 61 VIDEO OUT 62 AUX IN L/L+R 14 RESET 63 R 25 RESET 26 PART TRANSPOSE 64 AUX OUT L/L+R R 24 TEMPO 37 71 PHONES POWER L LEVEL FIXED R ON OFF 72 73 INPUT VOLUME MIC/LINE IN AC INLET PEDAL AUX PEDAL MIDI 38 HOST SELECT 74 MIC LINE TO HOST MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac MIN 75 76 77 IN 65 66 MASTER VOLUME [MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................P. 17 2 [FADE IN / OUT] button ..................................................P. 65 1 METRONOME 3 [START / STOP] button (METRONOME)........................P. 50 STYLE 4 STYLE buttons ...............................................................P. 59 STYLE CONTROL 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 [ACMP] button ................................................................P. 60 [AUTO FILLIN] button .....................................................P. 66 [OTS LINK] button ..........................................................P. 68 [BREAK] button ..............................................................P. 64 [INTRO] button .........................................................P. 31, 66 MAIN [A] – [D] buttons....................................................P. 64 [ENDING / rit.] button................................................P. 31, 66 [SYNC.STOP] button ......................................................P. 65 [SYNC.START] button ....................................................P. 60 [START / STOP] button (STYLE CONTROL) .................P. 60 SONG 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ................................P. 77 [TRACK 2 (L)] button ......................................................P. 77 [TRACK 1 (R)] button .....................................................P. 77 [REC] button ...................................................................P. 90 [TOP] button ...................................................................P. 76 [START / STOP] button (SONG).....................................P. 74 [REW] button ..................................................................P. 76 [FF] button ......................................................................P. 76 [REPEAT] button.............................................................P. 77 TEMPO 24 25 [–] [+] buttons (TEMPO) .................................................P. 50 [TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................P. 51 TRANSPOSE 26 18 [–] [+] buttons (TRANSPOSE) ......................................P. 130 PF-1000 OUT 67 68 MAX THRU 69 70 MENU [DEMO] button................................................................P. 52 [HELP] button .................................................................P. 49 29 [FUNCTION] button ......................................................P. 122 27 28 DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] button............................................P. 85 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button ..............................P. 90, 106 32 [MIXING CONSOLE] button .........................................P. 116 30 31 DISPLAY CONTROL 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 [LCD CONTRAST] knob.................................................P. 17 [A] - [J] buttons ...............................................................P. 40 [DIRECT ACCESS] button .............................................P. 47 [BALANCE] button..........................................................P. 61 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button...................................P. 61, 76 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ............................................P. 38 - 45 [BACK] button...........................................................P. 40, 46 [NEXT] button ...........................................................P. 40, 46 [ENTER] button ..............................................................P. 46 [DATA ENTRY] dial .........................................................P. 46 [EXIT] button...................................................................P. 40 VOICE PART ON/OFF 44 45 [LAYER] button ...............................................................P. 56 [LEFT] button..................................................................P. 56 MUSIC FINDER 46 [MUSIC FINDER] button.................................................P. 69 47 Floppy disk drive (3.5”) .....................................................P. 6 VOICE EFFECT 48 49 50 51 52 53 [REVERB] button............................................................P. 57 [DSP] button ...................................................................P. 57 [VARIATION] button........................................................P. 57 [HARMONY / ECHO] button...........................................P. 58 [MONO] button ...............................................................P. 58 [LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................P. 58 39 40 BACK 34 F NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER G LEFT H I J 44 45 MUSIC FINDER 46 ENTER 41 DATA ENTRY 48 49 50 REVERB DSP VARIATION 51 HARMONY/ ECHO 52 53 MONO LEFT HOLD 1 2 3 4 55 47 EXIT 5 6 7 8 42 43 VOICE EFFECT PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO BRASS WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD VOICE VOICE buttons................................................................P. 54 ONE TOUCH SETTING 55 [1] - [4] buttons (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ......................P. 67 PIANO Setting 56 ONE TOUCH SETTING GUITAR PIANO BASS 56 54 38 54 ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION [PIANO] button ...............................................................P. 55 REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] button ............................................................P. 84 [1] – [8] buttons (REGISTRATION MEMORY)................P. 82 59 [MEMORY] button...........................................................P. 82 VOICE SYNTH. XG USER FREEZE 57 1 2 58 3 4 5 REGISTRATION MEMORY 6 7 8 MEMORY 59 The Panel Logos The logos printed on the PF-1000 panel indicate standards/ formats it supports and special features it includes. GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. 57 58 Connectors 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 [VIDEO OUT] jack ........................................................P. 142 AUX IN [L / L+R] [R] jacks ............................................P. 142 AUX OUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ........................................P. 142 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks........................P. 142 [PHONES] jacks ...........................................................P. 141 [AC INLET] .....................................................................P. 16 [PEDAL] jack...................................................................P. 16 [AUX PEDAL] jack ........................................................P. 143 MIDI [THRU] [OUT] [IN] terminals ................................P. 143 [HOST SELECT] switch................................................P. 143 [TO HOST] terminal......................................................P. 144 POWER 71 [ON / OFF] button (POWER) ..........................................P. 17 Microphone Connectors [INPUT VOLUME] knob ................................................P. 141 [MIC / LINE IN] jack ......................................................P. 141 74 [MIC LINE] switch .........................................................P. 141 72 73 Pedals Left pedal........................................................................P. 58 Sostenuto pedal..............................................................P. 58 77 Damper pedal .................................................................P. 58 75 76 XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the PF-1000’s XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible song files. XF Format The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The PF-1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files. The PF-1000 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.) Disk Orchestra Collection The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices. Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. The PF-1000 uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator feature. PF-1000 19 Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing the Demos Reference on page 52 The PF-1000 features an extensive variety of Demo songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its dynamic rhythms and styles. Demo button What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of all the important features and functions of the instrument — letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the PF1000 in your own music. 1 2 Pressing the [DEMO] button automatically plays back the Demo songs at random. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo categories. BACK NEXT MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION Voice Demos showcase the voices of the PF-1000. Style Demos introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PF-1000 (page 52). For this example, FUNCTION is selected. Function Demos demonstrate many of the different functions on the PF1000. 3 Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs. For this example, press the [8▼] (AUTO) button. All of the function demos are played back in sequence. A F B G C H D I E J For details about the Demos, refer to page 52. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve finished playing the demo songs. When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PF-1000 even better with these functions: • Preset Song (Song Book) playback (page 21) • Disk Song Playback (page 21) • Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26). 20 Quick Guide Song Playback Song Playback Reference on page 73 Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of the PF-1000 come together — in songs! As you heard in the Demos, the PF-1000 contains many built-in recordings. But there’s more. Check out the included disk or call up the Song Open (PRESET) display. And there’s an even greater wealth of song material you can enjoy with your PF-1000 — in commercially available software. Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 140) is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back. Song related buttons BALANCE and CHANNEL buttons Floppy disk drive The following songs are compatible for playback on the PF-1000. Refer to pages 73, 148 for more details on the logos. Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard. Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control. Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format. Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200– 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Playback of Songs 1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive. CAUTION • Make sure to read the section “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 6. Quick Guide 21 Song Playback 2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. From the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on), you can select songs, voices, accompaniment styles, etc. A B C D E PRESET FLOPPY DISK Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive. 3 PRESET only Press the [A] button to select the preset songs (Song Book) folder. A B C D E 22 Quick Guide Song Playback 4 5 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select a song file. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. REC NEW SONG 6 START/STOP TOP • To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button. • With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics on the display during playback. You can also view the score. See pages 78 and 81 for details. SYNC.START While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on — letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the fly! 1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button. 2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off. CHANNEL ON/OFF PART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 If the STYLE tab is selected, press this button again. Quick Guide 23 Song Playback 7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels of the individual parts — the song, the style, your singing, and your playing. 1) Press the [BALANCE] button. 2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust. BALANCE You can call up a full set of mixing controls by pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button (page 116). 1 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. REC NEW SONG 24 2 Quick Guide TOP START/STOP SYNC.START • The [FADE IN/OUT] button (page 65) can be used to produce smooth fadeins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the song, as well as the accompaniment. Playing Voices Playing Voices Reference on page 54 The PF-1000 features a stunning variety of over 800 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands. Voice related buttons Playing a Voice 1 Press the [F] button to call up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. F The voice you’re selecting here belongs to the MAIN part, and is called the MAIN voice. (See page 56 for more information.) VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER G LEFT H I J You’ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself — so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off. 2 Select a voice group. PIANO & HARPSI. BRASS ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG E.PIANO USER VOICE For this example, STRINGS is selected. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the voice. For this example, PRESET is selected. Quick Guide 25 Playing Voices 3 Select a voice. You can instantly jump back to the Main display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A] - [J] buttons. A For this example, ”Orchestra” is selected. B C D E Press the corresponding buttons to select the other pages — and discover even more voices. 4 Press the [8▲] button to start the Demo for the selected voice. To stop the Demo, press this button again. There’s more to the Demo features than just voices, though–for more information, see page 52. Play the voices. Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also have the PF-1000 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲] button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically. Playing Two Voices Simultaneously 1 2 3 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn the LAYER part on. VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part. LEFT Select a voice group. Here, we’ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound. Call up the “CHOIR & PAD” group. PIANO & HARPSI. BRASS ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG E.PIANO USER VOICE 4 5 Select a voice. For example, select “Hah Choir.” Play the voices. Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve selected here. And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features: • Instant setup of the PF-1000 for piano play — with the press of a single button (page 55). • Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 85). • Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need them (page 82). 26 Quick Guide Playing Voices Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands 1 2 3 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT part on. VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part. Select a voice group. Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play rich, orchestral chords with your left hand. PIANO & HARPSI. BRASS ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG E.PIANO USER VOICE 4 5 6 Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. For example, select “Symphon. Str.” Press the [I] button to call up the SPLIT POINT display. From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 127.) F F G G H H I I J J Play the voices. The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or voices). Split Point MAIN/LAYER LEFT MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand. 7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. EXIT Quick Guide 27 Playing Styles Playing Styles The PF-1000 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your own performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion accompaniment to a full band or orchestra. Reference on page 59 Style related buttons Playing a style 1 Select a style group and a style. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. A B POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY C LATIN D STYLE E For this example, EuroTrance is selected. For this example, DANCE is selected. 2 Turn ACMP on. The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style. Split Point ACMP Auto Accompaniment section 3 Turn SYNC.START on. SYNC.START 28 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the style. For this example, PRESET is selected. Quick Guide • The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment section and the right-hand section of the keyboard is called the “split point.” Refer to page 127 for instructions on setting the split point. Playing Styles 4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). Split Point Auto Accompaniment section 5 6 7 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[–] [+] buttons if necessary. Simultaneously press the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons to return the tempo to its original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display. The Tempo can also be adjusted by using the [TAP TEMPO] button (page 51). Try playing other chords with your left hand. For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 62. Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the style. And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features: • Easily create your own original styles (page 106). • Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need them (page 82). Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too. 1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on. REVERB DSP VARIATION HARMONY/ ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD VOICE EFFECT 2 Turn ACMP on (page 28). 3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard. The PF-1000 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 132). The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice. For details about Harmony/ Echo types, refer to the separate Data List. • Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 57). Quick Guide 29 Playing Styles Style Sections Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings, Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professionalsounding arrangements. INTRO MAIN BREAK ENDING 1-4 5 This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29. Press the [INTRO] button. BREAK INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B D C STYLE CONTROL 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). Split Point Auto Accompaniment section When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main section. 7 8 9 30 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK] button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure on the next page.) BREAK Quick Guide B D C or STYLE CONTROL Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a fill-in, if necessary. Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections. Press the [ENDING] button. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the style automatically stops. ENDING/rit. MAIN A BREAK AUTO FILL IN INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C D STYLE CONTROL Playing Styles ■ Accompaniment Structure INTRO (page (page 66) xx) INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C INTRO D (max. four patterns) MAIN VARIATION via BREAK MAIN VARIATION B via BREAK MAIN VARIATION A MAIN VARIATION C via BREAK MAIN VARIATION D via BREAK Press the [ENDING] button. ENDING ENDING(page (page xx) 66) ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C ENDING D You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [ENDING] button again while the ending is playing back. (max. four patterns) • An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point. • Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the final eighth note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in. • Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want. • If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing. • If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section. Other Controls FADE IN/OUT FADE IN/OUT TAP TEMPO TAP TEMPO SYNC.STOP SYNC.STOP The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 65)when starting and stopping the style. The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details, see page 51. When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance. For details, see page 65. Quick Guide 31 Playing Styles ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons One Touch Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button. This is a wonderful way to instantly reconfigure all the settings on the PF-1000 to match the style you want to play. 1 2 Select a style (page 28). Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons. Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (voices, effects, etc.) that match the current style (see page 67) — it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC. START, so that you can immediately start playing the style. 1 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts. Split Point Auto Accompaniment section 4 5 Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords with your left hand. Try out other One Touch Setting setups. 1 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups. For details, refer to page 68. • Here’s another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance: Use the convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main section (page 68). 32 Quick Guide Music Finder Music Finder Reference on page 69 MUSIC FINDER button If you want to play in a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder can help you out. Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the PF-1000 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style! Using the Music Finder 1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button. MUSIC FINDER 2 Select a record. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the desired page of records. For this example, ALL is selected. Select the desired record. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 For this example, press the [1 - 3▲▼] button to select a record by song title. 3 Play along with the style playback. Split Point You can also have the voice and other important settings change automatically with the style changes. To do this, turn on OTS LINK (page 68) and set the OTS LINK TIMING (page 127) to “REAL TIME.” Auto Accompaniment section Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Quick Guide 33 Music Finder Searching the Music Finder Records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria. 1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button. MUSIC FINDER 2 Press the [I] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display. The results of Search 1 and 2 appear in the correspondingly numbered SEARCH 1/ 2 displays. 4 For this example, press the [A] button to call up the display for inputting the song title. A F B G C H D I E J A F B G C H D I E J For this example, ANY is selected. 5 Enter the song title, then press the [8▲] (OK) button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 For this example, ALL is selected. 34 Quick Guide 7 Refer to page 45 for instructions on entering characters. 3 Press the [F], [G] and [H] to clear the previous conditions, if necessary. 8 6 Press the [8▲] (START SEARCH) button. The search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words. Music Finder 7 Select a record (see step #2 on page 33) and play along with the style playback. Split Point Auto Accompaniment section Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to floppy disk (pages 38 and 44). Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data To save your Music Finder data, call up the MUSIC FINDER Open/Save window from the SYSTEM RESET page (page 140) of the UTILITY display, and follow the same procedure as that in the Open/Save window for Voice (page 38, 44). To recall the saved data, execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDER’s Open/Save window. Records can be replaced or added (page 71). In the instructions above, all Music Finder data is handled together. Besides this, when you save or load style files, the Music Finder data that uses the relevant style file(s) is stored or added automatically. When you copy or move a style file on a floppy disk to the USER drive (page 42, 43), the record which was recorded when storing the relevant style is automatically added to the PF-1000. • In the example above, you specified a song title, but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music genre — for example, Latin, 8-beat, etc. (page 70). Quick Guide 35 Playing and Practicing with the Songs Playing and Practicing with the Songs Reference on page 73 Song related buttons Playing Along with the PF-1000 In this section, try using the PF-1000’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform. 1-4 5 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23. Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part. TRACK1 R To cancel the left hand part, press the [TRACK 2] button 6 If you want to have the notation displayed as you play, press the [C] button. If you want to see the lyrics, press the [B] button. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. A B C D E 7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part. REC TOP NEW SONG 8 SYNC.START Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. REC NEW SONG 36 START/STOP Quick Guide TOP START/STOP SYNC.START • If you want to start the song right away without an intro, use the Sync Start function. To set Sync Start to standby, simultaneously hold down the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Song playback starts automatically the moment you start playing the melody. • If you can hear the PF-1000 playing the melody part as well, check the channel setting for the melody part in the song data, and change the channel assigned to Track 1 (page 126). You can also change the song channel itself permanently (page 101). Playing and Practicing with the Songs Recording The PF-1000 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your keyboard performance. 1-3 4 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26. Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song“ for recording. REC START/STOP TOP NEW SONG REW FF REPEAT SYNC.START SONG 5 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button. EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L REC TRACK1 R 6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. 7 When you’ve finished recording, press the [REC] button. REC 8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. REC NEW SONG 9 TOP START/STOP SYNC.START CAUTION The recorded data will be lost if you turn off the power. To keep your important recordings, you’ll need to save them to the User drive or floppy disk. Save the recorded data as required (pages 38, 44). Quick Guide 37 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data The PF-1000 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs and registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PF-1000; you can also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument. All this data is stored in separate files — just as is done on a computer. Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the PF-1000 in files and folders. Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these displays according to their respective file types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder. The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button. Open/Save display for Song (page 74) Open/Save display for Voice (page 54) handles the Song files. handles the Voice files. A F B G C H D I E J The following Open/Save display types are also available; however, these are selected from displays other than the MAIN display (page 140). • SYSTEM SETUP • MIDI SETUP • USER EFFECT • MUSIC FINDER If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Open/Save display for Style (page 59) handles the Style files. 38 PF-1000 Open/Save display for Registration Bank (page 83) handles the Registration Bank files. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Example — Open/Save display for Voice Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages. PRESET drive The files that are preprogrammed and installed internally to the PF-1000 are kept here. Preset files can be loaded but cannot be re-written. However, you can use a preset file as a basis for creating your own original file (which can be saved in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive). USER drive Files kept here are those containing your own original data, created or edited using the various functions of the PF-1000. They are stored internally to the PF-1000. FLOPPY DISK drive You can also store your original data to floppy disk. Commercially available disk software can also be called up here. Naturally, these files are available only when the appropriate disk is inserted in the floppy disk drive. BACK NEXT Changes drives among PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK. Calls up the upper level directory page. In this example, the voice folder selection page can be called up. File All data, both preprogrammed and your own original, are stored as “files.” Current Memory “Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive. Recording songs (page 90) and creating accompaniment styles (page 106) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a file or files. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving. PF-1000 39 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Selecting Files and Folders Select a file shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice file. First, press the VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI] button to call up the display containing the files. This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store files (voice files). The PF-1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section. BACK “PRESET,” “USER,” or 1 Select “FLOPPY DISK” by using the NEXT [BACK][NEXT] button. A F B G C H D I E J ENTER DATA ENTRY 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 Use the [1▲] ~ [7▲] buttons to turn the pages. When the amount of pages exceeds six, the bottom of the display changes as shown below. Press Prev.(previous) END Press Next PF-1000 8 3 Select the file/folder. There are two ways to select the file/folder: • Press the [A] - [J] button. Press the letter button corresponding to the file/folder you wish to call up. (In the example display shown above, the voice files are shown.) • Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button. When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the highlight moves among the available files/ folders. Highlight the desired file or folder (voice files are shown in the example above) and press the [ENTER] button to call up the selected item. Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the MAIN display. You can go back to the previous display by pressing the [EXIT] button. Exiting from small pop-up windows You can also exit from small pop-up windows (such as in the illustration below) by pressing the [EXIT] button. 40 7 When “JAPANESE” is selected for the Language parameter (pages 49, 140), and you change this to one of the western languages, the kanji and kana characters of the file name stored in the disk drive are changed to western characters. In the opposite case, special Latin characters and marks are changed into normal characters. Also, in the case of floppy disk data, text in the files are changed to characters that cannot be read by the instrument. Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying to access files originating or edited by a computer having a different language operating system. In general, be careful when switching languages — you risk not being able to access the data properly. Double-clicking the appropriate [A] -[J] button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display. Highlighting the desired file and double-clicking the [ENTER] button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data File/Folder-related Operations Naming Files/Folders You can assign names to files and folders. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset files/folders you wish to rename, copy them beforehand (page 43) and use them as User files/folders. 1 Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 38). A file/folder name can contain up to 50 half size letters (or 25 Hiragana and kanji letters), including the Icon ID (see the note below) and the extension. The NAME display appears. 2 Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. A F ABCDE.S002.MID B G File ID C H D I E J 1 END The file name will appear on your computer as follows. If you change the Icon ID or the extension, the icon may change or the file may not be properly recognized. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Icon ID Extension 8 Input the new name (page 45). Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. PF-1000 41 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Moving Files/Folders You can move files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below. the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 38). 1 Press The CUT display appears. 2 Select the desired file/folder for moving. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to release or cancel the selection. 3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button. This operation cannot be used to directly move a file/ folder from one floppy disk to another. If you want to do this, cut and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the USER page, then change disks and paste it to the FLOPPY DISK page. All files/folders in a floppy disk can be copied to another disk in one batch (page 139). After being pasted, the files are automatically re-ordered in alphabetical order and displayed. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. 4 Call up the destination display. Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination. END 42 PF-1000 Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. The file/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination. About files/folders in a floppy disk In the FLOPPY DISK page of the Open/Save display, only the files which can be handled in that Open/Save display will appear — even though a folder in a floppy disk can contain different kinds of files. In the case of a folder cutand-paste operation (for floppy disk), an entire folder can be cut; however, only the specific files which can be handled in the current Open/ Save display will be pasted. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Copying Files/Folders You can also copy files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below. the [3▼] (COPY) button 1 Press (page 38). The COPY display appears. 3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. 4 Call up the destination display. Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination. 2 Select the desired file/folder. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/ folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (PRESET/USER/ FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection. END Please note that the copy functions are intended for your personal use only. This operation cannot be used to directly copy a file/ folder from one floppy disk to another. If you want to do this, copy and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the User page, then change disks and paste it to the Floppy Disk page. Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. The file/folder you copied is now pasted at the destination. Deleting Files/Folders You can also delete files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be deleted, using the operation described below. 1 Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 38). The DELETE display appears. END Press the [7▼] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The message “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears. YES ..........Deletes the highlighted item. NO............Exits from the prompt without deleting. 2 Select the desired file/folder. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection. When several files have been selected, the message “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears. YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or skips the highlighted item without deleting (NO). YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once. CANCEL .... Exits from the prompt without deleting. PF-1000 43 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Saving Files This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current memory (page 39) to files. The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK drives. If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, first return to the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 38, 39). the [6▼] 1 Press (SAVE) button. Enter a name for the new file (page 45). Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The internal memory capacity of the PF-1000 is about 580KB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1.44MB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PF-1000 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together. The files of commercially available DOC software and Yamaha Disklavier software, and their edited files on the PF-1000, can be stored in the USER page, but cannot be copied to another floppy disk. Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections. up the page to 1 Call which you wish to create a new folder and press the [7▼] (NEW) button (page 38). Enter the name of the new folder (page 45). Folder directories can contain up to four levels. The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 800, but this may differ depending on the length of the file names. The maximum number of files which can be stored in a folder will be 250. Press the [8▲](OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. Displaying Upper Level pages Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from the file level pages. Entering Characters and Changing Icons the [1▼] 1 Press (NAME), [6▼] (SAVE), or [7▼] (NEW) button (page 38). Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button. If you select Japanese as the Language in the FUNCTION display (page 140), the following different types of characters and sizes can be entered: (kana-kan) Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing Hiragana and kanji, marks (full size) the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon (kana) at the left of the file name. Katakana (normal size), marks (full size) (kana) Katakana (half size), marks (half size) A B C — Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size) ABC — Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) If you’ve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display (page 140), the following types of characters are available: CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) 44 PF-1000 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders. The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone. 1 2 3 Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter. Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button. If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the [7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the [7▼] (DELETE) button for a while, or press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is deleted. To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. ■ Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) This applies only if you are using the “ (kana-kan)” button (in Japanese). When the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the [ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate kanji. The reversed area can be changed by the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The converted area can be changed back to “hiragana” by the [7▼] (DELETE) button. The reversed area can be cleared at once by the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. To actually enter the change, press the [8▲] (OK) button or enter the next character. To enter the “hiragana” itself (without converting it), press the [8▲] (OK) button. The following half-size marks cannot be used in naming files and folders: ¥\/:*?“<>| ■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button (before actual entry of the character.) ■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a character by moving the cursor. Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button. ■ Entering numbers In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks (with the exception of kanakan and half-size katakana), you can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button after selecting a character (before actual entry of a character). First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” “CASE” (half-size capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected. PF-1000 45 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Changing the Icon You can also change the icon that appears at the left of the file name. Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from the character input display (page 45). Select the desired icon by using the [A] - [J] buttons, or by using the [3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter the selected icon by pressing the [8▲] (OK) button. Turns pages for icon selection. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT Enters the selected icon. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cancels the icon selection operation. Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display. ■ Adjusting values You can change parameter values by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the example [BALANCE] display, turning the dial adjusts the volume of the part in reverse display (highlight). To adjust the volume of another part, first select the part by pressing the [▲▼] button corresponding to the part, then rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. DATA ENTRY ■ Selecting items You can select the desired item or function in the display by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item can then be called up or executed by using the [ENTER] button. In the example VOICE display, you can select the desired voice file with the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up the selected item by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel. 46 PF-1000 ENTER DATA ENTRY Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays DIRECT ACCESS LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R ACMP AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF BREAK MIN MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP METRONOME INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C MONO LEFT HOLD 1 GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG DSP PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BRASS RESET TEMPO 3 4 8 TAP TEMPO RESET 2 ONE TOUCH SETTING EXIT PART SYNC.START D STYLE CONTROL VARIATION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE TRANSPOSE PART VOICE USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 128). DIRECT ACCESS ACMP Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 48) for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function. Here’s a convenient way to return to the MAIN display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. PF-1000 47 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Direct Access Chart Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below STYLE [POP & ROCK] [POP BALLADS] [DANCE] [SWING & JAZZ] [R & B] [COUNTRY] [LATIN] [MARCH & WORLD] [WALTZ] [BALLROOM] [PIANIST] [USER] STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] [BREAK] [INTRO] MAIN [A] MAIN [B] MAIN [C] MAIN [D] [ENDING] [AUTO FILL IN] [OTS LINK] [SYNC. STOP] [SYNC. START] [START/STOP] SONG [TRACK1] [TRACK2] [EXTRA TRACKS] [REPEAT] [REC] [TOP] [START/STOP] [REW] [FF] METRONOME [START/STOP] [FADE IN/OUT] TEMPO [TAP TEMPO] [–] [+] TRANSPOSE [–] [+] MENU [DEMO] [HELP] [FUNCTION] DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] [DIGITAL RECORDING] [MIXING CONSOLE] [BALANCE] [CHANNEL ON/OFF] [DIRECT ACCESS] [NEXT] [BACK] [ENTER] [MUSIC FINDER] [EXIT] VOICE PART [LAYER] [LEFT] VOICE EFFECT [REVERB] [DSP] [VARIATION] [HARMONY/ECHO] [MONO] [LEFT HOLD] VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI] [E.PIANO] [ORGAN & ACCORDION] [PERCUSSION] [GUITAR] [BASS] [BRASS] [WOODWIND] [STRINGS] [CHOIR & PAD] [SYNTH.] [XG] [USER] ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] [PIANO] REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] [1]–[8] [MEMORY] PEDAL RIGHT CENTER LEFT AUX 48 PF-1000 Corresponding LCD display and function FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT FUNCTION CHORD FINGERING VOLUME/VOICE MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART) FILTER EFFECT FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT See pages SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 127 FINGERING TYPE selection VOICE settings PANPOT settings VOLUME settings HARMONIC CONTENT settings BRIGHTNESS settings REVERB settings CHORUS settings DSP settings 128 SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting 117 118 119 127 — — FUNCTION TRACK1 CHANNEL selection TRACK2 CHANNEL selection SONG SETTING 126 — — — — — UTILITY METRONOME settings FADE IN/OUT settings TAP settings 137 MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 135 CONTROLLER TUNE TRANSPOSE settings FUNCTION MIXING CONSOLE LANGUAGE selection LCD BRIGHTNESS settings MIDI settings MASTER TUNING setting SCALE TUNING setting UTILITY FUNCTION MIDI MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE 130 118 140 138 134 124 — MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) VOLUME/VOICE VOLUME settings VOICE settings 117 Exit from the Direct Access mode MUSIC FINDER Return to the MAIN display — — — MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 (Searching the records) 70 TUNE OCTAVE settings 118 EFFECT REVERB settings DSP settings EFFECT TYPE selection 119 MIXING CONSOLE FUNCTION MIXING CONSOLE FUNCTION FUNCTION REGISTRATION BANK FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME settings STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting 132 118 127 VOICE SET 132 — KEYBOARD TOUCH selection CONTROLLER FREEZE REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the REGISTRATION) REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) RIGHT PEDAL function assignment CENTER PEDAL function assignment CONTROLLER LEFT PEDAL function assignment AUX PEDAL function assignment 130 131 83 131 128 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Help Messages The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PF-1000. HELP LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R STYLE ACMP AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF BREAK MIN MAX MASTER VOLUME 1 START/STOP INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C MENU DEMO LEFT HOLD 1 BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BRASS RESET PART TRANSPOSE TEMPO 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 TAP TEMPO RESET VARIATION EXIT PART SYNC.START D STYLE CONTROL METRONOME MONO GUITAR DSP PIANO & HARPSI. VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION REVERB MIXING CONSOLE USER FREEZE 1 VOICE 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages: ENGLISH JAPANESE GERMAN FRENCH SPANISH ITALIAN HELP FUNCTION The language can also be selected in the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE” (page 140) display. 1 2-1 2 3 Select the desired Help topic. 4 5 6 2-2 7 Call up the topic. Select the Language, if necessary. The language selected here are also used for various “Messages” shown during operations. 3 BACK NEXT Use this to select different pages. ENTER DATA ENTRY Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word (using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. 8 When “JAPANESE” is selected for the Language parameter, and you change this to one of the western languages, the kanji and kana characters of the file name stored in the disk drive are changed to western characters. In the opposite case, special Latin characters and marks are changed into normal characters. Also, in the case of floppy disk data, text in the files are changed to characters that cannot be read by the instrument. Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying to access files originating or edited by a computer having a different language operating system. In general, be careful when switching languages — you risk not being able to access the data properly. END Press this to return to the previous display. EXIT PF-1000 49 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and check how a specific tempo sounds. START/STOP LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP METRONOME A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L USER DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW NEW SONG MIN INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN B A START/STOP MAX MASTER VOLUME SYNC.STOP SYNC.START REPEAT E.PIANO VARIATION CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MONO LEFT HOLD 1 GUITAR BASS PIANO 2 WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 TAP TEMPO BRASS RESET STYLE CONTROL HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION EXIT PART SYNC.START START/STOP D C METRONOME DSP PIANO & HARPSI. VOICE EFFECT BALANCE FF DIRECT ACCESS BREAK REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP RESET PART TRANSPOSE TEMPO USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 VOICE The metronome starts by pressing the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO[–] [+] buttons (see below). To stop the metronome, press the [START/STOP] button again. 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY The sound, volume level, and the beat (time signature) of the metronome can all be changed (page 137). Adjusting the Tempo This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of a song or an accompaniment style. TAP TEMPO LCD CONTRAST BACK RESET MENU DEMO TEMPO HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L USER DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF NEW SONG MIN START/STOP MAX MASTER VOLUME METRONOME INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C DSP PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO VARIATION SYNC.STOP SYNC.START MONO LEFT HOLD 1 GUITAR BASS PIANO CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG D TAP TEMPO RESET STYLE CONTROL 1 TAP TEMPO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG TRANSPOSE PART 2 RESET TEMPO Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo. Press either the TEMPO [–] button or the [+] button. Press this to ND close the TEMPO display. E 50 PF-1000 EXIT 3 4 8 BRASS RESET TEMPO 2 ONE TOUCH SETTING EXIT PART SYNC.START START/STOP HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS BREAK REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP When you change the tempo, both tempos of the current song and style will be changed to the same tempo. To restore their respective default (initial) tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo Indications — MAIN display” (page 51) for more about tempo. VOICE USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Songs and accompaniment styles have been given default (initial) tempo settings, designed to best suit the song/style. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Tap Tempo This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style. Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping. the song or the 1 Playback accompaniment style (page 59, 74). 2 TAP TEMPO RESET TEMPO Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice to change the tempo. ■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below. Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected song (unless the tempo has been changed manually). Hitting the [TAP TEMPO] button produces a tapping sound. You can change this sound, if desired (page 138). n You can also use Tap Tempo to automatically start the song or accompaniment style at the desired tempo. While both the song and accompaniment style are stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button several times, and the selected accompaniment style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. While a song is set to Sync. Start stand-by (page 60, 74), tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button starts the song playback in the same manner. For songs and styles in 2/4 and 4/4 time, tap four times; for 3/4 time, tap three times; for 5/4 time, tap five times. Indicates the current tempo for the selected song, accompaniment style or the metronome which is now playing back. When nothing is playing back (stopped), this indicates the tempo for the selected style. When the song and style are played back simultaneously, the tempo of the style is automatically changed to match the tempo of the song, and is displayed here. This tempo is used for recording when recording a song or accompaniment style. Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected accompaniment style (unless the tempo has been changed manually). PF-1000 51 Playing the Demos The PF-1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices and Reference rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PF-1000. MENU DEMO HELP LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO FUNCTION HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF NEW SONG BREAK MAX MASTER VOLUME INTRO 1 ENDING/rit. MAIN A START/STOP B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START E.PIANO CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BRASS RESET PART TRANSPOSE TEMPO Pressing the [DEMO] button automatically plays back the Demo songs at random. HARMONY/ ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD 1 ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 TAP TEMPO RESET VARIATION EXIT PART SYNC.START START/STOP D STYLE CONTROL METRONOME DSP PIANO & HARPSI. VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS MIN REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP VOICE USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION 2 2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category. Function Demos ....... These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PF-1000. Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices of the PF-1000. Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PF-1000. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT 2-3 1 2-2 52 PF-1000 Use these to select different display pages. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press one of these buttons twice — once to select the desired demo, and once again to start it. 8 Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting from the first item at the top left of the display. This is available only from the FUNCTION page. All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button; however, all demo songs are played back in sequence. Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos (otherwise available in step 3 below). Playing the Demos 3 For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and the Demo starts playing. Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons in the introduction screen to call up the previous or next page. This example shows the Voices in the FUNCTION demo. BACK n NEXT Press the SONG [START/ STOP] button to stop the Demo song. To start the Demo again from the point at which it was stopped, press the SONG [START/ STOP] button again. Rewind and fast-forward can also be used with the Demo songs (page 76). F G H I J ENTER DATA ENTRY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Select the desired word or item by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.) to call it up. 4 Relevant explanations are shown in the display. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT END Return to the MAIN screen. PF-1000 53 Voices The PF-1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings and brass — and many, many more. PIANO & HARPSI. BRASS LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG E.PIANO USER NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER VOICE LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I MUSIC FINDER J E ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF NEW SONG MIN MAX MASTER VOLUME INTRO A START/STOP ENDING/rit. MAIN B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START LEFT HOLD 1 BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG E.PIANO VARIATION CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG D 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING EXIT PART SYNC.START START/STOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TAP TEMPO BRASS RESET STYLE CONTROL METRONOME MONO GUITAR DSP PIANO & HARPSI. VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS BREAK HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP RESET PART TRANSPOSE TEMPO USER FREEZE VOICE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Selecting a Voice 1 Select the desired voice group. PIANO & HARPSI. BRASS ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG E.PIANO USER n VOICE 2 Indicates that the display is for selecting the MAIN voice (page 25). 2-1 When you select a voice group, the last selected voice will automatically be selected. Select the memory location of the voice (PRESET/USER/FLOPPY DISK). BACK A F B G C H D I E J Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited effect and other settings for that particular voice. You can disable this so that settings are not automatically selected (page 132). n NEXT You can set how much the volume of the voice changes according to your playing strength (page 130). n For a list of the available voices, refer to the separate Data List. n 2-3 2-2 Select the various pages in the current voice group. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group. 3 54 PF-1000 Play the keyboard to hear the selected voice. END Select the voice. Press this to start the demo of the selected voice. To stop the demo at any time, press this button again. Press this to return to the MAIN display. EXIT You can set whether the voice bank and program change numbers (“MSBLSB-Program Change number” at the right above the voice name) are displayed or not (page 138). n XG is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Voices Voice Characteristics The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name. Natural! These rich and luscious voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument sounds and are especially intended for playing piano and other keyboard parts. Since they use a completely independent sound source, you can play full, sustained chords — even along with the accompaniment style — and not have to worry about notes cutting off. They also take full advantage of Yamaha’s advanced sampling technology such as Stereo Sampling, Dynamic Sampling, Sustain Sampling, and Key-off Sampling. Live! These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound — full of atmosphere and ambience. Cool! These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming. Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing! Drum Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Keyboard Percussion When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical. Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit. One-touch Piano Play This convenient, easy-to-use feature completely and automatically reconfigures the entire PF-1000 for optimum piano performance. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel, you can instantly call up the piano settings by a single button press. PIANO PIANO button This reconfigures all of the panel settings for playing the PF-1000 as a piano. Piano Lock function The convenient Piano Lock function lets you “lock” the piano so that you don’t inadvertently change the settings by pressing another button on the panel. Once locked, the PF-1000 stays in the piano mode, even if other buttons are pressed — preventing you from accidently starting a song or accompaniment style during a piano concert. You can also use the metronome with this function (page 50). Even if you turn Piano Lock off, the piano settings are still active. Hold down the [PIANO] button for a short time, until a message appears prompting you to enable Piano Lock. To enable Piano Lock, select “OK.” To turn Piano Lock off, hold down the [PIANO] button again for a short time. PF-1000 55 Voices Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously The PF-1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance. VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H D I NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR MUSIC FINDER J E ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF BREAK MAX MASTER VOLUME INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A START/STOP B C E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP VARIATION HARMONY/ ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD 1 ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING EXIT PART SYNC.START D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TAP TEMPO RESET STYLE CONTROL METRONOME DSP PIANO & HARPSI. VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG MIN REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP BRASS RESET TEMPO PART TRANSPOSE VOICE USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Playing a layer of two voices LAYER part MAIN part Playing two voices separately — on the left and right sections of the keyboard Split point LEFT part MAIN part Left range Playing three different voices — one on the left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of two on the right Right range Split point LAYER part LEFT part MAIN part Left range Right range Layer — Layering Two Different Voices 1 Press this to turn the LAYER function on. To turn it off, press the button again. VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER 2 Select LAYER with the [G] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specific voice you want to play in a layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN) display (page 54). LEFT F G H I J EXIT END 56 PF-1000 Press this to return to the MAIN display. There is an alternate way for quickly selecting both the MAIN and LAYER voices from the panel: While holding down one panel voice button, press a second voice button. The first selected voice becomes the MAIN voice, and the second becomes the LAYER. Voices Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard 1 2 Set the LEFT to ON. Press this button again to set it to OFF. Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specific voice you want to play in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 54). VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER The split point can be freely set to any key on the keyboard. To set it, call up the SPLIT POINT display by pressing the [I] (SPLIT POINT) button in the MAIN display. The operation steps are the same as in the STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT display of the FUNCTION page (page 127). LEFT F G n H Each part (MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT) can have its own volume setting (page 61). I EXIT END J n You can also use the LAYER and LEFT functions together, to create a combination layer/split. To do this, set separate voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard (as indicated), and set up a layer of two different voices on the right. Press this to return to the MAIN display. Applying Voice Effects This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard. REVERB DSP VARIATION HARMONY/ ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE EFFECT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION I D DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR MUSIC FINDER J E ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R STYLE ACMP AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF BREAK MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP METRONOME INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C DSP PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP TAP TEMPO RESET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MONO LEFT HOLD 1 GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 BRASS RESET TEMPO HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION EXIT PART SYNC.START D STYLE CONTROL VARIATION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG MIN REVERB MIXING CONSOLE TRANSPOSE PART VOICE USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off. For explanations on each of the effects, see below. ■ REVERB Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a performance space — anything from a small jazz club to a concert hall. ■ DSP The PF-1000 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways — such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part (MAIN/ LAYER/LEFT). The DSP and VARIATION effect types and the their depth can be selected and adjusted in the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 119). ■ VARIATION (Regular voice only; page 86) This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 119), this lets you switch the rotor speed between slow and fast. PF-1000 57 Voices ■ HARMONY/ECHO This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section of the keyboard (page 132). The Portamento effect creates a smooth pitch glide between successively played notes. ■ MONO This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically. Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the Portamento effect, when playing in legato. ■ LEFT HOLD This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the same effect as when the damper (sustain) pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall accompaniment sound. You can add special emphasis to melody lines you play over chords by using the Layer function with a monophonic voice. Set the Main voice to play polyphonically and set the Layer voice to play monophonically (MONO). In this case, the melody you play — including the top notes of any chords — sounds monophonically. Try this using the following voices. MAIN voice: Brass Section (polyphonic) + LAYER voice: Sweet Trump (monophonic) Using the Pedals Included with the PF-1000 is a special pedal unit that features the following pedals. Damper Pedal Left Pedal Sostenuto Pedal You can also assign one of many other functions to these pedals (as well as the optional foot controller or footswitch). For example, you can use it to start/stop the accompaniment style, or use it to play Fill-ins (page 128). ■ Damper Pedal (Right) The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after releasing the keys. When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held. • Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION] and [XG] groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal. ■ Sostenuto Pedal (Center) If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as the pedal is held, but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note, the note will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. • Certain voices, such as [STRINGS] or [BRASS], sustain continuously when the sostenuto pedal is pressed. • Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION] and [XG] groups may not be affected by use of the sostenuto pedal. ■ Left Pedal When the Piano voice is selected, pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play. The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected voice. The depth of the left pedal effect can be adjusted (page 128). ■ Foot Controller/Footswitch An optional Yamaha foot controller (FC7) or footswitch (FC4 or FC5) can be connected to the AUX PEDAL jack and used to control various functions assigned in the FUNCTION page (page 128). 58 PF-1000 Styles The PF-1000 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz, Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them. POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER STYLE ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D C LCD CONTRAST BACK STYLE CONTROL MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW NEW SONG MIN MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START REPEAT E.PIANO CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BRASS RESET MONO LEFT HOLD 1 GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG PART TRANSPOSE TEMPO HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 TAP TEMPO RESET VARIATION EXIT PART SYNC.START START/STOP STYLE CONTROL METRONOME DSP PIANO & HARPSI. VOICE EFFECT BALANCE FF DIRECT ACCESS BREAK REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP USER FREEZE VOICE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Playing a style 1 POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER STYLE 2 BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT 2-1 2-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Select a location (Preset, User, Floppy Disk) for saving the style. Select a Style. When you've opened a lower directory's display, this button (UP) lets you call up the next higher directory, from which you can select Style groups. For a list of the available accompaniment styles, refer to the separate Data List (Style List). PF-1000 59 Styles 3 When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.) ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO You can set the key range for auto accompaniment (page 127). OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D C STYLE CONTROL 4 Sync. Start Enabling this lets you start the style simply by playing the keyboard. Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on. ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D C STYLE CONTROL 5 As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section, the style starts. For details about chord fingerings, refer to page 62. Split point The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [–][+] or [TAP TEMPO] button. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped. Auto Accompaniment section 6 SYNC.STOP Stop the style. SYNC.START START/STOP END ACMP BREAK Turn ACMP off. • You can begin the rhythm channels (tracks) of the Style by pressing the [START/STOP] button. • The rhythm channels of the style can also be started by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button. With the style stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button three, four or five times (three for 3/4 time, four for 2/4 or 4/4 time, five for 5/4 time). When you simultaneously play back accompaniment styles with a song, the accompaniment parts recorded to the song (channels 9 - 16) are temporarily replaced by the selected accompaniment style — letting you try out and use different accompaniment with the song (page 75). Accompaniment Style Characteristics The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display. Session! These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an onbass chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment. Piano Combo! These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs. Pianist! These special styles provide piano-only accompaniment — effectively recreating the left-hand performance of an accomplished pianist. Just by playing the proper chords with your left hand, you can automatically add complicated arpeggios and bass/chord patterns — such as difficult-to-play stride piano parts. 60 PF-1000 Styles Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only 1 The Rhythm channels are part of the styles. Each style has different rhythm patterns. Select a style (page 59). 2 Set to off. ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO You can also start the rhythm simply by playing a key on the keyboard, if Sync Start is enabled (turn on the [SYNC.START] button). Rhythm starts. OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D STYLE CONTROL 3 Play along with the rhythm playback. The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [–][+] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped. END When selecting the style group “PIANIST,” the rhythm doesn’t sound. When you want to use any of the styles, always make sure that ACMP is turned on. Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button again to stop the rhythm playback. Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting BALANCE display MIC part Call up the BALANCE display. STYLE part (Auto Accompaniment section) SONG part BALANCE Parts played from the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/ LEFT) Adjust the output level of the Part. CHANNEL ON/OFF CHANNEL ON/OFF display PART Call up the Channel ON/ OFF display. Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data (page 147). The channels are assigned as shown below. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 PF-1000 61 Styles Chord Fingerings The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of fingerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 128), and select the Chord Fingerings. The page shows how to play chords with your left hand. SINGLE FINGER Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used. For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. MULTI FINGER The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. If you want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the root of the chord. FINGERED This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page. Chord detection in the AI Full Keyboard mode occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords — less than an 8th note in length — may not be detected. FULL KEYBOARD This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. In Full Keyboard mode, chords are detected based on the lowest and second lowest notes you play. If the two lowest notes fall within a single octave, those two notes determine the chord. If the lowest note and the second lowest note are separated by more than one octave, the lowest note becomes the bass and the chord is determined from the second lowest note and the other notes played in the same octave. AI FINGERED This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). AI FINGERED ON BASS This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C). Artificial Intelligence AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PF-1000 will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th and 11th chords cannot be played. 62 PF-1000 Styles Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords) CmM7 CmM7 9 ( ) ( ( C5 CM7 5 Cm7 9 Cm7 11 ) CM7aug 11 ( Caug CM7 ) Csus4 CM7 9 CM7 ) C6 ) C9 ( C6 9 C Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7 13 C7 9 C7 5 C7aug C7sus4 Normal Voicing Display for root “C” Major [M] 1-3-5 C Ninth [9] 1-2-3-5 C9 Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [69] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C69 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M79] Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7 11] Flatted fifth [ 5] Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 5] Suspended fourth [sus4] Augmented [aug] Major seventh augmented [M7aug] Minor [m] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM79 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 CM7 11 1 - 3 - 5 C 5 1-3- 5-7 CM7 5 1-4-5 1-3- 5 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1- 3-5 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Minor ninth [m9] Minor sixth [m6] Minor seventh [m7] Minor seventh ninth [m79] Minor seventh eleventh [m711] Minor major seventh [mM7] Minor major seventh ninth [mM79] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 5] Diminished [dim] Diminished seventh [dim7] Seventh [7] Seventh flatted ninth [7 9] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 3 - 5 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 Csus4 Caug CM7aug Cm Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm79 Cm711 CmM7 CmM79 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] C7 9 1-3-5- 6- 7 C7 13 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* C79 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 C7 11 13 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 C7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7 9 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7 5 1-3- 5- 7 C7aug 1-4-5- 7 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7 13] Seventh ninth [79] Seventh add sharp eleventh [7 11] Seventh add thirteenth [713] Seventh sharp ninth [7 9] Seventh flatted fifth [7 5] Seventh augmented [7aug] ) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) ) ( Chord Name [Abbreviation] Major seventh [M7] Csus2 ( ) 11 ( C7 C7 13 C7 9 ) ) ( ) ( C7 9 ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • For FINGERED, FINGERED ON BASS, and AI FINGERED, if you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm instruments will continue playing (Chord Cancel function). This let you play back only the rhythm. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based on the root and the fifth. • The auto accompaniment Style will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • You can also have the PF1000 “teach” you how to play Fingered chords. From the CHORD FINGERING display (page 128), specify the chord you want to learn, and the notes you should press are indicated in the display. Csus2 * Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion. PF-1000 63 Styles Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) The PF-1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professionalsounding arrangement in your performance. 1 Select a style (page 59). 2 2-1 Turn the ACMP function on. ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D C STYLE CONTROL 2-3 2-2 3 Turn the SYNC. START function on. Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again. The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section. Split point Auto Accompaniment section 4 ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO Main sections can be shifted. OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C D STYLE CONTROL Press this button to add breaks. 64 PF-1000 SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP You can also use this function to play only rhythms (page 61). • If you press the [INTRO] button, you can play back an Intro section while an accompaniment is playing. • Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons LED is green — The section is not selected. LED is red — The section is currently selected. LED is off — No section data; the section cannot be played. • You can dynamically control the level of the accompaniment by how softly or strongly you play the keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (page 127). • If you press the [SYNC. START] button while an accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop and the PF-1000 will enter Synchronized Start standby status. • You can also change style sections by using the pedal (page 128). • The Break section lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. If you press the [BREAK] button while an accompaniment is playing, the fill-in will play back for one measure. • The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A/ B/C/D) will flash while the Break is playing. • When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and the MAIN [A][B][C][D] button is pressed after the final half beat (eighth note) of the measure, the fill-in will begin from the next measure. Styles END ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO OTS LINK This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the Style stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. ENDING/rit. MAIN A B SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D C STYLE CONTROL Fade-in/Fade-out The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in before starting the style, press the button again. To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 137). Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment section is played. 1 Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on. 2 Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when SYNC. STOP is turned on. ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D • Styles can also be started by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/ STOP] button. • You can select the Intro and Ending type by pressing the [E] button in the MAIN window (page 66). • If you press the [INTRO] button while the ending is playing, the Intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished. • When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and you press a MAIN button while the ending is playing, fill-in accompaniment will immediately start playing, continuing with the Main section. • You can begin the accompaniment by using the Ending instead of the Intro section. In this case, the auto accompaniment doesn’t stop when the ending is finished. • If you select a different style while the style is not playing, the “default” tempo for that style is also selected. If the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style. • When STOP ACMP is set to on and the accompaniment is not playing, you can play both chords and bass in the Auto Accompaniment section in the keyboard (page 127). STYLE CONTROL 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts. Split point You can also use the SYNC. STOP function by pressing the auto accompaniment section/left-hand range briefly (page 127). Auto Accompaniment section 4 The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys. 5 Playing a chord with your left hand automatically restarts the auto accompaniment. END Press the [SYNC. STOP]/ [SYNC. START] button again to stop the accompaniment. Synchro Stop cannot be set to on when the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard/AI Keyboard or the auto accompaniment on the panel is set to off. PF-1000 65 Styles Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) 1 To call up the [MAIN] display, first press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button. A B C D E 2 3 D E Select a Intro Play the style using the Intro or Ending section (page 30, 31). Select a Ending Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In 1 ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO Fill A short phrase used to add variation to the style. OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D STYLE CONTROL 2 Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play (page 30, 31). Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections. END 66 PF-1000 To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again. You can also add a fill-in by pressing the selected MAIN button again. You can temporarily disable Auto Fill In during a performance by pressing the next Main section’s button twice quickly. Styles Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING) The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style you’re playing. Each preset style has four pre-programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button. 1 2 3 4 LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT ONE TOUCH SETTING VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION I D DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR MUSIC FINDER J E ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY MARCH & WORLD LATIN WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW NEW SONG BREAK INTRO B C 2 SYNC.STOP SYNC.START REPEAT E.PIANO VARIATION HARMONY/ ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD 1 ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING EXIT PART SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TAP TEMPO BRASS RESET STYLE CONTROL METRONOME 1 ENDING/rit. MAIN A START/STOP MAX MASTER VOLUME DSP PIANO & HARPSI. VOICE EFFECT BALANCE FF DIRECT ACCESS MIN REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP RESET TRANSPOSE TEMPO PART USER FREEZE 1 VOICE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Select a style (page 59). 3 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ([1] - [4]). LED is red — The One Touch Setting is currently selected. 1 2 3 4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts. ONE TOUCH SETTING Split point LED is off — No One Touch Setting data. The button is not available. LED is green — The One Touch Setting is not selected. Various settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected style can be instantly recalled. When the style is not playing, Auto Accompaniment and Sync. Start will automatically be turned on. For details about the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart). 4 Auto Accompaniment section Stop the Auto Accompaniment. ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO OTS LINK ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START/STOP D STYLE CONTROL 5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups (page 68). 1 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING PF-1000 67 Styles Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section (A - D). 2 1 AUTO FILL IN END OTS LINK When you switch among the Main sections (A - D), the corresponding One Touch Setting will be called up automatically. The Main sections A, B, C, and D correspond to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings (page 127): • Immediately when you press a section button. • At the next measure (in an accompaniment style), after you press a section button. To cancel the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button again. Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING) This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (four setups per style). For a list of One Touch Setting setup parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart). 2 1 Select a style. 4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons:[1] through [4]. 1 2 Set up the panel controls such as selecting a voice as required. 3 3 Press the [MEMORY] button. MEMORY 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice, Harmony and Pedal settings. A message prompting you to save the current style will appear. Select “YES” ND to call up the STYLE display, then save the panel settings (page 38, 44). E 68 PF-1000 Unless you store the panel settings here, the registered settings will be deleted when you select a different accompaniment style. Styles Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the instrument — including voice, style, and One Touch Settings — simply by selecting the desired song title. If you want to play a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function will help you out. The recommended settings, which together make up a “record,” can also be edited and stored. This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall. MUSIC FINDER LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G The MUSIC FINDER records and its contents is just one example of the recommended panel setups. You can also create your own Music Finder settings for your favorite songs and genres. NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT H C FUNCTION I D DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR MUSIC FINDER J E ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R REVERB STYLE ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START 2 ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG PIANO & HARPSI. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E.PIANO 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING PIANO 8 BRASS RESET PART TRANSPOSE TEMPO VOICE MUSIC FINDER F G H I J Show the number of records of each page. 3 4 5 6 USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 REGISTRATION MEMORY 6 7 8 MEMORY Keep in mind that Music Finder is a performance aid in that it automatically finds appropriate accompaniment styles and voices for your playing. Even though you can specify song titles, it does not actually contain song data. All .......................... Show all records. FAVORITE.............. Show the records that have added to the “Favorite” page. SEARCH1,2........... Show the results by SEARCH function (page 70). Select a record. For example, select the top record by pressing the [1▲▼] button to call up the recommended setups. The setting data shown here is referred to as a “record.” 2 2 EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG TAP TEMPO RESET 1 1 PART SYNC.START START/STOP D STYLE CONTROL 1 LEFT HOLD VARIATION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG ENDING/rit. MAIN A START/STOP METRONOME HARMONY/ ECHO MONO DSP MIXING CONSOLE 7 Sorting the records MUSIC ...... The record is sorted by song title. STYLE....... The record is sorted by style name. BEAT ........ The record is sorted by beat. TEMPO ..... The record is sorted by tempo. Change the order of the records (ascending or descending). Add the selected record to “Favorite (Bookmark)” page When you press the [H] button, the “Add selected data to the favorite list? YES/NO” message will be displayed. Select [YES] to add the selected page to “FAVORITE” page. Search record(s). Enter the condition of the search in the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display (page 70). The results of SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the “SEARCH 1” or “SEARCH 2” page respectively. 8 Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT (page 71) display (for editing the selected record). Select a record by song title. When sorting records by song title, use the [1▲▼] button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [▲▼] buttons to move the cursor to the first record. 3 Play the style (page 60). Turn TEMPO LOCK on/off. TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during style playback when selecting another record. The on/off setting affects all pages (ALL/FAVORITE/SEARCH 1/SEARCH 2). Select a record by style name. When sorting the records by style name, press these buttons to move the cursor to the next /previous style. Simultaneously press the [▲▼] buttons to move the cursor to the first record. Records can be selected by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial and pressing the [ENTER] button. PF-1000 69 Styles Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search You can search the record by music title or keywords. The results appears in the display. 1 Press the [I] (SEARCH 1) button or [J] (SEARCH 2) button in the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 Enter the conditions for A the search (see below), B then start C search by D using [START E SEARCH] button. Start searching the record. The results that satisfy all the conditions appear in the SEARCH page. For details about the search settings in this display, see below. F G H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ■ [A] MUSIC Searches by music or song title. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the song title. When you enter the song title (page 45), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words. ■ [B] KEYWORD Searches by keyboard. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the keyword. When you enter the keyword (page 45), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words. You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. The search function finds and displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords. ■ [C] STYLE Searches by style name. Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style. This convenient function lets you find all songs that use a certain accompaniment style. ■ [D] BEAT The STYLE FILE SELECT display can only be used to select the style name for searching; it cannot be used to call up the actual accompaniment style. Searches by beat or rhythmic feel. ■ [E] SEARCH AREA Selects a specific location for searching. You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2 selections. ■ [F]~[H] CLEAR Clears the entered item at left. ■ [1▲▼] TEMPO FROM You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search. Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum. ■ [2▲▼]TEMPO TO You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search. Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum. ■ [3▲▼]~[5▲▼] GENRE Selects the specific music genre for searching. The available range includes all genres (ANY), the preset genres, and any genres you’ve entered yourself (page 69). ■ [8▼] CANCEL Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display. 70 PF-1000 Styles Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit From this display, you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your preferences. You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records. 1 2 Press the [8 ▲▼] (RECORD EDIT) button in the MUSIC FINDER display. Change/clear the record data. You can also register new records. For details about all settings and operations, see below. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 You can also change/clear a preset record. To avoid changing/clearing the record, register the record as a new record after editing. All Music Finder records can be stored together as a single file (page 140). When calling up a stored file, a message appears prompting you to replace or append the records as desired. • Replace: All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file. • Append: The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers. 8 ■ [A] MUSIC Selects the music or song title for editing. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the music or song title, then edit the name as desired. ■ [B] KEYWORD Selects the keyword for editing. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the keyword, then edit it as desired. You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator (comma) between each. ■ [C] STYLE Selects the style name for editing. Always enter the name when a new record is registered. Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired style you want to change/clear/register. ■ [D] BEAT Selects the beat (time signature) for editing. When another file is selected by pressing the [C] button, the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected file. ■ [E] FAVORITE Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page (page 69). ■ [F]~[H] CLEAR The STYLE FILE SELECT display can only be used to select the style name for record editing; it cannot be used to call up the actual accompaniment style. Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the accompaniment style itself. Clears the entered item at left. ■ [I] DELETE RECORD Clears the selected record. The deleted record number becomes empty. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES .................. Press this to clear the record and close the display. NO .................. Press this to close the display without clearing the record. CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display. PF-1000 71 Styles ■ [J] NEW RECORD Registers a new record. The smallest available empty record number is used for registering. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES .................. Press this to register the record and close the display. NO .................. Press this to close the display without registering the record. CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display. The maximum number of records is 2500, including internal records. ■ [1▼▲] TEMPO Determines the tempo for the selected style. When changing the style with the [C] button, the tempo is automatically changed to that of the changed style. ■ [3▼▲]~[5▼▲] GENRE Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned. The available range includes all preset genres as well as any you’ve entered yourself. ■ [6▼▲] GENRE NAME For entering a genre name. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the genre name, then edit the name as desired. A maximum of 200 genre names can be stored. The genre name you input becomes effective when the current record is edited (overwritten) by pressing the [8▲] (OK) button, or when a new record is registered by pressing the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record, the input genre name is deleted. ■ [8▲] OK Executes all editing and changes to the record. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES .................. Press this to replace the record and close the display. NO .................. Press this to close the display without replacing the record. CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display. ■ [8▼] CANCEL Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display. To maintain the edited and registered data, make sure to save all Music Finder records as a file (page 140). If no saved, the data will be lost when another Music Finder file is called up or the factory-programmed settings are restored (page 140). 72 PF-1000 Song Playback Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 90), and commercially available song data. You can use this highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song, as well as practicing and learning new music with the Repeat (page 77) function. You can also display the music notation and lyrics in the LCD. EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L REC TRACK1 R START/STOP TOP REW FF REPEAT LCD CONTRAST BACK NEW SONG MENU DEMO SYNC.START SONG HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF BREAK MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP METRONOME INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C DSP PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MONO LEFT HOLD 1 GUITAR BASS PIANO BRASS RESET TEMPO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 TAP TEMPO RESET HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION EXIT PART SYNC.START D STYLE CONTROL VARIATION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG MIN REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP TRANSPOSE PART VOICE USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Compatible Song Types • Internal songs (Song Book) • Song data on included disk (50 greats for the piano) • Commercially available song data Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General MIDI). Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG format. XG is a significant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard, providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect sections and effect types. Commercially available music data is subject to copyright restrictions, and is intended only for your own personal use. For more information on the song file types compatible with the PF-1000, see page 148. Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) format. Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s original MIDI file format. • Songs you recorded (page 90) and stored to the PF-1000 or disk. PF-1000 73 Song Playback Song Playback Playing the Internal Songs 1 BACK A F B G C H D I E J 2-1 2 If the MAIN screen (at left) is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. n You can also make a variety of other settings (such as tempo, voice selection, etc.) and have them automatically called up when you play back the song (page 102). Select the PRESET tab with the [BACK] button. BACK A F B G C H D I E J 2-2 Open a folder and select a song to be played back. 3 The song starts. REC TOP You can enable the Synchro Start for the song by simultaneously pressing the [TOP] button and the SONG [START/STOP] button. The song starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also use this function along with the Style’s Synchro Start function (page 60). n You can have the volume automatically fade in and fade out at the beginning and end of the song. Simply press the [FADEIN/OUT] button at the start of song playback to fade in the song, and press it again at the end of the song to fade out. END START/STOP REW FF REPEAT START/STOP NEW SONG SYNC.START SONG To stop the song immediately, press the button again. EXIT Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [–][+] buttons (page 50) or the [TAP TEMPO] button. You can even change the playback speed by tapping out the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice. Songs can also be played back continuously. Set SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON from the SONG SETTING display (page 126). 74 PF-1000 Press the button in order to go back to the previous screen. Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 140) is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back. Song Playback Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of the song’s chord data. • [ACMP] button .................. ...ON • [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON 1 2 3 4 The accompaniment stops when you stop the song. If the accompaniment style is playing and you start the song, the accompaniment automatically stops. However, for internal songs that use accompaniment styles, the accompaniment style is not stopped. Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Select the desired accompaniment style. Start the style by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE section buttons.) Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections. END The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped. Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback. PF-1000 75 Song Playback Playing Back Songs on Disk Before proceeding, make sure to read the section “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk” (page 6). Insert the disk into the drive. n Insert the disk shutter side first and label face up. You can set whether or not the PF-1000 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted (page 139). The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions (page 74), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display. Other Playback-related Operations ■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped, pressing this button returns the song to the beginning. REC START/STOP TOP NEW SONG REW FF REPEAT SYNC.START SONG Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button. SONG POSITION display n Some song data for the PF1000 has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. During playback of such song data, the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of the song has been played back. n Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200– 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data. “PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the [J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark. ■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels BALANCE CHANNEL ON/OFF Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 61). Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below). PART CHANNEL ON/OFF display Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press that channel’s button again. 76 PF-1000 Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data. The channels are assigned as shown below for the PF-1000. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 Song Playback Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play that part yourself. 1 2 Select the song to be played back (page 73). You can change the channel assignments for Track 1 and Track 2 (page 126), letting you specify which parts are muted when pressing the [TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/ [EXTRA TRACKS] buttons. Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts (all but the right hand/left hand). EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L TRACK1 R Use this button to turn on/off the right-hand part. All tracks are automatically set to on when selecting a different song. Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part. 3 Start the song. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [–][+] buttons (page 50). REC START/STOP TOP NEW SONG REW FF END START/STOP To stop the song, press the button again. REPEAT SYNC.START SONG Repeat Playback of a Specific Range This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly. 1 2 Play back the song (page 74, 76). REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REW FF REPEAT SYNC.START SONG 3 Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to start (Point A). Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to end (Point B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly. Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP] button returns to point A. You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again. Point B cannot be selected unless Point A has been selected first. n Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the song. n 4 Stop the song. START/STOP END REPEAT To cancel the Repeat function, press the button again. The specified A and B points will be erased when selecting a different song number, cancelling the Repeat function, or selecting a different repeat mode — such as Phrase Repeat or repeat in Song Chain Play (page 126). PF-1000 77 Song Playback Displaying Music Notation — Score With this feature, you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays. This can be used with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs. 1 Select the desired song (page 74, 76). 2 If the MAIN screen (at left) is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. A B C D E The displayed notation is generated by the PF-1000 based on the song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as commercially available sheet music of the same song — especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes. 3 n Some song data for the PF1000 has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. For such song data, the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be displayed correctly. Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range. Depending on other settings, this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go to the detailed setting display (shown below; use the [8▲▼] buttons) and set the LEFT CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or, go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function menu (page 126) and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except “OFF.” n [RIGHT] and [LEFT] cannot be turned off at the same time. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range. Channel 1 is automatically selected when [TRACK1] is set to [OFF] from the SONG SETTING display (page 126). Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed. Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch). Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation. SMALL ..... Notation is shown in small size. LARGE ..... Notation is shown in large size. This calls up the detailed setting display for notation. For details, see the next page. 8 n The note name is indicated at the left of the note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indication may be moved to the top left of the note. n You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be displayed (parts, lyrics, chords, etc.). n When accidentals (sharp and flats) and notes cannot be displayed on one line, they are displayed in the next line from the middle of the measure. n The notation functions cannot be used to create song data by inputting notes. For information on creating song data, see page 94. 78 PF-1000 Song Playback Detailed Settings for Notation When “LEFT” and “RIGHT” are set to the same channel, the notation of the right-hand notes and left-hand notes are displayed in piano format (two connected staves). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ■ [1▲▼] LEFT CH/[2▲▼] RIGHT CH This determines the Left channel (channel for the left-hand part) and Right channel (channel for the right-hand part). This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected. AUTO .........................The channels for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the SONG SETTING display of the Function menu (page 122). 1-16 ............................Assigns the part to the specified channel, 1- 16. OFF (LEFT CH only)....No channel assignment. ■ [3▲▼], [4▲▼] KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position, allowing you to transpose key at any point within a song. For a list of the key signatures, with their relative minor keys and accidentals, see the chart below. Key Signatures and Accidentals C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F min) E Maj (C min) B Maj (G min) F Maj (D min) C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F min) E Maj (C min) B Maj (G min) F Maj (D min) The note indicates the root note of the major key, and the C Maj (A min) note indicates the root of the relative minor. ■ [5▲▼] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value which is used in the song. Note resolution: Short notes and ornamented notes (such as trills and grace notes) which are shorter than the Note resolution will not be displayed in the notation. 1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/16 note, 1/32 note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/8 note triplet, 1/16 note triplet, 1/32 note triplet PF-1000 79 Song Playback ■ [6▲▼] NOTE NAME Select the Note Name type when “NOTE” (page 78) is set to ON. ABC ................. Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B). Fixed Do .......... Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language (page 49). English.............. Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti French .............. Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si Italian............... Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si German............ Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si Spanish............. Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si Japanese........... Movable Do..... Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of Sol would be indicated as Do. As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language. ■ [8▲] OK This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation. You can also execute this by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel. ■ [8▼] CANCEL This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings. You can also execute this by pressing the [EXIT] button or [RECORD] button on the panel. 80 PF-1000 You can select the display pages (one before and after) by the using the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons or the pedal (page 128). Song Playback Displaying the Lyrics This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your performance or song playback. 1 2 Select the desired song (page 74, 76). The language used for lyrics display depends on the particular lyric data. If the lyrics are garbled or unreadable, you can remedy this by changing the “LYRICS LANGUAGE” setting from the SONG SETTING display (page 122). A B C D E 3 If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. If the selected song contains chord data, chord names are displayed with the lyrics. 4 REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REW FF REPEAT The contents of the display can also be shown on a connected TV (page 133, 142). SYNC.START SONG Start the song. 5 The lyrics are in reverse display along with song playback. END REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REW FF REPEAT SYNC.START The lyrics can be changed (page 105). SONG Stop the song. To return to the previous page, press the button. EXIT PF-1000 81 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PF-1000 just as you want — selecting specific voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button. LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT FREEZE VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY LEFT FUNCTION D DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR I E REGISTRATION MEMORY MUSIC FINDER J ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF MASTER VOLUME ENDING/rit. MAIN A START/STOP B C SYNC.STOP SYNC.START GUITAR BASS SYNTH. XG 1 PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING PIANO EXIT PART SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TAP TEMPO BRASS RESET STYLE CONTROL METRONOME ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD VARIATION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG MAX LEFT HOLD DSP MIXING CONSOLE STYLE MIN HARMONY/ ECHO MONO REVERB RESET PART TRANSPOSE TEMPO USER FREEZE 1 2 3 VOICE 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you. 1 Set up the panel controls as desired. For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart). 2 FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Keep in mind that songs or styles on disk cannot registered to Registration Memory. If you want to register a disk-based song or style, copy the relevant data to “USER” in the SONG/STYLE display (page 38) and register the data separately. MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY 3 F Select the desired parameter groups for the settings you want to register. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to navigate in this display. To register a parameter group, checkmark the corresponding box. Groups left without checkmarks will not be included in the Registration Memory setting. This allows you to maintain certain settings, even when switching among Registration Memory presets. You can also use the Freeze function (page 84) to override the Registration Memory changes — letting you prevent certain panel settings from being changed. END G H I J Enters a checkmark to the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the desired number button for registering the settings. FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Indicator is green......The panel setting is registered, but not selected. Indicator is red .........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected. Indicator is off ..........The panel setting is not registered. The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation explained on the next page. 82 PF-1000 Cancels the registration and returns to the MAIN display. You can also use the [EXIT] button. Removes the checkmark from the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button. Any data that was previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button (indicator is green or red) will be erased and replaced by the new settings. Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Saving Your Registration Memory Setups The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single file. All settings registered to buttons [1][8] are referred to as a “bank.” The banks can be saved to “USER” or “FLOPPY DISK” as Registration bank files. BANK 01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 F G Keep in mind that the size of the Registration bank files and the memory space they occupy depends on the amount of functions set in each. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and [EXIT] button to call up the MAIN display. H I J 2 Save the settings you’ve made to the Registration Memory buttons as a single Registration bank file (page 44). The REGISTRATION EDIT display appears. For details on this display, see below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION EDIT display The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green. From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets. Select ...............Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8] buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on (indicator is red). Name ...............This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 41) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” Delete ..............This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 43) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION BANK display by pressing the [8▼] (UP) button and save the data (page 44). PF-1000 83 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Recalling a Registration Memory Setup You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you specifically want or need. For example, if you de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you change the Registration Memory preset. Recalling the Registered Settings Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 83). Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings. FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 You can program your Registration Memory presets to be called up in sequence, in any order you desire. Once programmed, the presets 1 - 8 can be selected in sequence with the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal (page 131). MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Selecting the Freeze Settings 1 2 MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION Call up the “FREEZE” page from the REGIST.SEQUENCE/ FREEZE/VOICE SET screen (page 131). Enters a checkmark to the selected box. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Select the Freeze settings. 3 8 Removes the checkmark from the selected box. Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specified in the Freeze page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY 4 Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings. FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 REGISTRATION MEMORY 84 PF-1000 6 7 8 MEMORY Editing Voices — Sound Creator The PF-1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can save it as a USER voice for future recall. SOUND CREATOR LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION D DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR I E MUSIC FINDER J ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R REVERB AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP METRONOME ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C DSP SYNC.STOP SYNC.START PIANO & HARPSI. STYLE CONTROL CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MONO LEFT HOLD GUITAR BASS SYNTH. XG BRASS RESET TEMPO 1 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING PIANO 8 TAP TEMPO RESET HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION E.PIANO EXIT PART SYNC.START START/STOP D VARIATION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG MIN WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP • The Voice can be edited in realtime while playing back a song/style. • Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the original settings of the voice. TRANSPOSE PART USER FREEZE 1 VOICE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Operation 1 Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the voice you wish to edit. 2 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR F G H DIGITAL RECORDING I J MIXING CONSOLE The voice can also be selected in the SOUND CREATOR display. CAUTION The settings are lost if the edited part’s voice is switched to another voice. Important data should be saved to User Drive or floppy disk. PART 3 Edit the voice parameters. The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail, starting on page 87. NATURAL VOICE Select the desired menu by pressing the [NEXT]/ [BACK] button. REGULAR VOICE Select the desired menu. The selected menu is highlighted. Can be used during editing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited voice. Indicates the parameters available for editing in this display. These correspond to the parameters/ values shown at the bottom of the display. 4 Save the edited voice to the USER drive (Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 44). Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving the edited voice as a User voice (page 44). 5 Press the [USER] button to select the edited voice, and play the keyboard. PF-1000 85 Editing the voice — Sound Creator SOUND CREATOR Parameters PIANO Determines the parameters unique to piano sounds, such as tuning curve or sustain sampling. This page is available only when the Natural piano voice is selected. COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave. SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice (Regular voice only). EFFECT Determines the effect depth or type. HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings. The available parameters differ depending on the selected voice type, Regular or Natural (see below). Keep in mind that there are certain parameters whose Sound Creator settings affect only the Main part’s voice. The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display. Common parameter Other location MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 58 PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 118 LEFT PEDAL TYPE CONTROLLER (FUNCTION) page 128 LEFT PEDAL SETTING CONTROLLER (FUNCTION) page 128 FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 118 FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 118 REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 119 CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 119 DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 57 DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 119 DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 57,119 HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132 HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132 HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132 HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132 HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132 HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 132 Natural Voices and Regular Voices Built into the PF-1000 are two different tone generation sources, Natural and XG. The Natural tone generation source and its voices feature a huge amount of wave memory, giving you enormous and finely detailed expressive power over the sound. The XG source (which powers the Regular voices) provide maximum compatibility with a wide variety of devices and song data. Voices sounded with the XG source are divided into two groups. One is the original set of PF-1000 voices (Cool!, Sweet!, Live!), and the other is the conventional XG set. The maximum amount of polyphony for each tone generation source is set up to best enhance your performance. In general, the songs and styles are played back using the XG source, while the Natural voices are played from the keyboard — allowing you to play the Natural voices with full polyphony, even if the song and style data exceeds the polyphonic limit. Natural! Cool! Sweet! PF-1000-exclusive voices Live! XG GM/XG-compatible voices Natural voices (sounded by Natural tone generation source) Regular voices (sounded by XG tone generation source) Used mainly for keyboard-played voices For keyboard-played voices, song/style playback* * Depending on the particular style selected, a Natural voice may be used for the accompaniment. Usually, songs are played back using the XG voices (page 149); however, you can have them automatically “re-voiced” — using the exceptionally rich and realistic sounds exclusive to the PF-1000 (page 117). 86 PF-1000 Editing the voice — Sound Creator PIANO (Piano Voice has been selected) The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85. The available parameters differ depending on the selected voice. Determines the tuning curve, especially for piano voices. Select “FLAT” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices. These controls are used to adjust the brilliance of the tone. This setting affects all Natural voices globally. When other than piano voice (Natural) is selected, set this on EFFECT page. For details, see the EFFECT page (page 89). STRETCH .. Tuning curve particularly for pianos FLAT .......... Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal. COMMON The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85. The parameters are the same as for CONTROLLER display. For details, see page 128. Set the portamento time of each part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE) (Regular Voice only) (page 118). Set the volume of the current edited voice. Determines the touch sensitivity, or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. 0 —–– Produces more dramatic level drops, the more softly you play. 64 —– Normal response. 127 — Produces high volume for any playing strength (fixed) This determines whether the voice is played monophonically (Regular Voice only) (page 58). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 Shift the octave range of the selected voice up or down in octaves. When the Main or Layer part’s voice is used, the M/LYR parameter is available; when the Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT parameter is available. SOUND (Regular Voice only) The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85. 1 2 Determines the filter, EG, and vibrato settings (see below). PF-1000 87 Editing the voice — Sound Creator ■ FILTER FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. • BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. • Harmonic Content Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance), set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects. Frequency (pitch) Cutoff range Volume Resonance Resonance Frequency (pitch) ■ EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. • ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The higher the value, the slower the attack. Level • DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher the value, the slower the decay. ATTACK DECAY Key on • RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release. Time Key off If RELEASE is set to a large value, the sustain becomes long. ■ VIBRATO • DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. VIBRATO Creates a wavering in the sound by periodically changing the pitch. • SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). • DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset. RELEASE SPEED Level DEPTH DELAY Time 88 PF-1000 Editing the voice — Sound Creator EFFECT The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85. Determines the brilliance of the tone, when a Natural voice is selected. This can also be set from the PIANO page (page 87), when a piano voice is selected. • Metallic ......... Sharp metallic tone • Bright............ Bright tone • Normal .......... Standard tone • Mellow .......... Soft and mellow tone • Dark .............. Dark tone Determines the effect type (Reverb/ Chorus/DSP) for the Natural voices. When a regular voice is selected, the DSP type and Variation are set in two separate menus. For information on the effect structure, see page 121; for a list of available effect types, refer to the separate Data List. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The same as the “Mixing Console” on page 119. This parameter enables you to select whether the sound is sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (“PIANO LIKE”), or the sound is sustained only while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone (“NORMAL”) (for Vibraphone voice). • If you select [Bright] or [Metallic] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. In this case, raising the [MASTER VOLUME] may result in distortion. If this happens, lower the volume accordingly. • “SPEED” parameter is added when selecting VIBE ROTOR DSP type. This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato when you select the Vibraphone voice, recreating the effect of a vibe rotor pedal. HARMONY The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85. The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 133. PF-1000 89 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 91), which lets you record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 92), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording (page 94), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song can be stored to internal memory or floppy disk (page 38, 44). EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L REC TRACK1 R START/STOP TOP REW FF REPEAT BACK MENU DEMO NEW SONG DIGITAL RECORDING LCD CONTRAST SYNC.START SONG HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R STYLE ACMP AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW NEW SONG BREAK MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP METRONOME INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C DSP PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START REPEAT CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MONO LEFT HOLD 1 GUITAR BASS PIANO BRASS RESET TEMPO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 TAP TEMPO RESET HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION EXIT PART SYNC.START START/STOP D STYLE CONTROL VARIATION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE FF DIRECT ACCESS MIN REVERB MIXING CONSOLE TRANSPOSE PART VOICE USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY About Song Recording ■ Quick Recording (page 91) This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano song you are practicing. You can select from three parts: right hand, left hand and auto accompaniment. For example, you can record only your right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right hand and the auto accompaniment. ■ Multi Recording (page 92) This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance. ■ Step Recording (page 94) This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play. ■ Song Editing (page 100) The PF-1000 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods. 90 PF-1000 • The internal memory capacity of the PF-1000 is about 580KB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1.44MB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PF-1000 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together. • The microphone input signal cannot be recorded. • Songs recorded on thePF-1000 are automatically recorded as SMF (Standard MIDI File format 0) data. For details on SMF see page 148. • Playback of the recorded song data can be transmitted from MIDI OUT, letting you play the sounds of a connected external tone generator (page 135). • The volume level of each channel of the song can be adjusted from the Mixing Console and the settings can be saved. Moreover, even after you’ve set a voice for your keyboard play during recording, you can record voice selections, so that the voice changes automatically during playback (page 102). Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Quick Recording This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so you can check your progress. ■ When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance: ■ When creating a new song: 1 REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REW FF REPEAT SYNC.START SONG 1 Select the desired song (page 74, 76). 2 Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song. If you want to record to the Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON. Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well. 3 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button corresponding to the track you want to record. You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the same time. If the “LAYER” or “LEFT” button is on before pressing the REC button, the corresponding Layer and Left parts are automatically recorded to different channels. To record your keyboard performance: Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button. To record the auto accompaniment performance: Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. REC The performance of track 1/2 is recorded to the channel specified in the SONG SETTING display (page 122). EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L TRACK1 R To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. 4 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by pressing down the pedal, if the song start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 128). END To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again. Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the pedal, if the song start/ stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 128). ■ Play back your new song To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 103). Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 38, 44). You can overdub a second right-hand performance onto Track 2 after recording the first right-hand performance (including the layer voices) on Track 1. To do this, set the [LEFT] button to OFF and repeat steps 2 and 3. To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. You can also use the metronome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded. CAUTION Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance. If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 38, 44). PF-1000 91 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Multi Recording This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below. Channels Parts (default settings) Available parts Channels Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI 1 Voice MAIN 2 Voice MAIN 3 Voice MAIN 4 Voice MAIN 5 Voice MAIN 6 Voice MAIN 14 7 Voice MAIN 15 8 Voice MAIN 16 9 10 11 12 13 Parts (default settings) Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 Available parts Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI About the accompaniment style parts Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used. Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others. Chord........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices. Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir. Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. ■ When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance: ■ When creating a new song: 1 REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REW FF REPEAT 1 SYNC.START SONG 2 Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] - [8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time. REC ......................... Enables recording for the channel ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel OFF......................... Mutes the channel To cancel or disable recording, press the [REC] button once again. REC 1 92 Select the desired song (page 74, 76). PF-1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The part is automatically selected when setting the several channels to “REC” at the same time. Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator 3 Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded. This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the recording channels selected in step #2. For a list of the initial default assignments, see page 92. C D 4 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. The recording can be started/stopped by pressing the pedal if the recording punch in/out function is set to the pedal (page 99). When selecting the MIDI part • Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1 - 16 is recorded. When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device. • Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this records data only over the set MIDI channel — meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel. A single part (with the exception of MIDI parts) cannot be assigned to several channels. The settings of the recorded parts is stored temporarily until you execute Quick Recording, select a song, or turn the power off. 5 6 To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. You can also use the pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 99). Play back your new song. To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. You can also use the metronome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded. CAUTION END To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above. You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a finished song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 103). Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 38, 44). Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance. If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 38, 44). PF-1000 93 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Recording Individual Notes — Step Record This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately. Operation 1 Select an existing song (page 74, 76) to which you want to add parts or re-record. If you want to create a new song, simultaneously press the [RECORD] button and the [TOP] button. 3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display. A B 2 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR C D E DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 5 Using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons, select the “1 -16” tab for recording melodies and other parts, or select the “CHD” (Chord) tab for recording chords, and after selecting the “1-16” tab, select a record channel with the [F] (CH) button. Call up the Step Record display by pressing the [G] button. BACK NEXT F G H I J F G H Any voice, effect and other settings you make in the Mixing Console are automatically cancelled when you call up the CHD (Chord) page. I J 94 PF-1000 The voices in the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages cannot be selected for Step recording. You can select voices from the PRESET page; however, these may sound slightly different from the original voice. Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator 6 First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, first specify the length and loudness in this display, then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard. Moves the cursor position up and down. Returns the cursor to the beginning of the song (the first note of the first measure). A F B G C H D I E J Use these to move the selected event, in units of measures (BAR), beat, and clocks. For information on measure/ beat/clock settings, see below. 1 Specifies the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth notes are available only when recording the melody.) This also determines the position to which the pointer will advance after a note has been entered. END 2 3 4 5 6 7 Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered (only when recording the melody). For information on velocity settings, see below. Determines the length of the note (as a percentage) from the position at which it is to be entered. (This is available only when recording the melody.) For information on gate time settings, see below. Each press of this button toggles among the three basic note selectors at the bottom of the display: normal, dotted, and triplet. (This is available only when recording the melody.) 8 Deletes the event at the cursor. To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 44). ■ Measure/Beat/Clock Measure 1 Beat Clock 1 2 2 3 4 1 000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919 2 3 4 000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919 ■ Velocity The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values. Kbd. Vel Actual playing strength fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15 ■ Gate Time The following settings are available: Normal ....................... 80% Tenuto ........................ 99% Staccato...................... 40% Staccatissimo .............. 20% Manual ....................... The gate time (note length) can be specified as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. PF-1000 95 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording by guiding you through this actual music example, shown at right. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 95. 1 1-2 1-1 Select this note. 1-3 While holding down this note... ...press this (to input a tie). The notation display on the instrument may not be accurate, especially for tied notes or longer notes. To have the notation displayed accurately, set the gate time to tenuto by using the [H] button, and input the notes as desired. 2-2 2 2-3 2-4 2-1 Select this note. 3 3-1 Press this button to display the dotted notes. 3-3 3-2 Select this note. 4 4-1 Call up the normal notes by pressing this button. 4-3 4-2 Select this note. To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note. ■ Play back the newly created melody Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 103). 96 PF-1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 95. Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below. MAIN A C 1 BREAK F G F MAIN B G7 Enter the chords by using the currently selected chord fingering method in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. C Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right. MAIN A C B G C MAIN A F C 001:1:000 D F Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. 2 001:3:000 G 002:1:000 Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right. MAIN A C BREAK F G F G7 F 002:3:000 BREAK INTRO G7 002:4:000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. PF-1000 97 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator 3 Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right. MAIN A BREAK MAIN B MAIN A B C D C F G F G7 C C 003:1:000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. ■ Play back the newly created chord progression Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display (page 104). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data. To enter a fill-in, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button and press one of the MAIN [A] – [D] buttons. END Mark An “END” mark is shown in the display, indicating the end of the song data. The actual position of the End mark differs depending on the section that is input at the end of the song. When an Ending section is input, the End mark automatically follows the Ending data. When a section other than Ending is input, the End mark is set two measures after the final section. The End mark can be freely set to any position desired. 98 PF-1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording. To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation steps 1 - 3 on page 94. These settings determine how recording will start. F Normal Overwrite recording starts when you press the SONG [START/STOP] button or when you play the keyboard with Synchro standby set to ON. G H First Key On Overwrite recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This setting also preserves the previous lead-in data, letting you record over the original lead-in without erasing it. I Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. J When this is set to ON, you can use the sostenuto (center) pedal to control the punch-in and punch-out points. Press and hold down the sostenuto pedal to record. Recording stops when you release the pedal. Punch In At The song plays back normally up to the indicated Punch In measure (set by the [3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite recording at that Punch In measure. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording starts (when “PUNCH IN AT” is selected). Determines the Punch Out measure — the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording stops (when “PUNCH OUT AT” is selected). These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data. Replace All This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped. Punch Out When the Pedal Punch In/ This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped. Out function is set to ON, the Punch Out At current function assignment Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons), of the sostenuto pedal is then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally. cancelled. About Punch In/Out This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. REC START setting REC END setting NORMAL REPLACE ALL NORMAL PUNCH OUT NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006 PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006 Original data 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 1 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 8 5 *1 When measures 1 - 2 are not overwritten, recording starts from measure 3. *2 You’ll have to press the [REC] button at the end of 5 measures. Deleted 5 6 7 8 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start/start overwrite recording *1 Start/ play back original data 7 Stop recording *2 Start/start overwrite recording *1 1 6 Stop recording *2 Start/start overwrite recording *1 1 5 2 3 4 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 Deleted Stop recording *2 4 5 6 7 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording 2 Deleted Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 6 Stop recording *2 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 5 4 5 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data PF-1000 99 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Editing a Recorded Song Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing features to change the song data. Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons. Quantize Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values. Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specified note value (see below). Use this to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Quantize operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Quantize results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 Selects the desired channel to be quantized. 5 6 7 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats only by the specified amount. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. 8 Selects the quantize size (resolution). See the below for the details. ■ About Quantize Size Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4 note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes. One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization Quantize Size 1/4 note 1/4 note triplet 1/8 note 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note 1/16 note triplet 1/32 note 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note + 1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note + 1/16 note triplet * The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. 100 PF-1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Delete This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Deletes all data in the selected channel. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 8 These select the channel to be deleted. Mix This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Mix operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Mix results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 These let you specify the two source channels to be mixed. 4 5 6 7 All data other than the mixed note data is derived from the Source 1 channel. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 8 Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. If “COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the Destination channel. PF-1000 101 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Channel Transpose This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Channel Transpose operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Channel Transpose results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16. To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the amount of transpose for each channel. Set Up You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing console or panel controls. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the SET UP operation. Once SET UP has been executed, the operation cannot be cancelled or undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Use this to checkmark the selected item. Checkmarked items are stored with the song. Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song. Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button, and stop playback. Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song. Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE) button. Lyrics Language ........ Stores the settings of the Lyrics display. Score Setting.............. Stores the settings of the Score display. Mic. Setting ................. Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console. 102 PF-1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Editing Note Events — 1 - 16 From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. Use these to move the cursor up/down and select the desired event. Returns to the beginning position of the current song (the first note of the first measure). Use these to move the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the highlighted event. Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from the justedited value automatically enters that value. Determines the channel to be edited. A F B G C H D I E J Calls up the Step Recording display (page 95). Calls up the Filter display (page 105), letting you select only the events you wish to shown in the Event List. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Determines the current position of the event being edited. 1 2 3 4 5 6 For coarse adjustment of the event value. For fine adjustment of the event value. Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events are copied and can be pasted to another location. Adds a new event to the Event List. 7 8 Holding this button down while using the [A] and [B] buttons lets you select multiple events. Pastes all cut or copied events to the selected location. If the value at the cursor has been changed, pressing this restores the original value. Copies all selected events. The copied events can be pasted to another location. Deletes the event at the cursor position. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Note Events Parameter Note Ctrl (Control change) Prog (Program change) P.Bnd (Pitch bend) A.T. (After touch) Description Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note. Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to the separate Data List booklet (Voice List). Determines the pitch bend value. Determines the after touch value. The sound of the voices recorded with Step recording may sound slightly different from the original. PF-1000 103 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Editing Chord Events — CHD From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 103). A F B G C H D I E J Press this to convert the recorded chord and section entries into song data. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Chord Events Parameter Style (Accompaniment style) Tempo Chord Sect (Section) OnOff (Channel on/off) CH.Vol (Channel volume) S.Vol (Style volume) Description Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select the desired style. Determines the tempo value. Specifies the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note. Specifies the section — its name and variation. Determines whether specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off. Determines the level of specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.). Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style. Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) From this display, you can edit recorded System events. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 103). System Events Parameter Description ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the music notation. Only one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature. Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting. XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). SysEx (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data; however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data; however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. 104 PF-1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator Inputting and Editing Lyrics This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 103). In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on page 74. 1 2 Move the cursor to the event containing the lyric “star.” A F B G C H D I E J Press this button to save the newly changed lyric data. The song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star” is in the folder “For Children” in the Song Book (page 74). Move the cursor to the word “star.” 1 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Use these buttons to call up the Lyric display, from which you can input lyrics. From the Lyric display (page 45), enter the new word, “(your name).” Lyrics Events Parameter Name (Song name) Lyrics Code (Other controls) Description Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name. Allows you to enter lyrics. CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics. Customizing the Event List — Filter This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list, remove the checkmark so that the box is empty. To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or LYRICS (page 103 - page 105). Calls up the Main Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Calls up the Control Change Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Enters checkmarks for all items. A F B G C H D I E J Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). END Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa. Selects the item, scrolling up/down one item at a time. 1 EXIT Selects only note data; checkmarks for all other boxes are removed. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected item. When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER” is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time. PF-1000 105 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just as with the preset styles. ACMP AUTO FILL IN BREAK INTRO OTS LINK MAIN A B D C LCD CONTRAST ENDING/rit. SYNC.STOP SYNC.START BACK MENU DEMO HELP STYLE CONTROL A F B G C H START/STOP NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF BREAK MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP METRONOME INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C DSP PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP D STYLE CONTROL EXIT PART SYNC.START 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TAP TEMPO RESET RESET TEMPO TRANSPOSE VARIATION HARMONY/ ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD 1 ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG MIN REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP DIGITAL RECORDING BRASS PART 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING USER FREEZE 1 2 VOICE 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY About Creating Accompaniment Styles The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create. Section Channel INTRO A - D MAIN A - D ■ Realtime Recording (page 108) FILL IN A - D You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself — you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your own custom style. BREAK RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2 ENDING A - D For information on the part structure of accompaniment styles, see page 92. Realtime Recording Characteristics • Loop recording Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded. • Overdub recording This feature lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specifically delete it yourself. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new material while hearing the previous parts. ■ Step Recording (page 109) This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play. ■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 110) This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8 Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one accompaniment style. ■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 111) With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles. 106 PF-1000 8Beat 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 60’s 8 Beat Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 8Beat 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. By using the edit functions, you can take full advantage of the SFF format and freely create your own styles. The chart at right indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm channels.)The basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the original style data. This source pattern is recorded using accompaniment style recording (see below). As shown in the chart at right, the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter settings and chord changes (played in Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard) entered to this source pattern. These are the patterns recorded to the accompaniment styles (page 114). Source Pattern 1 Source Root (root note of basic chord) 2 Source Chord (type of basic chord) Chord changes (in Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard) This data is created by chords played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (page 62). Pitch Conversion 3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) 4 NTT (Note Transposition Table) These settings are edited from the PARAMETER display. These parameters determine how the pitch of the source pattern is converted when you play chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (page 114). Other Settings 5 High Key (threshold of the pitch conversion) 6 Note Limit (soundable range) 7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of the chord change) Output Operation 1 Select the desired accompaniment style for editing. To record a new accompaniment style from scratch, call up the BASIC page in the Style Creator display and select “New Style” by pressing the [C] button. 3 A B C D 2 DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR E DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page. BACK F G NEXT Use the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons to select the various pages. H I J 5 Call up the Style display by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (in Assembly page: [J] button), then save the recorded / edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page. END Press the [EXIT] button to close the STYLE CREATOR display. PF-1000 107 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Realtime Recording — Basic You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107. 1 Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button. Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC Display” on page 109) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button. Calls up the display for changing the tempo or beat (time signature). Selects an empty style, allowing you to create a new style from scratch. A B C D E Available only when the channel is set to [RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete specific percussion sounds during recording. Simultaneously hold down this button and press the key corresponding to the instrument you want to delete. REC.... Channel is enabled for recording. ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback. OFF .... Channel is muted. 2 First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the percussion instruments assigned to the keys. 3 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button again. END 108 When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over channels containing data. To delete data from a specific channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button. To release or cancel the selection, press the [1▼] [8▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to F cancel. As long as you continue to hold down the [J] G button, you can toggle H between deleting and restoring the selected data. I Releasing the [J] button permanently deletes the J data. Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. PF-1000 With the REC CHANNEL display shown, close the display by pressing the [EXIT] button. If you’ve enabled Sync Start (by pressing the SYNC. START button), you can start recording by simply pressing a key on the keyboard. • Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected for the RHY 2 channel. • For the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), all voices with the exception of the Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected. Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Other Parameters in the BASIC Display [I] (SAVE) button Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data. [3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons Determines the section to be recorded. [5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill In/Break section is fixed at a length of one measure. [D] (Execute) button Executes the Pattern Length change. You can also select the desired section for recording by pressing the appropriate panel button. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display, from which you can change sections by using the [6▲▼]/ [7▲▼] buttons. To actually enter the change, press the [8▲] button. To select the Fill In section, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button. Recording — Precautions • The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord. All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source chord. When C R C C R C recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of CM7), keep the C = chord note following points in mind: C, R = recommended note * When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.) * When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.) The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 114. • When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to “HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINER” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts. Step Recording With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107. F G H I J The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 94), with the exception of the points described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 103). • In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen. • When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change, etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.). Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 108) beforehand. PF-1000 109 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns — from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107. 1 These let you select the accompaniment style that will be used for each channel of your original style. Select the desired channel by pressing the [A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same button to call up the Style screen, from which you can select the accompaniment style. After repeating steps 1 and 2 as desired, press the [J] (SAVE) button to save the assembled style data. From here, you can store the settings of all channels (RHYTHM1, RHYTHM2, BASS, etc.) to a single accompaniment style. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 Selects the style section and channel that will be copied to the corresponding channels, selected with the [A]-[D] and [F]-[I] buttons above. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 If you change the section and channel in steps #1 and #2, the currently specified section and channel are also changed. The channels being recorded are also changed and recording is stopped automatically. The PLAY TYPE parameter affects only the playback, and does not change the actual accompaniment style data. Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and channel that will be copied are playing. SOLO ........... Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display (page 108) are played back simultaneously. ON ............... Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 108) are played back simultaneously. OFF .............. Mutes the selected channel. If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 108), OFF does not appear and is not available. 110 PF-1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Edit the Created Accompaniment Style Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107. ■ Groove Use these to select the desired edit operation. A F B G C H D I E J Executes the Groove operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Groove results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data. Determines the settings for each of the Groove parameters (see the list below). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Groove parameters Original Beat Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat”, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat —but not including the first beat — will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. PF-1000 111 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator ■ Dynamics Use these to select the desired edit operation. A F B G C H D I E J Executes the Dynamics operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. 1 2 3 Select the desired channel to which Dynamics is to be applied. 4 5 6 7 Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data. 8 Determines the settings for each of the Dynamics parameters (see the list below). Dynamics parameters Accent Type Selects the type of accent. Strength Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. 112 Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. PF-1000 Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard. The more strongly you play the keyboard, the higher the velocity value and, hence, the louder the sound. Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Editing the Channel Data In this display, there are five different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107. See the explanations below. Preset channel BASSPHRASE2 can not be edited. ■ Quantize Refer to page 100. ■ Velocity Change Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL) buttons), according to the specified percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons). ■ Bar Copy This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. ■ Bar Clear This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared. ■ Remove Event This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons to select the desired event type to be removed. PF-1000 113 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 107. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 107. When NTR is set to “Root Fixed” and NTT is set to “Bypass,” the “Source Root” and “Source Chord” parameters are changed to “Play Root” and “Play Chord,” respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels. See the explanations below. ■ Source Root/Chord These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 109. When the Source Root is C: C6 CMaj CM711 CM7 CM79 C9 C69 C C R C C R C R C C C R Cm Caug R C R Cm711 C R C C7 5 C C C C C C C C R C R C R C C C C C C C1+5 C C C C R C C C C C R C C C C R C C C C C C R C C C C C C R C C C R C C C = chord note C, R = recommended note R C C C R C C C C79 Csus2 Csus4 C R C C7sus4 C713 C C C R C R C C R R C C C C C7 C C C R C Cm79 C C C79 C C R C C R C R C R C C R R C C R R C C C Cm9 C C713 C C R C C R Cdim7 C R C C1+8 C7aug CM7aug C C C R C Cdim C711 C79 C R C C C C C C C Cm75 C R C C CmM79 R C C R C Cm7 C R C C R C C C R C C C CmM7 C C R C R C Cm6 C R C R C C R C C R ■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table) • NTR (Note Transposition Rule) This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available. Root Trans (Root Transpose) When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. Root Fixed The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. 114 PF-1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator • NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available. Bypass No transposition. Melody Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Chord Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. Bass Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes onbass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines. Melodic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Harmonic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. ■ High Key/Note Limit • High Key This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the octave just below the highest key. This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (page 114) is set to “Root Trans.” • Note Limit This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sound). The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range. Example — When the highest key is F Root changes CM CM Notes played C3-E3-G3 C 3-F3-G 3 FM F3-A3-C4 FM F 2-A 2-C 3 Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 Root changes CM CM FM 3-C4 E3-G3-C4 F3-G F3-A3-C4 Notes played High Limit Low Limit ■ RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. Stop The notes stop sounding. Pitch Shift The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. Pitch Shift to Root The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. Retrigger The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. Retrigger To Root The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. PF-1000 115 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound. MIXING CONSOLE Mixing Console This set of controls lets you adjust the balance of the voices and their stereo position, as well as the amount of effect that is applied to each voice. LCD CONTRAST BACK MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION PART DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF NEW SONG ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C DSP PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MONO LEFT HOLD 1 GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 2 3 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 TAP TEMPO RESET STYLE CONTROL HARMONY/ ECHO ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION EXIT PART SYNC.START START/STOP VARIATION VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS INTRO REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE AUTO FILL IN BRASS RESET TEMPO TRANSPOSE PART USER FREEZE 1 2 VOICE You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button (page 61). Operation 1 MIXING CONSOLE PART From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the button switches among the displays listed below. PANEL PART Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/ Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song, microphone input STYLE PART Accompaniment parts SONG CH 1 - 8 Channels 1 - 8 of song playback SONG CH 9 -16 Channels 9 - 16 of song playback 2 Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters. For information on the various parameters and settings and how to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 117. You can quickly and easily set all parts to the same value for the same parameter (except for the VOICE parameter). Simultaneously hold down the [A] [J] button that corresponds to the parameter you want to change and use the [1] [8] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial to change the value. n For details on parameters related to the Sound Creator, see page 86. END Close the Mixing Console display by pressing the [EXIT] button. ■ About the parameters • VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 117) This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 149) with the rich and dynamic voices that are exclusive to the PF-1000. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your song playback. • FILTER (page 118) These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound. • TUNE (page 118) These give you various tuning controls. • EFFECT (page 119) These control the amount of effect applied to the sound. 116 PF-1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116. 1 Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special voices of the PF-1000. To use the normal XG voice set, turn this off. Use these to select the VOICE, PANPOT, or VOLUME parameter rows. Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR A F B G C H D I E J Allows you to select the specific voice to be replaced. DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE PART CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PART When playing GM song data, channel 10 (in the SONG CH 9 - 16 page) can only be used for a Drum Kit voice. When changing the rhythm/ percussion voices (drum kits, etc.) of the accompaniment style and song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the song and playing back from that point. In the case of accompaniment style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same style again. These let you select the voice of each part, and adjust the panpot and volume. VOICE Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 54). When the Style/Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected. PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right. VOLUME Determines the level of each channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. ALL REVOICE Replaces all of the replaceable XG voices with the rich and authentic voices of the PF-1000. 2 F G PIANO REVOICE Replaces only the piano voices. H I J PIANO and BASIC can be called up simultaneously. Keep in mind that using the Revoice function may result in unnatural or unexpected sound, depending on the particular song data. BASIC REVOICE Replaces only the recommended voices that are suitable for playing back the song. ALL NO REVOICE All the voices are returned to the original XG voices. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Executes the settings and closes the Auto Revoice Setup display. Selects the XG voices to be replaced (voices usually used when playing back) Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices (when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON). Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without executing the settings. PF-1000 117 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116. Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters. Each press of this button switches among the various parts/ channels. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR For details about the Filter, see page 88. n A F B G C H D I E J When a Natural voice is selected, Harmonic and Brightness cannot be changed. n Be careful with these controls. Depending on the selected voice, extreme settings may result in noise or distortion. DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE PART CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HARMONIC .........Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (see “Harmonic Content” on page 88). BRIGHTNESS .....Determines the brightness of the sound by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 88). PART Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116. Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING. A F B G C H D I E J Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from one note to the next. When a Natural voice is selected, Portamento Time cannot be changed. Refer to the explanation below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units. MASTER... Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback. SONG ....... Transposes the pitch of the song playback. KBD .......... Transposes the pitch of the keyboard. PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 58, 87), this determines the Portamento time. The higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). PITCH BEND RANGE ...........When the Pitch Bend or Glide effect is assigned to the pedal, this determines the range of the pitch change in semitones. OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument. 118 PF-1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Adjusting the Effects The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116. 1 Each press of this button switches among the various parts/ channels. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR Indicates the type name for each effect block. Press this to edit and store the effect (page 119, 120). A F B G C H D I E J There are three effect sections: Reverb, Chorus, and DSP (which contains a variety of effect types). These are available independently for the Natural voices and Regular voices. For details, refer to the Effect Block list (page 120). DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE PART CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Switches among the effect sections: REVERB, CHORUS, and DSP. PART Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 120. When the BLOCK parameter is set to REVERB1, CHORUS1, or DSP1, press this to call up the display from which you can change the detailed settings for the effects. 2 F G H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect. BLOCK............ Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects). PART ............... Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only when the block is set to “DSP1” and the CONNECTION parameter is set to “Insertion” (page 120). CATEGORY..... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This parameter may not be available depending on the selected block. TYPE ............... Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block. PF-1000 119 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console 3 A F B G C H D I E J Calls up the display for storing the effect. This parameter cannot be set when BLOCK is set to “REVERB2,” “CHORUS2,” or “DSP2” (or “BRILLIANCE”). Determines the level of the effect (return level). This is not available when BLOCK is set to “DSP1,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and VALUE is set to “Insertion.” Switches between the upper/lower parameters. For the lower parameter, the depth can be changed when the [VARIATION] button is on. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the value of the selected parameter. Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted. Determines the effect block. Determines the effect category. Determines the effect type. 4 F Calls up the display for naming the User Effect (page 45). G Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect parameters while playing the instrument. H I J Select the destination to which the effect is to be stored. The number of memory spaces available for the destination differs for each block (refer to the chart below). Stores the effect settings you made above to a User Effect location (SYSTEM) for future recall. To call up the effect, select USER from the CATEGORY parameter and select the desired effect from the TYPE parameter. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Effect Block 120 Block Parts REVERB 1 (for Regular Voices) All parts REVERB 2 (for Natural Voices) All parts except microphone (MIC) CHORUS 1 (for Regular Voices) All parts CHORUS 2 (for Natural Voices) All parts except microphone (MIC) DSP 1 (for Regular Voices) Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16), MIC DSP 2 (for Natural Voices) All parts except microphone (MIC) BRILLIANCE (for Natural Voices) All parts except microphone (MIC) PF-1000 Characteristics Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously. In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this section features a variety of special effects, including distortion. Changes the brightness and clarity of the sound. Number of User Effect 3 — 3 — 3 — — Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Effect Structure The PF-1000 features the following digital effect systems, which can be applied independently for the Natural voices (page 86) and the Regular voices (page 86). The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set with the panel controls. • Reverb .......... Normally the settings that fit the selected style are called up. For most of the Natural voices, settings that fit the voice are called up. • Chorus.......... Normally the settings that fit the selected style are called up. For most of the Natural voices, settings that fit the voice are called up. • DSP .............. Normally the settings which fit the selected voice are called up. Variation (settings in which the expression of the effect is changed) is prepared for each type, and it can be turned ON/OFF by the [VARIATION] button on the panel. When the Natural voice is selected, the [VARIATION] button does not work. The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send/return controls set on the PF-1000. For Regular Voices (REVERB1, CHORUS1, DSP1) For Natural Voices (REVERB2, CHORUS2, DSP2) When DSP is set as an Insertion effect (here, PART is set to MAIN), it is put here in the signal flow. (For Natural voices, DSP can only be used as a System effect.) Dry MAIN VOICE DSP DRY LINE Reverb Return REVERB Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send Dry LAYER VOICE Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send Chorus Return CHORUS Dry LEFT VOICE BRILLIANCE OUT (Natural Voices only) Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send Dry MIC Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send Dry STYLE/SONG (each channel) Rev Send Cho Send DSP Return DSP Send DSP When DSP is set as a System effect, it is put here in the signal flow. (For Natural voices, DSP can only be used as a System effect.) PF-1000 121 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These sophisticated functions let you customize the PF-1000 to your own musical needs and preferences. LCD CONTRAST BACK FUNCTION MENU DEMO HELP A F B G C H NEXT VOICE PART ON/OFF LAYER LEFT FUNCTION DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR D I E J MUSIC FINDER ENTER DATA ENTRY FADE IN/OUT POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE SWING & JAZZ R&B COUNTRY LATIN MARCH & WORLD WALTZ BALLROOM PIANIST USER EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2 STYLE L DIGITAL RECORDING TRACK1 R AUTO FILL IN REC OTS LINK START/STOP TOP REW FF BREAK MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP INTRO ENDING/rit. MAIN A B C E.PIANO SYNC.STOP SYNC.START CHANNEL ON/OFF SONG START/STOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BRASS RESET TEMPO HARMONY/ ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD 1 ORGAN & ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS PIANO WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG 2 3 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING 8 TAP TEMPO RESET VARIATION EXIT PART SYNC.START D STYLE CONTROL METRONOME DSP PIANO & HARPSI. VOICE EFFECT BALANCE REPEAT DIRECT ACCESS NEW SONG MIN REVERB MIXING CONSOLE STYLE ACMP PART TRANSPOSE VOICE USER FREEZE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY REGISTRATION MEMORY Operation 1 MENU DEMO 2 Select the desired function. HELP FUNCTION END To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT] button. A F B G C H D I E J 3 Set the parameters of the selected function. The operations for each function are covered in the following explanations. Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning — Master Tune and Scale Tune ■ Master Tune (page 124) This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. ■ Scale Tune (page 124) This determines the particular tuning system (or temperament) for the instrument. This is especially useful for playing period pieces, to match the tuning system used during specific musical eras. Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 126) These allow you to set parameters related to song playback. Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering ■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 127) These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point. ■ Chord Fingering (page 128) This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display. 122 PF-1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller ■ Pedal (page 128) These settings determine how the connected pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches) are used. They can be assigned to a variety of functions, letting you control operations with your feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/off, or triggering Fill In patterns. ■ Keyboard / Panel (page 130) These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the keyboard (how touch affects volume), and let you independently transpose the keyboard, song data, and the entire instrument. Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ■ Registration Sequence (page 131) This determines the order in which the Registration Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal. ■ Freeze (page 131) This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. ■ Voice Set (page 132) This lets you determine whether certain voice-related settings (such as Effects, EQ, Harmony, etc.) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. Setting Harmony and Echo (page 132) These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the amount of effect. Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV — Video Out (page 133) These settings determine the display characteristics when outputting the PF-1000’s display contents to a TV monitor (connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal). You can set the size and color of the displayed characters, as well as the color of the display background. Making MIDI Settings ■ System (page 134) These determine various system messages settings (such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well as Local Control on/off. ■ Transmit (page 135) This determines how playback data is sent to connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over each channel. ■ Receive (page 136) This determines how the parts of the PF-1000 respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be received over each channel. ■ Root (page 136) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root notes, for use with the auto accompaniment. ■ Chord Detect (page 136) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the chords, for use with the auto accompaniment. Other Settings — Utility ■ Config 1 (page 137) This page contains settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound. ■ Config 2 (page 138) From this page, you can adjust the display, make speaker settings, and change the voice number indication. ■ Disk (page 139) From this page, you can format disks, and copy from disk to disk. ■ Owner (page 140) From this page, you can set the language of the instrument, and input your own name — which is shown automatically every time the power is turned on. ■ System Reset (page 140) This function restores the PF-1000 to its original factory settings. You can also specify which types of settings are to be restored, as well as store your own original settings for future recall. PF-1000 123 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune Hz (Hertz) This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound, and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. n The Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Determines the overall pitch of the PF-1000, from 414.8 - 466.8 Hz. Press the 4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz. 8 Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune Cent A unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone). n Selects which parts should be affected by the scale setting. Select the part to be set by pressing 6 or 7 [▲/▼] and set the function ON or OFF by pressing [8▲/▼]. You can register your original scale tunings to a REGISTRATION MEMORY button. To do this, checkmark “SCALE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display (page 82). Determines the Scale (page 125). 1 Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. 124 PF-1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 Selects the note to be tuned. 8 Adjusts the scale tuning of the selected note. [4▲/▼] : in 50-cent steps [5▲/▼] : in 1-cent steps (–64 through +63) Press the 4 or 5 [▲/▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting. When you adjust the scale tuning, the scale template name shown at the top of the display will change to “EDITED SCALE” indicating some adjustment has been done from the preset scale template. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Scale ■ Equal Temperament The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. ■ Pure Major/Pure Minor These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing. ■ Pythagorean This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. ■ Mean-Tone This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. ■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. ■ Arabic Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C) The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument. C C D E E F F G A A B B Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2 Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2 Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7 Arabic1 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 Arabic2 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 PF-1000 125 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Allows you to play back all songs from the same folder continuously. Turns Quick Start on/off (see note). A F B G C H D I E J Quick Start On some commercially available song data, certain settings related to the song (such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the PF-1000 reads all initial non-note data of the song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Channel Refers to the MIDI channel (page 147). The channels are assigned as follows: Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 n Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK2] button. Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK1] button. Determines whether the Phrase Mark Repeat function for the song is on or off. When this is on, you can repeatedly play back a specified phrase (selection of measures) of the song. The method for specifying a phrase mark is the same as that in the SONG POSITION display (page 76). Determines the language of the displayed lyrics. When this is set to “AUTO,” the language defaults to that of the song data. When not set to “AUTO,” the language defaults to Japanese, when the internal setting (page 140) is “JAPANESE”; for all other languages, this is set to “INTERNATIONAL.” When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper Track 1 and Track 2 channels. Normally, this should be set to “ON.” 126 PF-1000 Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting and Split Point F G H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These select the part to which the split point About Section Set setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand range, or both. Press the desired key for the split When any of the Main A-D sections is not included in point while holding down one of these buttons. The pressed key is included in the range for the the accompaniment style data, the nearest section is Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard automatically selected. For (ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT). example, when Main D is not A+L (ACMP + LEFT) contained in the selected Allows you to simultaneously set the split accompaniment style, Main point for both the left-hand range and the C will be called up. Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. L (LEFT) Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard. A (ACMP) Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the lefthand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these buttons by themselves to set the split point value. Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped). Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). The PF-1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 65) simply by quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time. This applies to the OTS Link function, in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up with changes in the section. This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the section. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.) Real Time One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button. Next Bar One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a section button. Split point can be set in the MAIN display. Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to “ON,” you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords — even when the accompaniment style is not playing back. About Split Point Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto Accompaniment section (ACMP) and left-hand section (LEFT) from the right-hand section (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than the LEFT split point. Split point (A) Auto Accompaniment section Split point (L) Right-hand Left-hand section section Split point (A) + (L) Auto Accompaniment section + Left-hand section Right-hand section PF-1000 127 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below). The chord indication in the display applies to the Fingered method, regardless if another method is actually selected. Indicates the note that belongs to a chord. Some notes can be omitted. The chord name is indicated next to “CHORD NAME.” ...Required ...Can be omitted ...Either note can be omitted ...Can be omitted when the note indicated by is omitted 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Chord Tutor The Chord Tutor feature is essentially an electronic “chord book” that shows you appropriate fingerings for chords; it is useful when you want to play certain chords. Simply specify the desired chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons, and the fingerings for the Fingered method are indicated in the display. 8 Determines the fingering type (page 62). This lets you change the chord type. Indicates the note that belongs to a chord in the music. This lets you change the root note from the chord. Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Making Settings for the Pedals Determines the particular pedal to which a function is to be assigned. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 Determines the function to be assigned to the selected pedal. Any one of the available functions can be assigned to each pedal. For information on the assignable functions, see “Pedal-controllable Functions” on page 129. 128 PF-1000 3 4 5 6 7 8 If necessary, you can turn the corresponding part ON/ OFF or set the control depth (see the next page). Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the [AUX PEDAL] jack. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Pedal-controllable Functions VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (AUX pedal only) to control the volume. SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the first note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to certain voices — PIANO, for example. GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 118). It does not work for Natural voices. PITCHBEND* Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed. MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed. This does not work for the Natural voices. DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button. This does not work for the Natural voices. VIBROTOR ON/OFF Turns the “VibRotor” effect type (page 119) on and off. This only works for the Natural voices. HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button. SCORE PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page (one page only). SCORE PAGE- While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page (one page only). SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button. SYNCRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button. INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button. MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button. MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button. MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button. MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button. FILL DOWN A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing. BREAK Break starts playing. FILL UP A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button. FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button. FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 62). BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the fingering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button. LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button. OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting. OTS- Calls up the previous One Touch Setting. * For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller. The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display. SONG, STYLE, MIC, LEFT, LAYER, MAIN These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal. HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the right pedal until the damper effect (page 58) starts working. DEPTH Determines the depth of the left pedal effect, when SOFT is selected. This only works for the Natural voices. UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released. KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal. PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal. * For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller. PF-1000 129 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel Keyboard Touch The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences. HARD 2 Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a heavy touch. HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for higher volume. A B C NORMAL Standard touch response. D SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate playing strength. SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch. E Determines the fixed volume level when Touch is set to “OFF.” Determines the Touch sensitivity setting (refer to the table at right). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep in mind that you can set each voice to a different touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can set this so that the voice is not affected by touch (page 87). Determines whether touch is on or not for the corresponding parts. Transpose Assign This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button. Transpose Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices, accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units. 1 Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons. RESET TRANSPOSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SONG For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of the songs. MASTER For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the entire instrument (keyboard voices, accompaniment styles, and songs). The transpose function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices. PF-1000 A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE ASSIGN, appears. 3 Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons. 8 KEYBOARD For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and the accompaniment styles. 130 2 END Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the [EXIT] button. • Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song These settings can be used to match both the song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song. The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data down to your comfortable singing key. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets — Registration Sequence You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play. Indicates the file name of the selected Registration Memory bank. Determines which pedal is used to advance (increment) through the sequence. Determines which pedal is used to reverse (decrement) through the sequence. A F B G C H D I n E J When both “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set to “OFF,” the pedals cannot be used to step through the Registration Sequence; only the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons can be used in the MAIN display. Determines how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence. Stop Pressing the [NEXT] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” Top The sequence starts again at the beginning. Next Bank The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory bank in the same folder. 1 2 3 4 5 6 These move the cursor position in the sequence. 7 8 Turns the Registration Sequence function on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the programmed Registration Sequence is shown at the top right of the Main display, and you can step through the sequence in this display by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedals. n When both “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set to the same pedal, “Regist (+) Pedal” takes priority. Deletes all Registration Memory numbers in the sequence. Deletes the number at the cursor position. Indicates the Registration Memory preset numbers, in the order of the current Registration Sequence. Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory preset immediately before the cursor position. Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. END Setting Registration Sequence Enable to “ON” overrides any other Pedal settings (for pedals assigned to “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” here). These include the pedal settings on page 128, and in Voice Set on page 132. Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. Registration Sequence data is included as part of the Registration Memory bank file. To save your newly programmed Registration Sequence, store the current Registration Memory bank file (page 38, 44). Any Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory banks, unless you’ve stored it with the Registration Memory bank file. Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. For details, see page 84. PF-1000 131 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set When changing voices (selecting a voice file), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page , you can set the on/off status for each part. For example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to "OFF" in this page. Normally, these should all be set to "ON." A Use these to select the desired part. B C D Harmony/Echo and Left pedal assignment cannot be set for the Layer and Left parts. E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings (Voice selection, Effects, Harmony/Echo, and left pedal assignment) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part. Setting Harmony and Echo The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). Determines the Harmony type. For details, see page 133. 1 2 3 4 5 Determines the level of the Harmony effect. Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. 132 PF-1000 6 7 8 When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that belongs to a chord played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. This parameter is not available when Multi Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. This lets you assign the Harmony effect to various parts. For details, see page 133. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function About the Harmony Types When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected Split point Harmony notes (based on the chord and the selected type) are automatically added to the melody played to the right of the split point. Chords played to the left of the split point control the harmony. When “Multi Assign” is selected Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the first is played by the Main voice and the second by the Layer voice. When “Echo” is selected An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo. When “Tremolo” is selected A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo. When “Trill” is selected Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo. About the Harmony Assignments Multi This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice. Main Harmony is applied only to the Main part. Layer Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied. Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV — Video Out The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Television VIDEO IN Set this to correspond to the standard used by your particular television/video equipment: NTSC or PAL. VIDEO OUT 1 2 Set this to “SMALL” if the contents of the display do not fit in your monitor screen. 3 4 5 6 7 8 • Occasionally some flashing parallel lines may appear in the television or video monitor. This does not necessarily indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning. You may be able to remedy the situation by changing the Character Color or Background Color parameters. For optimum results, also try adjusting the color settings on the monitor itself. • Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight. Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain. • Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as recommended here, the monitor you are using may not show the PF-1000’s display contents as expected (e.g., the display contents may not fit on the screen, the characters may not be completely clear, or the colors may be incorrect). Determines the background color of the display. Determines the colors of the characters displayed on the video screen. PF-1000 133 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the MIDI Parameters In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the USER display, for future recall. For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 145). The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set) A F B G C H D I E J 1 3 2 3 4 Call up the User display and press this button to save the newly edited MIDI settings. Up to ten setups can be saved. END 5 2 6 7 8 1 Select the desired template. Call up the Edit display, then select and set the desired functions/parameters. For details about each of the MIDI edit displays, see the following pages. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer and Left. Master KBD The PF-1000 functions as a master keyboard for controlling external tone generators or other devices. KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play instead of the individual parts (Main/Layer/Left). Song All Transmit channels are set to correspond to the Song channels 1-16. Use this to play the PF-1000 song data with an external tone generator, or to record your entire performance to an external sequencer. Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and PF-1000 synchronizes with a external MIDI device. MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the keyboard voice and accompaniment style with a MIDI accordion. MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI accordion control the accompaniment style, as well as play the chord and bass parts. MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal controls the bass note of the accompaniment. MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal plays the bass part. MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor received. The saved settings can be named (page 41) or deleted (page 43) in the User page. Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System Call up the display as described in step 2 above. For editing the Local Control parameters. For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop parameters. For editing the Message Switch parameters. Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PF-1000 controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PF-1000’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PF-1000’s internal voices, and use the PF-1000 keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. 134 PF-1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop ■ Clock Determines whether the PF-1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PF-1000 is being used alone. If you are using the PF-1000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PF-1000 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the PF-1000 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal. ■ Transmit Clock Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is transmitted. ■ Receive Transpose When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PF-1000 is not transposed, and when it is set to “ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PF-1000 keyboard transpose (page 130) setting. ■ Start/Stop Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or style playback. FA, FC MIDI messages for starting/stopping the song or style. The “FA” message corresponds to start, and “FC” corresponds to stop. Message Switch SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF. SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and type) ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE).......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF. Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. A B C Determines the channel for changing transmit settings. D The dots corresponding to each channel (1-16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). E Determines the Part for the selected channel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns transmission of the specified data type on or off. See below for details on the data types. Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display Note Control Change (CC) Program Change (PC) Pitch Bend (PB) After Touch (AT)* Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data. Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers. See page 129. With this function, the PF-1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique. * Available in RECEIVE display only (page 136). PF-1000 135 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Receiving MIDI Data — Receive This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received. The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal (Port A of the CBX driver) correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO HOST terminal (Port B of the CBX driver) corresponds to channels 17 - 32. A B C Determines the channel for changing receive settings. D E The dots corresponding to each channel (1 - 32) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). Determines the Part for the selected channel. See below for details about the receive parts. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns reception of the specified data type on or off. See page 135 for details on the data types. MIDI Receive Parts OFF SONG MAIN LAYER LEFT KEYBOARD ACMP RHYTHM1-2 ACMP BASS ACMP CHORD1-2 ACMP PAD ACMP PHRASE1-2 EXTRA PART1-5 No MIDI data is received. Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16 correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively. The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. MIDI note data received by the PF-1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard. The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 notes. The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS notes. The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 notes. The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD notes. The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 notes. There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. When these five channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator. Setting Root Note Channels — Root The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal (Port A of the CBX driver) correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO HOST terminal (Port B of the CBX driver) corresponds to channels 17 - 32. A Selects the channels in groups of eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25 - 32, respectively. B C D E When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the root note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sets all channels to OFF. Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the ROOT display above. 136 PF-1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Other Settings — Utility The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122. Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1 Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out. Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 5.0 seconds). Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). Metronome These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters. Determines the level of the metronome sound. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines which sound is used for the metronome. Bell Off ........................ Conventional metronome sound, with no bell. Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell. English Voice .............. Count in English (One, Two, Three, Four) German Voice.............. Count in German (Eins, Zwei, Drei, Vier) Japanese Voice........... Count in Japanese (Ichi, Ni, San, Shi) French Voice ............... Count in French (Un, Deux, Trois, Quatre) Spanish Voice ............. Count in Spanish (Uno, Dos, Tres, Cuatro) Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. When you start the song or accompaniment style, the values matching to them are automatically set. PF-1000 137 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Parameter Lock This function is used to “lock” the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls — in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or song and sequence data. Selects the desired parameter for locking/ unlocking. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether the selected parameter is locked (checkmarked) or unlocked (empty). Tap Count This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 51). Determines the particular sound used for the Tap Start function. Any drum or percussion sound in the Standard Kit (page 55) can be selected. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the level of the tap sound. Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System, and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2 HEADPHONE SW (SWITCH) Speaker sounds normally, but is cut off when headphones are inserted to the PHONES jack. ON Speaker sound is always on. OFF Speaker sound is off. Determines the brightness of the backlit display. 1 138 PF-1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether or not the voice bank and number are shown in the PRESET page of the VOICE display (page 54). This is useful when you want to check the proper bank select MSB/LSB values and program number to specify when selecting the voice from an external MIDI device. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk F G H • Copying cannot be done between a 2DD disk and 2HD disk. When copying, make sure both disk are the same type. • Depending on the amount of data contained in the original source disk, you may have to swap the two disks several times until all of the data is properly copied. • Make sure to read the section “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 6. This function copies all the data from one disk to another, letting you back up all your important data before editing. For instructions, see “Copying from Disk to Disk” below. I J This function formats a floppy disk (see below). Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to “ON,” the PF1000 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Copying from Disk to Disk As shown below, first copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PF-1000, then copy the data to the backup (destination) disk. 1 3 Press the [F] button. A message appears, prompting you to insert the source disk. At the “Please insert a destination disk and press the OK button ” prompt, eject the source disk and replace it with a blank, formatted disk, then press “OK.” To abort the operation, press “CANCEL.” 2 4 Internal memory Copy Insert the disk containing the original data into the drive and press “OK.” A “Now copying” message appears, and the PF-1000 begins copying data to internal memory. To abort the operation, press “CANCEL.” When the operation is finished (or when prompted), eject the destination disk. Source disk Copy Destination disk Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws. Copying commercially available data is strictly prohibited, except for your own personal use. Some music software is purposely copy-protected and cannot be copied. Formatting a Disk When using an unformatted disk for the first time, make sure to properly format it on the PF-1000. This includes blank disks as well as disks already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the disk. Disk Lamp When the power is turned on, the disk lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the DISK page above. The Format operation initializes a disk with a specific file system, allowing the corresponding device (in this case, the PF-1000) to access it properly. Since there are several types of formats and disks available, you should know which ones to use with the PF1000. 2DD disks are formatted to a capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks are formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB. CAUTION Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk. Make sure that the disk you’re formatting does not contain important data! PF-1000 139 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner F G H I J Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press this button to enter an Owner name (page 16; for instructions on naming see page 45). This name is automatically shown when you turn the power on. When “JAPANESE” is selected for the Language parameter, and you change this to one of the western languages, the kanji and kana characters of the file name stored in the disk drive are changed to western characters. In the opposite case, special Latin characters and marks are changed into normal characters. Also, in the case of floppy disk data, text in the files are changed to characters that cannot be read by the instrument. Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying to access files originating or edited by a computer having a different language operating system. In general, be careful when switching languages — you risk not being able to access the data properly. 8 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PF-1000 — System Reset This operation lets you restore the PF-1000 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI Setup, User Effect, Music Finder, and Files & Folders. Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. You can also restore only the System Setup settings by simultaneously holding down the highest key on the keyboard (C7) and turning on the power. Restores the MIDI templates to the original factory settings. Restores the User Effects (page 120) to the original factory settings. A F B G C H D I E J Restores the Music Finder data to the original factory settings. Deletes all files and folders stored in the User page. 1 2 Executes the Factory Reset operation for all items checkmarked above. 140 PF-1000 3 4 5 6 7 8 These call up the corresponding Open/Save displays. These let you store the corresponding data as files to disk, for future recall. Pressing each of these buttons calls up the corresponding Open/Save display, from which you can select the corresponding PRESET page. From this PRESET page, you can save the relevant data. The functions and settings below do not apply to the Factory Reset operation. However, you can restore these to their original settings by calling up the preset System Setup files, using the Open/Save System Files function. Language Owner Name LCD Brightness Video Out settings (NTSC/ PAL, Size, Character Color, Background Color) All Music Finder records can be stored together as a single file. When calling up a stored file, a message appears prompting you to replace or append the records as desired. Replace: All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file. Append: The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers. Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices CAUTION Before connecting the PF-1000 to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. P.142 P.142 P.142 4 3 5 VIDEO OUT AUX IN L/L+R AC INLET 1 AUX OUT L/L+R R PEDAL R PHONES POWER L LEVEL FIXED R AUX PEDAL ON MIDI HOST SELECT OUT 6 7 P.143 P.143 By connecting a microphone to the PF-1000, you can enjoy singing along with your own performance or song playback. (A dynamic microphone is recommended.) The PF-1000 outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the built-in speakers. 1 Connect your microphone to the MIC/LINE IN jack (standard 1/4" phone jack). OFF TO HOST MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac IN 2 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC/LINE IN jack). Use an unidirectional microphone for best results. THRU 8 2 Set the [MIC LINE] switch (located next to the [MIC/ LINE IN] jack) to the MIC position. P.143 MIC LINE INPUT VOLUME MIC/LINE IN MIN MIC LINE MIC LINE MAX When connecting a microphone When connecting a guitar 2 1 Using the Headphones (PHONES jacks). To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the left side of the keyboard. You can also determine whether or not the internal stereo speaker system is shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack (page 138). Two people can enjoy listening to the PF1000 together by connecting two pairs of headphones to the two jacks. You should set the [MIC LINE] switch to the LINE position when connecting an audio source with line-level output to the MIC/LINE IN jack. 3 Use the [INPUT VOLUME] knob (located next to the MIC/LINE IN jack) to set the microphone volume. INPUT VOLUME MIN MAX PF-1000 141 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices 345 Connecting Audio & Video Devices You can connect the PF-1000 to a wide range of audio equipment by using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks, which are located at the bottom left of the instrument. Connect as shown in the illustrations below using standard audio cables. 4 Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in speakers of the PF-1000 (AUX IN jacks) CAUTION When the PF-1000’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power of the external device, then that of the PF-1000. PF-1000 Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. AUX IN L/L+R R Tone generator CAUTION LINE OUT When the PF-1000 AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the PF-1000, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. 3 Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks) CAUTION Never connect the PF-1000 AUX OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks, either directly or via external audio equipment. Such connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage the PF-1000. PF-1000 Cassette tape recorder stereo system AUX OUT L/L+R R L LEVEL FIXED R RCA pin plug Phone plug (standard) To powered speaker When these are connected (with standard phone plugs), you can use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. Audio cable AUX IN RCA pin plug When these are connected (with RCA pin plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level, regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] control setting. Phone plug (standard) Audio cable • The PF-1000’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks. • If you connect the PF-1000 to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack. 5 Showing the display of the PF-1000 on a connected TV monitor (VIDEO OUT) You can connect the PF-1000 to a television or video monitor to display the lyrics in your song data or LCD on a larger screen. The size and color of the displayed characters can also be set, as well as the color of the display background (page 133). • For information on setting the video standard (NTSC or PAL), refer to page 133. The default setting is “PAL.” • Use an audio-video cable with good high-frequency characteristics and RCA-type pin jacks to connect the PF-1000 to a television or video monitor. RCA pin plug RCA pin plug VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN AUX IN L/L+R R Television • If you connect the PF-1000 to a monaural device, use only the AUX OUT L/L+R jack. 142 PF-1000 PF-1000 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices 6 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (AUX PEDAL jack) 8 Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal) By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the FC7) to the AUX PEDAL jack, you can control any one of a variety of important functions with your foot — such as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play (page 128). Connect your PF-1000 to computer and take advantage of the wide range of powerful and versatile software for creating and editing music. The PF-1000 can be connected in three ways. By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to this jack, you can replicate the function of some panel buttons, doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment. ■ Using the TO HOST terminal ■ Using the MIDI terminals ■ Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional USB interface (UX series) CAUTION Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is turned off. • You’ll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform. 7 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals) • When connecting the PF-1000 to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the PF-1000 and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of the computer first, then that of the PF-1000. Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the PF-1000. Make sure to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to MIDI when you use these connectors. For more information about connections, see “What You Can Do With MIDI” on page 147. • If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PF-1000, make sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable is left connected, the PF-1000 may not function properly. MIDI IN........... Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device MIDI OUT ....... Sends out MIDI messages generated by the PF-1000 MIDI THRU ..... Simply relays the MIDI messages received at MIDI IN For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to the following sections: • What’s MIDI? (page 145) • What You Can Do With MIDI (page 147) • MIDI functions (page 134) • When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” “PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST terminal. Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the PF-1000’s TO HOST terminal, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows). You can download this driver from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com • Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters. PF-1000 143 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices Using the TO HOST terminal Using the MIDI terminals Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PF-1000. For the connection cable, use the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that matches the personal computer type. When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PF-1000 with standard MIDI cables. If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250 bps.) • When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” PF-1000 MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN NEC MultiSync ■ IBM-PC/AT (Windows) PC-9821 AS NEC Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PF-1000 using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PF1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2.” (Data transfer rate is 38,400 bps.) PF-1000 NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS MINI DIN 8-pin D-sub 9-pin NEC HOST SELECT MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac MINI DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin * When using a D-SUB 25P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a DSUB9P plug adaptor on the computer side of the cable. ■ Macintosh PF-1000 MINI DIN 8-pin 144 PF-1000 PF-1000 MIDI IN RS422 MIDI OUT MINI DIN 8-pin HOST SELECT Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the particular software you are using. HOST SELECT • When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PF-1000, as shown in the diagram below. Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PF-1000 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the PF-1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “MAC” (Data transfer rate is 31,250 bps). MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac HOST SELECT MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac MINI DIN 8-pin • When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the TO HOST terminal is disabled. • When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the particular software you are using. Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices Using the USB terminal on your computer with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96/ UX16, etc.) Connect the UX256/UX96/UX16 and the computer with a USB cable. Install the included UX256/UX96/UX16 driver to the computer, and connect the UX256/UX96/UX16 to the PF-1000 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PF-1000 to “MIDI.” For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the UX256/UX96/UX16. Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a recording. When you playback a music CD (for example, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound (vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data. Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument (audio data) Recording Playback MIDI IN USB cable NEC MultiSync USB interface OUT PF-1000 MIDI IN PC-9821 AS MIDI OUT NEC Personal computer HOST SELECT MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant owner’s manuals. What’s MIDI? In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the actual piano performance. The piano itself is not necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them. Recording and playing back the performance of a digital instrument (MIDI data) Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Acoustic guitar note production Recording Playback Tone generator Sequencer Controller (keyboard, etc.) FD Digital instrument note production FD Internal amp L Tone generator (Electric circuit) Internal amp R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. PF-1000 145 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano, special recording equipment is needed. However, since the PF-1000 features a built-in sequencer that lets you record performance data, this recording equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument — the PF1000 — allows you to both record and play back the data. Tone generator Sequencer Keyboard performance (MIDI data) However, we also need a sound source to produce the audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The tone generator of the PF-1000 fills this function. The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument, such as guitar or violin. Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PF-1000 can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer. Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PF-1000 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. ■ Example Keyboard Data Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Panel operations on the PF-1000, such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs also consist of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The PF-1000 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data.The PF-1000 can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data: • The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI songs to floppy disk. • The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. ■ Channel Messages The PF-1000 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO HOST terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name PF-1000 Operation/Panel Setting Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting) Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc. The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI data. 146 PF-1000 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices MIDI channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel.Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 135). The PF-1000 also allows you to determine how the received data is played back. (page 136). ■ System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name PF-1000 Operation/Panel Setting System Exclusive Message Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc. Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation Weather Report News 1 2 News 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2 The PF-1000’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI (page 134). For example, several tracks (channels) can be transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as shown below). The messages transmitted/received by the PF-1000 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the separate Data List. What You Can Do With MIDI The following MIDI settings can be made on the PF1000: • MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various applications) (page 134) • Transmit (page 135) • Receive (page 136) • Local Control (page 134) • Clock (page 135) ■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PF-1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the PF-1000 (playback). Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PF-1000 to an external sequencer MIDI receive PF-1000 MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS NEC MIDI transmit MIDI cable or serial cable PF-1000 track (channnel) MAIN LAYER LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 External sequencer Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Personal cumputer, QY series etc. When you want to use the PF-1000 as an XG-compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI Receive (page 136). ■ Play and control the PF-1000 from a separate keyboard MIDI receive PF-1000 MIDI IN MIDI OUT PF-1000 147 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by PF-1000, and whether or not the PF-1000 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Disk format Sequence Format The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PF-1000 is compatible with the following formats. ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The PF-1000 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used.This operation is called “formatting.” • Song data recorded on the PF-1000 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0. • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. ■ ESEQ • PF-1000 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks. • When formatted by the PF-1000, a 2DD disk stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.) • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. • Song data loaded to the PF-1000 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original format. This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PF-1000 series instruments.This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. ■ XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) format with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. • The PF-1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. ■ Style File The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 148 PF-1000 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. The PF-1000 is compatible with the following formats. Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. ■ GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level1, as is most commercially available software. ■ XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. • Song data recorded on the PF-1000 using voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible. ■ DOC This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PF-1000 series instruments.This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software. PF-1000 149 Assembling the Keyboard Stand You can use the PF-1000 without installing the stand. However, if you wish to attach the stand to the PF-1000, follow the steps below. CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts. Make sure that you install all parts in the correct orientation. Assemble the stand in accordance with the steps below. • At least two persons should assemble the stand together. • Be sure to use the correct-size screws, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damages to the stand. • When you attach each part, be sure to tighten all screws. • Reverse the assembly procedure to disassemble the stand. 1 Attaching the front legs to the stand. 1 Place the stand on the floor so that the bottom side (with smaller holes) faces up. 2 2 Use a short screw to attach the bracket of the front right leg to the bottom side of the stand. 3 Use two long screws to fix the bracket of the front right leg to the front side of the stand. 3 Use the included wrench. 4 Attach the front left leg in the same way. Keyboard 2 Attaching the rear legs to the stand. 1 Remove the following parts from the package. Plate Stand 2 3 Attach the rear right leg in the same way. Rear left leg Front left leg Rear right leg Front right leg 3 Attaching the plate. Pedal unit AC power cord Screws Long screws (6x65mm) x 8 Cord holders x 2 Short screws (6x20mm) x 8 Cap bolts x 4 150 PF-1000 Wrench x 1 Align the holes on the plate with the holes of the rear side of the bracket on the rear legs, then fix them using four short screws. 1 Use a short screw to attach the bracket of the rear left leg to the bottom side of the stand. 2 Use two long screws to fix the bracket of the rear left leg to the rear side of the stand. Assembling the Keyboard Stand 4 Raising the stand to the standing position. 7 Connecting the pedal unit. 1 Place the pedal unit in front of the rear legs. Use the front legs as support to raise the stand. 2 PEDAL 3 CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers. 5 Mounting the keyboard. 2 Connect the pedal cord plug into the PEDAL jack on the left side of the keyboard, with the arrow on the plug facing up. 3 Attach the cord holders in the position shown in the illustration, and clip the pedal cord to the holders. * You can also clip the power cord to the cord holders. 8 Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord to the AC INLET on the keyboard. AC INLET VOLTAGE SELECTOR Be sure to hold the four corners of the keyboard. Mount the keyboard so that the rubber feet on the bottom of the keyboard fall into the holes on the stand. CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers or drop the keyboard. CAUTION Do not hold any part of the keyboard other than four corners as shown in the illustration. 6 Fixing the keyboard. Attach the cap bolts on the bottom of the stand and tighten them with your hand to fix the keyboard. Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector (provided in some locations). To set the selector for 110V, 130V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may also be provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the PF1000 or result in improper operation. After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are any parts left over? • Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the PF-1000 clear of doors and other movable fixtures? • Move the PF-1000 to an appropriate location. • Does the PF-1000 make a rattling noise when you shake it? • Tighten all screws. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? • Check the connections. • If the keyboard stand creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. PF-1000 151 Troubleshooting Problem 152 Possible Cause and Solution • The PF-1000 does not turn on; there is no power. Make sure that the PF-1000 has been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into the AC socket on the PF-1000, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet (page 16). • A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument. • Noise is heard from the PF-1000’s speakers. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PF-1000 may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the PF-1000. • The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature; try adjusting the contrast (page 17). • The keyboard volume is low compared to that of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback. The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 61). • The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback is low compared to that of the keyboard. The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display (page 117). • The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. • The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. • The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 61). • Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 61, 76). • Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. (This happens when the speaker setting is set to “HEADPHONE SW”; page 138.) Unplug the headphones. • Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 138). • Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 134). • The damper, sostenuto and soft functions do not work for the relevant pedals. Each pedal has been assigned to a different function. Make sure that each pedal is properly assigned to SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, and SOFT (page 128). • The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed. The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely insert the pedal plug into the proper jack (page 150 - 151). • Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PF-1000. When this happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. See page 154 for information on the maximum polyphony. • Accompaniment style or Song playback does not start. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 135). • Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an accompaniment style, press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button (page 61); to playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 74). • “New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an appropriate song in the SONG display (page 74). • The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 76). • Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button. • The accompaniment style does not start, even when Synchro Start is in standby condition and a key is pressed. You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment) range of the keyboard. • The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment. • You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 63). • You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode (page 62). PF-1000 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution • Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard. This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different fingering mode (page 62). • Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 124). • Some channels do not properly play back when playing back song data. Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 76). • The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 62). • The microphone input signal cannot be recorded. This is normal; recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible. • MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables are connected properly. Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI” (page 144). The MIDI terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings. • When a voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed. Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 132). • There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes played on the keyboard. • Some voices have a looping sound. • Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending upon the voice. This is normal and is a result of the PF-1000’s sampling system. • Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers. This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. • Even though a Registration Memory setting containing a User voice is selected, the Open/ Save display shows a Preset voice. This is normal; even with the Preset voice shown, the actual sounding voice is the selected User voice. When a User voice is registered to the User drive or floppy disk, the actual registered is: 1) the source Preset voice, and 2) the parameter settings as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a User voice, the PF-1000 selects the Preset voice (on which the User voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings to it — so that your original User voice is sounded. • Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1 megabyte of data to a floppy disk. • The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 118). • The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. • This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects (page 119). • Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 88) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary. • A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 56) or change the voice for each part (page 54). PF-1000 153 Specifications : available PF-1000 Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD Display Keyboard Voice 88 keys (A-1 - C7) Polyphony (max) 96 Voice Selection 308 voices + 480 XG voices + 16 Drum Kits Regular Voice 287 Sweet Voice 8 Cool Voice 2 Live Voice 1 Natural Voice 21 Sound creator Effects Effect Blocks Effect Types Reverb 2 Chorus 2 DSP 2 Brilliance 1 REVERB1 28+3 User REVERB2 5 CHORUS1 21+3 User CHORUS2 3 DSP1 101+3 User DSP2 12 Brilliance Accompaniment Style 5 Accompaniment Styles 194 Session Styles 12 Pianist Styles 36 Piano Combo Styles Fingering 17 Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard Style Creator OTS (One Touch Setting) Accompaniment Style OTS link Music Finder Approximately 2500 records Edit Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ Preset Songs Lyrics Score Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing Record Channels Memory Device Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD) Flash Memory (internal) Flash Availability Tempo 16 1MB Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc. Tempo Range 5 - 500 Tap Tempo Metronome Sound 154 PF-1000 Bell on/off, Human Voices (5 languages) Specifications PF-1000 Registration Memory Buttons 8 Regist Sequence Freeze Others Demo Function, Voice, Style Language 6 languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian) Help Direct Access Piano setting button (including Piano Lock) Master Volume Fade In/Out Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master Tuning Tuning Curve Flat/Stretch (Natural Piano Voice only) Scale Equal Temperament, Pure Major/Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean Tone, Werckmeister/Kirnberger, Arabic 1/2 Touch Response 5 level PHONES ✕ 2, MIDI (THRU, OUT, IN), TO HOST, HOST SELECT, AUX PEDAL, AUX IN (L/L+R), AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), AUX OUT (L/L+R) Jacks/Connectors MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC/LINE IN),VIDEO OUT Pedals Number of Pedals 3 Pedal Functions Amplifiers/ Speakers VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO, PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, VIBROTOR ON/OFF, SONG START/STOP, STYLE START/STOP, etc. Amplifiers 30 W ✕ 2 Speakers (16 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2 Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H] (without music rest, pedal unit) main unit 1430 ✕ 507 ✕ 165 mm [56-5/16" ✕ 19-15/16" ✕ 6-1/2"] main unit with keyboard stand 1430 ✕ 507 ✕ 782 mm [56-5/16" ✕ 19-15/16" ✕ 30-7/8"] Weight (without music rest, pedal unit) main unit 31 Kg [68 lbs., 5 oz] main unit with keyboard stand 43 Kg [94 lbs., 13 oz] * Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. PF-1000 155 Index Numerics 1 - 16 ................................................................................. 103 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 18, 38–45 A [A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 18, 40 [AC INLET] ..................................................................... 16, 19 Accessories ............................................................................ 6 Accompaniment style parts................................................... 92 [ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 60 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 116 Adjusting the display contrast ............................................... 17 Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 119 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 50 Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 61 Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels ... 76 Adjusting values ................................................................... 46 AI ......................................................................................... 62 AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 62 AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 62 Append ................................................................................ 71 Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 57 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style.................... 67 Arabic ................................................................................ 125 Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 64 Assembling an Accompaniment Style ................................. 110 Assembling the keyboard stand .......................................... 150 ATTACK ............................................................................... 88 AUTO .................................................................................. 20 Auto Revoice...................................................................... 117 [AUTO FILLIN] button.................................................... 18, 66 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections............................................................... 68 AUX IN [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................ 19, 142 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 142 AUX OUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks........................................ 19, 142 [AUX PEDAL] jack........................................................ 19, 143 B [BACK] button .......................................................... 18, 40, 46 [BALANCE] button ......................................................... 18, 61 Bar Clear ............................................................................ 113 Bar Copy ............................................................................ 113 Base note ........................................................................... 124 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 38 Bass...................................................................................... 92 BEAT .............................................................................. 70, 71 [BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 64 BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 88 C Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music ................................ 69 Cent ................................................................................... 124 Change the Rhythmic Feel.................................................. 111 Changing Pitch-related Settings .......................................... 118 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings .......... 132 Changing the Icon ................................................................ 46 Changing the Tone of the Voice ......................................... 118 Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose ................... 130 Channel ................................................. 61, 76, 100, 113, 126 Channel Messages .............................................................. 146 156 PF-1000 Channel Muting ....................................................................61 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................18, 61, 76 Channel Transpose .............................................................102 CHD ...................................................................................104 Chord ...................................................................................92 Chord Detect ......................................................................136 Chord Events.......................................................................104 Chord Fingering ............................................................62, 128 Chord Tutor ........................................................................128 Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode ....................63 Chorus ................................................................................121 Clock ..................................................................................135 COMMON ...........................................................................87 Compatible Song Types ........................................................73 CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................137 CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................138 Connect the power cord .......................................................16 Connecting Audio & Video Devices....................................142 Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................143 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar ................................141 Connecting to a Computer ..................................................143 Controller ...........................................................................128 Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) ............................45 Cool! ....................................................................................55 COPY ...................................................................................43 Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................139 Copying Files/Folders............................................................43 Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................139 Creating Accompaniment Styles..........................................106 Current Memory ...................................................................39 Customizing the Event List — Filter.....................................105 CUT......................................................................................42 D Damper pedal.................................................................19, 58 Data Compatibility..............................................................148 [DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................18, 46 Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........135 DECAY .................................................................................88 DELETE .................................................................................43 Delete.................................................................................101 DELETE RECORD..................................................................71 Deleting Files/Folders............................................................43 [DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 52 DEPTH..................................................................................88 Detailed Settings for Notation ...............................................79 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button........................14, 18, 90, 106 [DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................18, 47 Direct Access Chart ..............................................................48 Disk ....................................................................................139 Disk format .........................................................................148 Disk Orchestra Collection.....................................................19 Displaying Music Notation ...................................................78 Displaying the Lyrics.............................................................81 Displaying Upper Level pages...............................................44 DOC...................................................................................149 Drum ....................................................................................55 [DSP] button ...........................................................18, 57, 121 Dynamics ...........................................................................112 E ECHO ...........................................................................58, 132 Index EDIT ................................................................................... 109 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style ............................... 111 Editing a Recorded Song..................................................... 100 Editing Channel-related Parameters .................................... 100 Editing Chord Events .......................................................... 104 Editing Note Events ............................................................ 103 Editing Records .................................................................... 71 Editing System Events ......................................................... 104 Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 113 Editing Voices ...................................................................... 85 EFFECT ................................................................................. 89 Effect Block ........................................................................ 120 Effect Structure ................................................................... 121 Effects................................................................................. 119 EG ........................................................................................ 88 Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29 END Mark ............................................................................ 98 ENDING .............................................................................. 66 [ENDING / rit.] button .............................................. 18, 30, 65 [ENTER] button .............................................................. 18, 46 Entering Characters............................................................... 45 Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ........................... 97 Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) ............................ 45 Entering numbers ................................................................. 45 Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) ......................... 45 Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 140 Equal Temperament............................................................ 125 ESEQ .................................................................................. 148 Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 146 [EXIT] button .................................................................. 18, 40 exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 40 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button .................................... 18, 77 H F Layer.....................................................................................56 Layering Two Different Voices ..............................................56 LCD ......................................................................................15 [LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................18, 17 Left .......................................................................................57 LEFT CH. ..............................................................................79 [LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................18, 58 Left pedal........................................................................19, 58 Live! .....................................................................................55 Local Control ......................................................................134 Loop recording ...................................................................106 Lyrics ............................................................................81, 105 Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time ........... 137 [FADE IN / OUT] button................................................. 18, 65 FAVORITE ............................................................................ 71 [FF] button ..................................................................... 18, 76 File ....................................................................................... 39 File/Folder-related Operations .............................................. 41 Files/folders in a floppy disk ................................................. 42 Fill........................................................................................ 66 Filter..................................................................... 88, 105, 118 FINGERED ........................................................................... 62 FINGERED ON BASS............................................................ 62 First Key On ......................................................................... 99 FLOPPY DISK drive .............................................................. 39 Floppy disk drive .............................................................. 18, 6 Foot Controller ............................................................. 58, 143 Footswitch.................................................................... 58, 143 Formatting a Disk ............................................................... 139 [FREEZE] button...................................................... 19, 84, 131 FULL KEYBOARD................................................................. 62 [FUNCTION] button .................................................... 18, 122 G Gate Time ............................................................................ 95 GENRE ........................................................................... 70, 72 GENRE NAME ...................................................................... 72 GM System Level 1....................................................... 19, 149 Groove ............................................................................... 111 Groove parameters ............................................................. 111 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........6 Harmonic Content ................................................................88 HARMONY ............................................................58, 89, 132 Harmony Assignments ........................................................133 Harmony Types ..................................................................133 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ..........................................18, 58 Headphones .................................................................17, 141 Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages...........................................................49 [HELP] button .................................................................18, 49 High Key.............................................................................115 [HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 143 Hz ......................................................................................124 I ICON SELECT .......................................................................46 [INPUT VOLUME] knob ...............................................19, 141 Inputting and Editing Lyrics.................................................105 Instant Selection of Displays .................................................47 INTRO ..................................................................................66 [INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 64 K KEY SIGNATURE ..................................................................79 Keyboard Percussion.............................................................55 Keyboard stand (assembly)..................................................150 Keyboard Touch .................................................................130 Keyboard/Panel...................................................................130 KEYWORD .....................................................................70, 71 Kirnberger...........................................................................125 L M MAIN A/B/C/D......................................................................64 MAIN [A] button.............................................................18, 64 MAIN [B] button .............................................................18, 64 MAIN [C] button.............................................................18, 64 MAIN [D] button ............................................................18, 64 Maintaining Panel Settings ..................................................131 Making Global and Other Important Settings ......................122 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) ....134 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap .................................................137 Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System, and Voice Number Indication .........................................138 Making Settings for the Pedals.............................................128 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ......................128 Making Style File Format Settings........................................114 Master Tune........................................................................124 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................18, 17 Mean-Tone .........................................................................125 PF-1000 157 Index Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 95 [MEMORY] button.......................................................... 19, 82 Message Switch .................................................................. 135 Messages ................................................................................ 8 Metronome ........................................................................ 137 METRONOME [START / STOP] button ........................... 18, 50 [MIC LINE] switch ........................................................ 19, 141 [MIC / LINE IN] jack ..................................................... 19, 141 MIDI .................................................................................. 134 MIDI [THRU] [OUT] [IN] terminals.............................. 19, 143 MIDI channels.................................................................... 147 MIDI IN.............................................................................. 143 MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 143 MIDI Receive Parts ............................................................. 136 MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 140 MIDI terminals ................................................................... 143 MIDI THRU........................................................................ 143 Mix .................................................................................... 101 [MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 116 [MONO] button ............................................................. 18, 58 Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 42 MULTI FINGER .................................................................... 62 Multi Recording ................................................................... 92 [MUSIC FINDER] button .................................... 15, 18, 33, 69 Music Finder Record Edit ..................................................... 71 Music Finder Search ............................................................. 70 Music rest............................................................................. 16 Muting Specific Parts ............................................................ 77 N NAME .................................................................................. 41 Naming Files/Folders ............................................................ 41 Natural Voices ..................................................................... 86 Natural!................................................................................ 55 NEW (FOLDER) .................................................................... 44 NEW RECORD ..................................................................... 72 [NEXT] button .......................................................... 18, 40, 46 Normal................................................................................. 99 Note Events ........................................................................ 103 Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)................. 143 Note Limit .......................................................................... 115 NOTE NAME........................................................................ 80 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ........................................... 114 NTT (Note Transposition Table).......................................... 115 O OCTAVE ............................................................................ 118 One Touch Setting ............................................................... 32 ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons .................. 19, 67, 68 One-touch Piano Play .......................................................... 55 [ON / OFF] button (POWER) .......................................... 19, 17 Open/Save displays .............................................................. 38 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder .......................... 44 Other Parameters in the Basic Display................................ 109 Other Playback-related Operations....................................... 76 Other Settings..................................................................... 137 [OTS LINK] button.......................................................... 18, 68 Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in speakers of the PF-1000 .................................................. 142 Overdub recording ............................................................. 106 Owner................................................................................ 140 P Pad....................................................................................... 92 Parameter ........................................................................... 114 Parameter Lock................................................................... 138 158 PF-1000 PASTE .............................................................................42, 43 Pedal ..................................................................................128 Pedal (Center) .......................................................................58 Pedal (Left)............................................................................58 Pedal (Right) .........................................................................58 [PEDAL] jack ........................................................................19 Pedal unit .............................................................................16 Pedal-controllable Functions...............................................129 [PHONES] jacks............................................................19, 141 Phrase...................................................................................92 Phrase Mark..................................................................76, 126 [PIANO] button ........................................................15, 19, 55 PIANO (SOUND CREATOR).................................................87 Piano Lock function ..............................................................55 PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................118 Pitch settings for each scale ................................................125 Playback of Songs .................................................................21 Playing a style.................................................................28, 59 Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only................................61 Playing Along with the PF-1000............................................36 Playing and Practicing with the Songs...................................36 Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................................76 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands.........27 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections ...................................................66 Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously.................................56 Playing Styles........................................................................28 Playing the Demos..........................................................20, 52 Playing the Internal Songs .....................................................74 Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder...........................................................................142 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously......................................26 Playing Voices ......................................................................25 PORTAMENTO TIME..........................................................118 PRESET drive.........................................................................39 Preset MIDI Templates ........................................................134 Punch In/Out ........................................................................99 Pure Major..........................................................................125 Pure Minor..........................................................................125 Pythagorean........................................................................125 Q QUANTIZE ...........................................................................79 Quantize.....................................................................100, 113 Quantize Size .....................................................................100 Quick Recording...................................................................91 Quick Start..........................................................................126 R Realtime Recording.............................................................108 Realtime Recording Characteristics .....................................106 [REC] button ...................................................................18, 90 Rec Mode .............................................................................99 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup .................................84 Recalling the Registered Settings ...........................................84 Receive...............................................................................136 Receive Transpose ..............................................................135 Receiving MIDI Data ..........................................................136 record ...................................................................................69 Recording .............................................................................37 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment ......97 Recording Individual Notes...................................................94 Recording Melodies ..............................................................96 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs ................90 Registering Panel Setups .......................................................82 Index Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ............ 68 REGISTRATION BANK ......................................................... 83 REGISTRATION EDIT display ............................................... 83 Registration Memory ............................................................ 82 REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons ................... 19, 82 Registration Sequence ........................................................ 131 Regular Voices ..................................................................... 86 RELEASE ............................................................................... 88 Remove Event .................................................................... 113 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range .................................... 77 [REPEAT] button ............................................................. 18, 77 Replace ................................................................................ 71 Resonance............................................................................ 88 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PF-1000 ................................................................ 140 [REVERB] button............................................................. 18, 57 Reverb................................................................................ 121 [REW] button ................................................................. 18, 76 Rhythm ................................................................................ 92 RIGHT CH. .......................................................................... 79 Root ................................................................................... 136 RTR (Retrigger Rule) ........................................................... 115 S SAVE .................................................................................... 44 Save ............................................................................... 38, 44 Saving Files .......................................................................... 44 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.............................. 83 Scale .................................................................................. 125 Scale Tune ......................................................................... 124 Score .................................................................................... 78 Searching the Ideal Setups .................................................... 70 Searching the Music Finder Records ..................................... 34 Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons ............................................................ 64 sections ................................................................................ 30 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/ Out ................................................................................... 99 Selecting a Scale ................................................................ 124 Selecting a Voice.................................................................. 54 Selecting Files and Folders ................................................... 40 Selecting Intro and Ending Types .......................................... 66 Selecting items ..................................................................... 46 Selecting the Freeze Settings................................................. 84 Sequence Format................................................................ 148 sequencer........................................................................... 146 Set Up ................................................................................ 102 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters ............... 127 Setting Chord Channels ...................................................... 136 Setting Harmony and Echo ................................................. 132 Setting Root Note Channels ................................................ 136 Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard ................................................................ 57 Setting Song-related Parameters.......................................... 126 Setting the Fingering Method .............................................. 128 Setting the Level Balance and Voice ................................... 117 Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................................... 134 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ... 131 Setting the volume................................................................ 17 SFX....................................................................................... 55 Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV ....................... 133, 142 Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ....75 SINGLE FINGER ................................................................... 62 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................................................... 148 Song ............................................................................... 14, 73 SONG [START / STOP] button........................................ 18, 74 SONG AUTO REVOICE ..................................................... 117 Song Book ......................................................................22, 73 Song Creator .........................................................................90 Song Playback ..........................................................21, 73, 74 Song Recording.....................................................................90 Song Settings.......................................................................126 Sostenuto pedal ..............................................................19, 58 SOUND (SOUND CREATOR)...............................................87 SOUND CREATOR Parameters.............................................86 [SOUND CREATOR] button ...........................................18, 85 Source Root/Chord..............................................................114 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets .............................................................................131 SPEED...................................................................................88 Split Point ...........................................................................127 Step Record ..........................................................................94 Step Record (Chord)..............................................................97 Step Record (Note)................................................................96 Step Recording....................................................................109 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys................65 Style................................................................................14, 59 STYLE buttons ...........................................................18, 28, 59 STYLE CONTROL [START / STOP] button.................18, 28, 60 Style Creator .......................................................................106 Style File .......................................................................19, 148 Style File Format .................................................................107 Style Sections........................................................................30 Style Setting ........................................................................127 sustain ..................................................................................88 Sweet!...................................................................................55 [SYNC.START] button .....................................................18, 60 [SYNC.STOP] button.......................................................18, 65 SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) ..................................................104 System ................................................................................134 System Events .....................................................................104 System Messages.................................................................147 System Reset .......................................................................140 SYSTEM SET UP..................................................................140 T Tap Count...........................................................................138 [TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................18, 51 TEMPO [–] [+] buttons....................................................18, 50 TEMPO FROM......................................................................70 Tempo Indications — MAIN Display ....................................51 TEMPO TO ...........................................................................70 [TO HOST] terminal .......................................15, 19, 143, 144 [TOP] button...................................................................18, 76 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ......................................................18, 77 [TRACK 2 (L)] button.......................................................18, 77 Transmit..............................................................................135 Transmit Clock....................................................................135 Transmitting MIDI Data ......................................................135 TRANSPOSE [–] [+] buttons ..........................................18, 130 Transpose Assign ................................................................130 Tune ...................................................................................118 TUNING.............................................................................118 Tuning the Overall Pitch .....................................................124 U UP ........................................................................................44 USER drive............................................................................39 USER EFFECT..............................................................120, 140 Using the USB terminal on your computer with a USB/MIDI interface...............................................145 Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices ............................141 Utility .................................................................................137 PF-1000 159 Index V [VARIATION] button ...................................................... 18, 57 Velocity........................................................................ 95, 112 Velocity Change ................................................................. 113 VIBRATO ............................................................................. 88 [VIDEO OUT] jack ............................................... 19, 133, 142 Voice Allocation Format..................................................... 149 VOICE buttons ......................................................... 15, 19, 54 Voice Characteristics ............................................................ 55 Voice Effects......................................................................... 57 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button ......................... 18, 56 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button ............................ 18, 56 Voice Set ............................................................................ 132 Volume/Voice .................................................................... 117 W Werckmeister ..................................................................... 125 What You Can Do With MIDI ............................................ 147 What’s MIDI? ..................................................................... 145 X XF ................................................................................ 19, 148 XG ............................................................................... 19, 149 160 PF-1000 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 PF-1000 161 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. 162 PF-1000 (class B) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 ARGENTINA Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Professionnelle BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0661 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 THAILAND OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 INDONESIA SINGAPORE NORWAY OTHER COUNTRIES Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 MALAYSIA DENMARK Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 HONG KONG Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2445 SY23 PF-1000 163 Owner's Manual Yamaha Web Site (English only) www.yamahasynth.com Before using the PF-1000, be sure to read “ Precautions„ on pages 3-4. IMPORTANT Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ This document is printed on recycled chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink. Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation C 2002 Yamaha Corporation V939640 205APAP1.3-01A0 Printed in Japan DIC 338